Home

RTDAQ Real-Time Data Acquisition Software

Contents

1. The Introduction screen for the Wizard will appear Review the instructions and press Next Field Calibration This wizard will guide you through the process of calibrating your sensors First select the sensor to calibrate You may then be asked to enter information needed to perform the calibration Finally you will see the values and be able to calibrate those values Click Next to continue 9 9 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing Now select the kind of calibration you wish to perform which in this case is Multiplier and Offset and press Next Field Calibration Select the type of calibration to perform Zero a Offset i Multiplier amp Offset Multiplier Only Now select which sensor it is that you wish to calibrate and press Next You can select an entire array or any single element of that array as well as scalar single valued variables Any items that have been aliased i e given an alternate name using the Alias instruction in the CRBasic program will show by the alias name including aliased elements of an array Field Calibration Select the sensor to calibrate MeasMO0A MeasMDA 1 MeasMDA 2 MeasMOA 3 MeasMO Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing The currently measured value for the sensor will be displayed in the next screen Now place the sensor into the first known condition and enter that known value into the First calibrated v
2. Sle YValue i 7 10 9 4 Using Saved Configurations Select the Save tab to load a previously saved configuration of the Rainflow screen options or to save the current option settings as a configuration to be retrieved at a later time Graphing Options Scaling Visual Display Trace Save Save Graph Configuration Load Graph Configuration 7 77 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 78 After you have used the available options in the Rainflow options screen for some time you may find certain groups of settings which are useful to you again and again To facilitate the easy recall of such configurations you can save all of the current option screen selections together into a configuration file When you run RTDAQ at a later time and open the Rainflow screen you can load those settings into the window by simply loading the configuration file that you previously saved This allows you to set the options for the screen more easily and reliably This method also allows you to select from among multiple saved scenarios choosing the scenario that is best for the kind of data you wish to display Press Save Graph Configuration to save the current option settings to a file Specify a name for the file and browse to the folder in which you would like the configuration to be saved Press Load Graph Configuration to load up settings that have been previously saved Browse to the file containing
3. E XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values Add Y Add X Delete Select All Delete All Trace Options Add Y Value X Axis Value 24 5100002 Counter Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 35 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 6 3 Using the Control Buttons E XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensor1 addy Value Delete X Axis Value TempSensor3 Add Xx Value Delete Points per Field Once the proper y axis and x axis values have been selected and the number of points per field has been properly set begin displaying the x y plot points by pressing the Start button The points will begin displaying in the graphical area of the screen H XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensorl HER Addy Value Delete X Axis Value TempSensor3 13 91 Addx Value Delete Points per Field 100 Options Clear In addition to the actual points the scaling is also shown for the x and y axes The vertical scale on the left corresponds to the default y axis and the horizontal scale at the bottom corresponds to the x axis A y axis can also be 7 36 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time shown to the right of the points if the graph is configured that way To do this highlight the desired item in the Y Axis Values area press
4. Template files are associated with a specific datalogger type Templates for a CRS5000 cannot be used for CR9000X programming and vice versa Each datalogger has its own set of instructions that may be different than the other 5 3 4 Program Navigation using BookMarks and GoTo Bookmarks are lines of code in the program that the user marks which can be quickly navigated to using the Next Previous and List Bookmark functions Buttons for the bookmark function are available on the toolbar or in the GoTo Bookmarks menu Selecting the Toggle Bookmark option will add a bookmark to a line Selecting it a second time will remove the bookmark When a line is bookmarked the entire line will be highlighted with a color the 5 9 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 10 color can be changed using the View Editor Preferences menu item You can then navigate from bookmark to bookmark by selecting Previous or Next All bookmarks can be removed from the program by selecting Clear Bookmarks Bookmarks are also cleared when you close a program i e they are not saved with the program and will not exist the next time the program is opened All programs have certain common instructions such as the declaration of variables data table definitions the BeginProg EndProg statements and Scan NextScan The Goto function is used to move the cursor to the next occurrence of a common instruction in the program GoTo Navigation or choose the
5. The 1s in the string identify the position of the time stamp in the line of data Each colon represents a portion of the time stamp The format is 1 year 1 day 1 hour minute 1 seconds The colons in the time stamp must be present or the function will not work correctly 10 25 Section 10 Utilities 10 26 NOTE NOTE Time synchronization can only be done for data from a single year It will not work over a year boundary Time elements can be identified without specifying a starting time e g 2 3 If you are working with only one file Split will begin processing that file at the first record in the file If any gap in the data is found blank data or the Replace Bad Data With text and a carriage return line feed will be inserted for each line of missing data Note that Split will also detect a gap in data if for instance you specify a start time of 2 92 3 start at Julian day 92 and your hour minute for day 92 starts at 9 30 a m The time between the start of the day 0000 and 9 30 a m will be considered missing data Blanks or the Replace bad data with text and a carriage return line feed will be inserted at the beginning of the PRN file for each missed output interval If you are working with two or more files once Split starts processing the files based on the time of the first record of the first file if no data exists for the other file s blank data will be inserted If multiple input files are given
6. Automatic Max Value Custom Limits Min Value C Logarithmic 7 10 9 1 Scaling the Axes When data is displayed on the Rainflow window a scale is also displayed showing various values for bins on the screen You can control the y axis scale on the left side of the graph You can control the bin scales for the x axis below the graph Chose the Scaling tab from the Graphing Options screen to set up parameters used to space data on the x and y axes of the display Choose the Y Axis tab to customize the axis on the left side of the screen Choose the X Axis tab to customize the axis on the bottom of the screen With the Scaling Option section you choose the method used for determining the maximum and minimum values on the current axis as well as whether to use linear scaling equal interval scaling or logarithmic scaling Maximum and minimum values can be chosen automatically depending on the data set currently displayed or the user can specify what the maximum and minimum values should be If the Automatic option is selected the maximum and minimum values on the scale will be automatically chosen each time the screen is drawn Set the values in the input boxes of the Custom Limits section to use a scale with user configurable maximum and minimum values Choose the Logarithmic check box to use a logarithmic scale for the current axis Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time NOTE When using logarithmic scaling the minimum v
7. Field Monitor CR800Series jerm m m FFT Histogram 1 Select Table HstNoise Select Data Noisyval_Hst Graph Type Histogram 3D View Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins View Ranges O05 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 15 125 13 5 145 Frequency You may create multiple histogram windows in RTDAQ After histogram screens have been created they can be brought to the front by using the drop down list that becomes available on the FFT Histo button You will also use this drop down list to create histogram screens after at least one already exists since pushing the FFT Histo button at that point will bring the focus to an existing histogram window instead of creating a new one RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help X 337 OO ABBAN 00 Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data x a Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph xY Plot FFT Histo CR1000 i Field M Create New y 3 f z beak FFT Histogram 1 FFT Histogram 2 _CR800Series Add 7 49 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time For more information about configuring the histogram window see the section entitled Configuration of FFT and Histogram windows later in this chapter 7 8 Fast Fourier Transform Spectra 7 50 NOTE RTDAQ can display Fast Fourier Transform spectra FFT spectra that have been created by the datalogger The display will b
8. Select Table name Select Bin stc_RFH Zoom lt Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins O Show Range C Orthogonal 45 all 0 150 250 350 450 550 650 750 6850 950 Ampltudle Bin Values You can create multiple Rainflow windows in RTDAQ After Rainflow screens have been created they can be brought to the front by using the drop down list that becomes available on the Rainflow button You will also use this drop down list to create Rainflow screens after at least one window already exists since pushing the Rainflow button at that point will bring the focus to an existing Rainflow window instead of creating a new one RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File view Datalogger Network Tools Help co 3 00 ABRAN OOO Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data peli eee Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Hista Rainflow 7 Field Monitor RainFlow 1 RainFlow 2 paa _ a 7 10 3 Movement and Resizing of the Rainflow Window The Rainflow screen can be moved by dragging the title bar You can resize a Rainflow screen as desired by dragging the window corners You can also maximize restore and minimize the screen using the standard buttons in the upper right corner of the window or by clicking on the window s icon in the upper left corner When minimized the Rainflow screen shows as an icon on the Windows task bar
9. cR1000 Create New EZ ldMontor Field Monitor E ht XY Plot 1 XY Plot 2 CR800Series 7 31 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 32 7 6 2 Setting up the XY Plot for Display To set up values for display on the XY Plot you can add one or more y axis values and one x axis value The x axis value will be used as the independent horizontal axis and the y axis values will be plotted with their values placed horizontally to match the x axis value and their actual values given as the y axis values Y Axis Values 7 6 2 1 Setting Values for Display To add a y axis value to the XY Plot window place a measurement onto the numeric monitoring area labeled Y Axis Values You can add one or more traces from the same table or from different tables Press the Add Y Value button Navigate through the Tables pane of the Add Selection screen or select an entire table Select the desired field Press Paste or drag and drop your selection into the Y Axis Values area You can use the Stay on Top or List Alphabetically options of the Add Selection screen to make your selection process easier The name of the measurement will appear and the current value will be displayed next to it after the XY Plot window has been started m XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensor1 28 13 To remove a Y Axis Value after it has been added highlight that measurement by clicking on its name with the mouse and pressing the Delete
10. eee eee eeeeeeeneeeeeee 7 15 7 4 3 Moving and Resizing the Graph Window eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 7 4 4 Basic Graph Operation cee ceesccssecseeseceereeceseeeceaeeeeeseeseeeeens 7 16 7 4 5 Zooming and Scaling the Graph Window eeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 17 7 4 6 Data Retrieval Methods used by the Graph Screen 7 18 7 4 7 Drawing Methods used by the Graph Screen 7 20 7 4 8 Graph Window Display and Print Options eee eeeeeeeeeeee 7 20 74 9 Setting the Options for the Graph Screen n 7 21 7A 9 1 Scaling the AXES eaaeo eain aSa 7 22 7 4 9 2 Data Display Options eseseeseeeesseeiesesrsrsisrerrersersesrrreerees 7 23 7 4 9 3 Visual Display Options ces ceeecsseeeeeeceeeeecneteeeeeeees 7 25 74 9 4 Customizing the Traces on the Display eee 7 25 74 9 5 Using Saved Configurations cc ceceeecsseeeeetecreeseeners 7 28 7 4 10 Accepting or Abandoning Changes to the Graph Options 7 29 Tid Fast Graphs senripare enhance asst dijon dias Sa EE nap TEESE 7 29 7 9 1 Usine the Fast Graph erino A E tite tien shee 7 29 7 5 2 Similarity between the Real Time Graph and the Fast Graph 7 30 TO XY Plot hie asaya aida wii nia oat eee 7 30 70 1 Using the XY Plots ise cibescsahestit ash ea ro erona Ea iiai 7 30 7 6 2 Setting up the XY Plot for Display ee eee cseeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 32 7 6 2 1 Setting Values for Display 0 cece ee seceseceeeeecneeeeeeeeeees 7 32 7 6 2 2 Number of Points per F
11. 0 01106331 FFTView_FTs 2 0 0008042299 FFTView_FTs 3 0 000962434 FFTView_FTs 4 0 0009331448 FFT View_FTs 5 0 000841 4056 FFTView_FTs 6 0 0007917665 FFTView_FTs 7 0 0006215886 FFTView_FTs 8 0 000491959 FFTView_FTs 9 0 0006131945 FFTView_FTs 10 0 0004898924 FFTView_FTs 11 0 000194038 FFTView_FTs 12 00002729531 Lerr rr em AAA 35 C Save To File sgpoosicbelscNATOAN ENEN va y ae lt C Save To File 7 3 2 1 Start and Stop NOTE Once a table is selected for monitoring press the Start button to begin displaying the data for that table only The number of records stored in the selected table is shown below the table selection box in the Table Size area Each table has its own Start Stop button Press Stop to discontinue the display of the current table s data You may need to scroll with the vertical scroll bar to see the fields of interest from your selected table You can display the same table in more than one column of a single Table Monitor screen or you can display the same table in multiple Table Monitor screens In such cases starting one column that displays the table with the Start button will start all of them 7 3 2 2 Fields and Values For each table a grid with two columns is displayed Fields and Values Fields lists the names of each column of the selected table Values displays the last retrieved value for that column The displayed values are updated a
12. Compiled in SequentialMode Wiring Text Finish Help lt Previous The Results tab provides information on the files that were created If a program was created successfully a Send Program button will also be displayed which allows you to send the program to the datalogger The files generated by Short Cut are as follows e ProgramName SCW Example SCW in this example at the top of the screen is the file in which Short Cut keeps all of your selections for datalogger sensors outputs etc e For CR10 CR10X CR500 510 CR23X and 21X dataloggers including mixed array table data and PakBus operating systems ProgramName DLD is the ASCII text file that must be sent to the datalogger for it to make the measurements and store the data you want For CR800 series CR1000 CR3000 CR5000 and CR9000X dataloggers this file will be the CR1 CR2 CR3 CR5 CR8 or C9X file For CR200 dataloggers this file will be a BIN binary image file e ProgramName DFF is the text file that describes the wiring for the sensors and devices to the datalogger measurement labels flag usage and the output expected You can view the contents of the DEF file by clicking the Summary button on the Results screen 5 39 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 40 e For mixed array dataloggers ProgramName FSL is a text file containing output labels created for mixed array dataloggers only This file can be used by Spl
13. D3 TOO Darts A E E sees veesayesssepeusssbesaness 5 5 DSi Compile es eree ee eeraa aaa ear pases soviet elated ieee ys 5 7 5 3 2 Compile Save and Send ceccecccsseesseeceesceeeeeeeceeeceeeeseenaeenes 5 7 5 3 3 Templates scsi 8st nae Soe 5 9 5 3 4 Program Navigation using BookMarks and GoTO0 eee 5 9 5 3 5 CRBasic Editor View Menu eeceeecseecceeeeceseceeeecereeeeeens 5 10 533 5 1 Editor Preferences sir sseesentiienioeesncin cn anh okie 5 10 5 3 5 2 Instruction Panel Preferences cc eeeeesceseceeetecreeeeeee 5 12 5 3 5 3 Other Options s cscissa shes te a haee eases 5 12 5 3 6 CRBasic Editor Edit Menu eeeececseeeceeeeeeseceeeecnereeeeaees 5 13 5336 1 Other Options swiss e eaa ara ea a E EOR EEE ERORA 5 13 5 3 7 CRBasic Editor Tools Menu sseeeseeeeeeeeeeiereeesrsrrrrerererereereee 5 13 5 3 7 1 Edit Instruction Categories cc eseeeseeceteeeeeecneeeeens 5 13 5 3 7 2 Other OPN cee cesescibei ae E Bede Sek 5 14 5 3 8 Available Help Information 0 0 0 0 cieeceeeceseeeeeeecreeeeeseeeeeeeene 5 14 RTDAQ Table of Contents 5 4 CRBasic Programing osi meiri ohenee Se nk Ea ei oe drone 5 15 5 4 1 Programming Sequence sssseeeeseeeseseeieresssrseserrrersrsrsrsrereeree 5 15 5 4 2 Program DeclarationSs sseseeeeesesesesesesieressrseserrrereessrsrsrerreree 5 16 5 4 3 Mathematical Expressions s seseesesesssessreereresrsrsrrreerereresesrsee 5 17 5 4 4 Measurement and Output Processing
14. Print Prints the XY Plot Print options can be set before printing begins Lal Export Allows the XY Plot to be exported in a choice of text or graphical formats 6 14 Section 6 View Pro Graph Options Opens a dialog box from which you can set properties for the XY Plot including colors margins titles symbols marks scaling etc R7 Show Table Brings the main View Pro window in front of other windows making the data file s visible El Show Hide Gradient A toggle button that turns on and off the gradient background of the XY Plot It may be useful to hide the gradient when printing the XY Plot Pl Undo Zoom Returns the XY Plot to its original state after zooming Si 6 5 4 Rainflow Histogram NOTE From the Rainflow Histogram screen you can view Rainflow Histogram data The Rainflow Histogram button on the toolbar will be enabled if there is at least one valid Rainflow Histogram in the currently selected data file A Rainflow Histogram is a 3D representation based on the rainflow counting algorithm of Endo and Matsuiski which was first published in 1968 These diagrams can be used to monitor fatigue levels of structures under stress such as components of a large bridge ViewPro does not create Rainflow Histogram data from time series information It only displays Rainflow Histogram data contained in a DAT file Rainflow Histogram data in the DAT file is created by using the CRBasic Rainflow instruc
15. R or Q Switch Typically when Split is run after the file is processed the user must close the Screen Display window When Splitr exe is run from a command line the user must also close the Screen Display window unless the R switch is used The syntax for this switch is SPLITR LOGAN R where LOGAN is the parameter file name The R switch should follow immediately after the parameter file name with no space between the two If a space is used the following message will be displayed There was a problem opening the input file File could not be found or may be in use The Q switch is similar in function and syntax to R However if Split encounters an error when processing the file no message box is displayed that requires user response the exceptions are a disk space error or an internal error with the Split executable This option should be used with caution since there will be no indication of a problem if a file cannot be processed 10 3 6 1 2 Running Splitr in a Hidden or Minimized State H Switch Splitr can be run in a minimized state so that the Screen Display window does not interrupt other processes on the computer The syntax for running Splitr minimized is SPLITR H LOGAN where LOGAN is the parameter file name The H switch must be positioned after SPLITR but before the parameter file name and a space is required between the executable name and the switch 10 57 Section 10 Utilities 10 58 10 3 6
16. The Vertical Spacing tab is used to set up the rules for the CRBasic Editor s Rebuild Indentation function Edit Rebuild Indentation You can control whether blank lines are inserted before or after certain instructions and how the CRBasic Editor will process multiple blank lines in the program If Do Not Insert or Remove Any Blank Lines is selected all other fields on this tab will be disabled If either of the other two line options is chosen the remaining fields will be available for the user to customize as desired Editor Options Editor Vertical Spacing Syntax Highlighting Spacing Options Do Not Insert Or Remove Any Blank Lines C Remove Multiple Blank Lines C Apply Instruction Based Line Insertion Removal Below Blank Line Before Instruction Blank Line After Instruction The Syntax Highlighting tab sets up the appearance of different text elements in the program using different font styles and colors You can customize the appearance of the text by giving normal text keywords comments operators numbers strings and parentheses each a different font style and color to make the program easier to read and edit Text colors and styles can be disabled by clearing the Syntax Highlighting check box Editor Options Editor Vertical Spacing Syntax Highlighting Normal Text JE Syntax Highlighting ia B a Normal Text C Bold J Italic 5 11 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 1
17. ceeeeeseeeeeeeereeeeee 7 53 79 3 Using the Buttons ss eieae e a eaa sii a EEEE S 7 53 TIA BD VIEW enteo dhe danse sila ias E a E bee eee 7 55 195 X AXis MOd 3 55 ayia fiche eared shite a i e tela 7 57 7 9 6 Zooming in on the Spectrum or Histogram 7 58 7 9 7 Save and Print Options ceceescsseecesseceeesecseeeeceaeeeeeaeceeeeeens 7 58 7 9 8 Setting the Options for the FFT Histogram Screen 4 7 60 7 9 8 1 Scaling the AX S i355 seca iesieste nthe dierent reas 7 60 7 9 8 2 Data Display OPptions cceseesesecseeeecneeeeceaeeeeeseeeeeeeens 7 61 7 9 8 3 Visual Display Options cceeeeeeesseceeseceeeecneeeeeeaees 7 62 7 9 8 4 Individual Trace Options cceeeseeeseeeeceseeeeeeceeeeen 7 63 7 9 8 5 Using Saved Configurations ceeeesescetesreesecreeeeeee 7 64 7 9 9 Accepting or Abandoning Changes to the FFT Histogram OPHONS i Anariren i evn vateevece Giatehaareenes ghana E aT 7 65 7 10 Rainflow Histogram Monitoring seeeeeseeeeesesesreesrerrereresrsrererrereerees 7 66 7 10 1 Rainflow Histogram Overview ccsscsescseeseceteeeeeeceeeens 7 66 7 10 2 Opening Rainflow Histograms sssescseseeseeeeeceeeens 7 66 7 10 3 Movement and Resizing of the Rainflow Window 7 67 7 10 4 Selecting Tables and Bins For Display eeseeeseeeeeeeees 7 68 7 10 5 Using the Buttons and Controls ce ceeeesecseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeens 7 68 71026 X Ax18 Modetescciicd ines schist ei
18. A 3 Binary Data Value Types When data is written in datalogger memory or in binary data files each value must be assigned a particular data type These data types describe the format of the data A 3 1 FP2 2 Byte Low Resolution Format A two byte floating point number format created by Campbell Scientific Inc and used to store low resolution values Basically this format consists of a single sign bit a two bit negative decimal exponent and a 13 bit mantissa For more detail refer to the CR1000 manual or the CRBasic Help A 3 2 FP4 4 Byte High Resolution Format A 3 3 IEEE4 A four byte floating point number format created by Campbell Scientific Inc and used for input location values as well as high resolution final storage values This format consists of a single sign bit a seven bit base two exponent and a 24 bit mantissa A standard four byte floating point number format used for certain values within a record This format consists of a single sign bit an eight bit binary exponent and a 23 bit mantissa A 5 Appendix A Campbell Scientific File Formats A 3 4 IEEE8 A standard eight byte floating point number format used for certain values within a record This format consists of a single sign bit an 11 bit exponent and a 52 bit mantissa A 4 Converting Binary File Formats A 6 A 4 1 Split Campbell Scientific dataloggers not only use the previously mentioned binary file formats but users may also choose
19. Bounds Program Errors Battery Voltage Lithium Battery Number of times voltage has dropped below 12V Number of times voltage has dropped below 5V Stack Errors and Calibration Errors Note that not all status values are applicable to all dataloggers Only those status values applicable to the current datalogger will be checked If a problem is found during a datalogger status check the status table will pop up along with a warning indicating the problem that has been identified Show Hints The Show Hints option is used to turn on off the tool tips that appear when your mouse hovers over a control button or field When a check mark appears beside the menu item the tool tips will be displayed When the check mark does not appear beside the menu item no tool tips will be displayed This menu item is a toggle select it to change its state Sooner or later every communications link will experience some problems Sometimes these problems resolve themselves such as when phone lines are busy at first but become available as other users complete their tasks When the resolution of communications problems is not straightforward the LogTool application can allow detailed analysis of communications activity LogTool is accessed from the Tools LogTool menu item Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen LogTool File view Tools Help C Pause all E i la lo o aO x Transaction Log sss 2007 10 16 12 13 30 PM CR9000X 11 Clock check
20. CRBasic and the CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator Datalogger setup and status functions are also available along with access to RTMC Real time Monitoring and Control applications This functionality is also accessible from the RTDAQ menu along with other tools such as the Terminal Emulator PakBus Graph and LogTool a program for viewing and storing communication logs Each application includes extensive online help Some utilities installed with RTDAQ can be opened independently from the main RTDAQ program by using the Windows Start Menu item Programs RTDAQ Utilities These utilities include the Device Configuration Utility or DevConfig View Pro and CardConvert DevConfig is used to send new operating systems to dataloggers and other peripheral devices and to configure the settings of those dataloggers and devices View Pro enables the viewing and graphing of collected data and CardConvert converts data files originating from removable card storage into other useful formats Section 1 Introduction 1 1 2 Clock Program and the EZSetup Wizard Setting up the RTDAQ datalogger network is a relatively simple process with the EZSetup Wizard which guides you through the steps necessary to add and enter settings for dataloggers Once a datalogger is added to the list you can choose the Edit Datalogger button to activate the Wizard again and change those settings Progress through the Wizard is shown on the left side of the screen
21. For example 2 1 1 tells Split to begin processing on the first day of the previous month 2 0 15 tells Split to begin processing on the fifteenth day of the current month 2 5 1 tells Split to begin processing on May 1 This function can be used in both the Start and Stop conditions It provides a simple way to create a monthly report CAUTION Split will not start reading if the exact specified starting time cannot be found unless you enable the Start Stop On After Time feature The interval 5 minutes 60 minutes and 5 seconds in the examples above must be evenly divisible into 60 minutes NOTE e Ifthe start time is a certain number of days prior to the PC time the file will be processed beginning at midnight of the day specified e To specify a start time in minutes from the current PC time you must also specify a day parameter of 0 Otherwise processing will begin at the first instance in the data file that the minutes parameter equals the current minutes 10 3 3 2 3 Using Time Synchronization While Starting Relative to PC Time Split tries to time sync files to the top of the hour when starting relative to PC time If you are synchronizing files where the data output interval is not at the top of the hour you will need to specify an interval in the Copy Condition that represents a window of time in which Split should look for the hour minute For instance if your data is output 50 minutes into a 60 min
22. Graphing Data from Multiple Data Files Data from multiple data files can be displayed in a single graph This is done by opening multiple data files and selecting data to be graphed as described for each graph type below This may be useful when comparing data from multiple datalogger stations Options Each type of graph has several different options that can be set by the user Options that apply to the entire graph are generally set from a dialog box that is opened by pressing the Options button at the lower left of the graph window by pressing the Graph Options button x on the toolbar or by right clicking on the graph and choosing Options Note that the XY Plot does not have an Options button so the Options dialog box is opened by pressing the Graph Options button on the toolbar or right clicking on the graph Options that apply to individual traces are set by selecting the trace in the list of data values being graphed and then pressing the Edit button located below that list The XY Plot does not have user configurable trace options For information on graph options refer to the online help Help for a graph can be accessed by pressing the button in the upper right corner of the graph Zoom Feature You can zoom in on a particular area of a graph by holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse cursor from top left to bottom right over the area to be zoomed Dragging the mouse cursor from bottom right to top left will u
23. Section 5 Program Creation and Editing TABLE 5 4 3 Synonyms for True and False Predefined Constant True 1 False 0 Synonym High Low Synonym On Off Synonym Yes No Synonym Trigger Do Not Trigger Number 0 0 Digital port 5 Volts 0 Volts 5 4 10 2 Expression Evaluation Conditional tests require the datalogger to evaluate an expression and take one path if the expression is true and another if the expression is false For example If X gt 5 then Y 0 will set the variable Y to 0 if X is greater than or equal to 5 The datalogger will also evaluate multiple expressions linked with and or or For example If X gt 5 and Z 2 then Y 0 will set Y 0 only if both X gt 5 and Z 2 are true If X gt 5 or Z 2 then Y 0 will set Y 0 if either X gt 5 or Z 2 is true see And and Or in the help A condition can include multiple and and or links 5 4 10 3 Numeric Results of Expression Evaluation The datalogger s expression evaluator evaluates an expression and returns a number A conditional statement uses the number to decide which way to branch The conditional statement is false if the number is 0 and true if the number is not 0 For example If 6 then Y 0 is always true Y will be set to 0 any time the conditional statement is executed If 0 then Y 0 is always false Y will never be set to 0 by this conditional statement The expression evaluator evaluates the expression X gt 5
24. The Style check box selects what data will be displayed in the marking The y value x value or both can be displayed Use the Save Tab to save the current set of configured options to a configuration file or to retrieve a previously saved set of configuration options The options that are set up in all other tabs can be saved or restored based on your selection to save or load the configuration Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Save Graph Configuration Load Graph Configuration 7 6 7 Applying Changes to the XY Plot Screen After you have set up the Graphing Options to the desired configuration press the Apply button to save your changes for the current session of RTDAQ The Graphing Options screen will remain open for further review and investigation of settings Press OK to apply the changes and close the Options screen Press the Cancel button to abandon changes that have not been applied other than a configuration saved into a file and close the screen Press the Help button to view the online help topic relating to this screen 7 47 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Save Y Axis Right Y Axis X Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits Automatic Max Value Custom Limits Min Value C Logarithmic 7 7 Histogram Monitoring RTDAQ can display histograms that have been created by the datalogger The d
25. This option provides the same function as the Connect Disconnect button on the main toolbar see Section 4 7 4 9 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 10 4 6 3 2 Update Table Definitions When a CRBasic datalogger is configured for the first time or when a new program is sent RTDAQ queries the datalogger for its table definitions Whenever a new program is loaded into the datalogger the table definitions will automatically be sent to RTDAQ When using the real time screens to view data RTDAQ requires the latest table definitions in order to work properly To avoid unnecessary data throughput on a datalogger this information is not sent to RTDAQ with every configuration change but only when deemed necessary such as when a program changes If you find the table definitions in RTDAQ to be mismatched with the datalogger program you can update those definitions manually To update the table definitions for a datalogger manually connect to that datalogger and select Update Table Definitions from the Datalogger menu 4 6 3 3 Status Table CRBasic dataloggers include a default data table called the Status Table which displays key values about the condition of the datalogger The Datalogger Status Table menu item opens a window to display that information Records from the datalogger s status table are generated on demand Each datalogger has its own list of status fields but they typically include such information as the hardware o
26. Use the close button red X to finish using a Rainflow screen There is also a help button the question mark button that brings up online help about the Rainflow window Create New 7 67 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time E RainFlow 2 Select Table FFTOut Select Table p FFTOut v Select Bins FFTView_ AFH To display a rainflow histogram you must select a table and bin for display First use the Select Table drop down box to choose a table containing a rainflow output instruction Only tables with rainflow outputs will be listed Some CRBasic programs are written with more than one Rainflow output instruction in the same table in which case multiple items will show on this list Next use the Select Bin drop down box to choose the desired bin for display from that table With these two items properly selected you can press the Start button to begin monitoring rainflow histograms as they are received by RTDAQ from the datalogger The y axis scale is shown on the left side of the display and the x axis scale is shown at the bottom of the display 7 10 5 Using the Buttons and Controls Press the Start button to begin graphing the histograms from the datalogger RTDAQ retrieves data as quickly as it can from the datalogger Histograms will be displayed in the graphical area of the Rainflow screen Press the Stop button to discontinue retrieving and graphing data The Rainflow window di
27. all of the existing data tables in datalogger memory are deleted If data is also being stored to a card select an option button to determine whether or not the data tables created by the program and stored on the card are to be erased or retained To use the Erase all card data files option when sending a program to a CR9000X or CR5000 datalogger you must send the program to the datalogger first without starting it and then select the Run Options on the program from the File Control screen You can then start the program and select the Erase option or the Do Not Erase option With the CR1000 and CR3000 dataloggers this setting can be selected when the program is sent to the datalogger Run On Power up sets the file to run when the datalogger is powered down and powered back up A file set to Run Now and Run On Power up will be shown as Run Always in the File Control window Delete Highlight a file and press the Delete button to remove the file from the datalogger s memory A running program may not be deleted Stop Program halts execution of the currently running datalogger program For all dataloggers but the CR800 CR1000 and CR3000 note that all data tables will be deleted when the program is stopped For a CR800 CR1000 or CR3000 select the option to stop the program and retain the data files or to stop the program and erase all data files If a CR800 CR1000 or CR3000 program has been stopped use the Run Options to resta
28. and 15 Ibs on a conventional scale at two different times With the first known weight on the scale 5 Ibs this is the first condition in which the scale should give a known reading for its output The calibration is triggered the datalogger is informed of the value of the known weight and the measurement is read The datalogger then notifies the user that it is ready to measure the second point The second known weight is placed on the scale 15 Ibs and this is the second condition in which the scale should give a known reading for its output The second point of calibration is triggered the datalogger is informed of the value of the second known weight and the measurement is read At this point the new multiplier and offset are calculated by the datalogger and the variables are adjusted accordingly to ensure that the scaling gives a properly matched Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing reading for those two conditions For future measurements unknowns a linear response will be used based on the line defined by those two points To perform a two point multiplier and offset calibration use an argument of 2 the number two for the calibration type in the FieldCal instruction of your CRBasic program The Calibration Wizard can be used to calculate and apply the two different known conditions while the program is running in the datalogger The simplest way to set up a program that does two point multiplier and offset calibration is
29. command can be added to a batch file command line to delay execution of the next command until the first command has finished The Start command has different arguments depending upon the operating system you are using Refer to your computer s on line help for information on this command 10 3 6 3 Processing Alternate Files Splitr allows the user to select different input and or output files for an existing parameter file by entering them on the command line after the parameter file name For example Splitt LOGAN PAR R TEST DAT TEST PRN Replaces the Input and Output file names in LOGAN PAR with TEST DAT and TEST PRN respectively A space must be used to separate command line parameters Splitr uses as many entries as exist on the command line However the command line has a limit to the number of characters it can accommodate this limit is operating system dependent The parameters must be in the following sequence Input file name Output file name Start Condition Stop Condition Copy Condition and Select Section 10 Utilities If a parameter is to be left as it is in the parameter file then space comma space may be entered in the command line For instance if the parameter file LOGAN PAR contained TEST1 DAT as an input file name the following command line would leave the input file TEST1 DAT and change the output file to TEST PRN SPLITR LOGANIR TEST PRN 10 3 6 3 1 Input Output File Command Line
30. entries will bring up a list of those available options Right clicking or pressing F2 on a parameter that does not fall within the two categories above will bring up help for that parameter Pressing F7 with any parameter selected will bring up help for that parameter along with a list of possible options where appropriate Changing Default Parameters Values for an Instruction Each instruction offers default values for each parameter For instance in the Parameter box above the default for the Range is mV5000 If you wanted to edit this so that each time you inserted the VoltDiff instruction the Range value defaulted to mV1000 you would highlight the instruction in the Instruction Panel select Instruction Edit Instruction Defaults from the menu and make the change in the resulting dialog box 5 3 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 4 5 2 2 Right Click Functionality The result of a right click action varies depending upon your cursor location Right click an instruction name to show the Parameter dialog box to edit the instruction parameters Right click a parameter that uses a variable as an input type to bring up a list of variables that have been defined in the program as described in the previous section Right click a parameter that has a finite number of valid entries to bring up a list of those available options You can change the option by clicking the desired option Right click another type of param
31. hrmn sec are different each time the data are collected but by telling Split where to Start reading relative to the PC clock the Start Conditions do not need to be changed To accommodate variations in the data collection and reduction frequencies an interval in minutes or seconds may be specified as shown in the examples below Section 10 Utilities 2 0 3 60 5 tells Split to start at a timestamp in the data that is between 55 and 65 minutes prior to the current PC time the closest 5 minute interval of the current day that is less than the PC time minus 60 minutes If you are processing data stored at the top of the hour and the PC time is 1404 Split calculates 1304 and looks for hour 1300 to start reading 2 3 3 120 60 tells Split to find the closest 60 minute interval that is less than the PC time minus 3 days and 2 hours If the PC time is the day of year 159 hour 0017 Split will start reading on data output at 2200 hours on day 1510 3 2 3 3 120 4 20 5 tells Split to find the closest 5 second interval that is less than the PC time minus 3 days 2 hours and 20 seconds If the PC time is 27 seconds after noon on day 30 Split will begin reading on data output at 1000 hours and 05 seconds on day 27 Split can also begin processing a file on a particular month and day Use the syntax E Month Day where E is the element that contains the Julian Day and Month and Day are either constants or a value related to PC time
32. mVolts mVolts M WwW a nS Smp Smp Smp ULONG ULONG ULONG ITEEE4 TEEE4 FP2 ASCII 25 Header line one describes the file environment with the following eight fields e Data file type TOB1 e Station name STATION e Model name of the datalogger CR9000 e Serial number of the datalogger 1000 e Operating system on the datalogger 1 00 e Name of the program running in the datalogger CPU BIB DLD e Signature of the program running in the datalogger 25871 e The name of the datalogger table VALUES A 2 Appendix A Campbell Scientific File Formats Header line two consists of a set of comma delimited strings identifying the names of the fields in the table of the datalogger program Header line three describes the units associated with each field in the record Units are optional and are specified in the datalogger program if included If no units are provided in the program then an empty string placeholder is left in this line for that specific field Header line four describes the processing performed in the datalogger to produce the value for each field in the record for example sample average min max etc If there is no known processing for a field that field will be assigned an empty processing string There will be one value on this line for each field name given on header line two Header line five describes the data type for each field and
33. on off 1 0 true false Variables for CRBasic dataloggers can be declared as boolean with the Public or Dim statement The display configuration of the Ports amp Flags window will persist for the current datalogger upon exit and is restored when you connect later to the same datalogger and open the Ports amp Flags window 7 3 Table Monitor The Table Monitor window displays data items from a datalogger on a table by table basis Up to three tables may be displayed at the same time in each Table Monitor window Fields within a table may not be selected for individual display All fields from each selected table will be displayed together 7 3 1 Using the Table Monitor To use the Table Monitor ensure that you are connected to a datalogger then select the Monitor Data tab Click on the button labeled Table Monitor RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Kon SS OD A X Clock Program Collect Data a x Z m E Er im Ports amp Flags Table Monito Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histo Rainflow cr1000 Field Monitor y Add _CRenOSeies 7 9 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Now you will see the Table Monitor window Table Monitor 1 Columns 3 Show Units B Select Table Select Table Select Table x Start Start Table Size Table Size Table Size Fields Values Fields Values Save To File Sav
34. program e The processing performed in the datalogger to produce each value in the table e A timestamp and record number can optionally be included as part of the record data If the timestamp is present it will be formatted with sub second resolution e Data values are formatted as comma separated text suitable for importing into spreadsheet or database applications e Each TOAS file contains data from only one table A 1 Appendix A Campbell Scientific File Formats An example showing a TOAS file containing the optional timestamp and record number TOAS CR1000 CR1000 1031 CR1000 Std 00 60 CPU Test CR1 4062 Test TIMESTAMP RECORD batt_volt_Min PTemp TST RNW Volts woe ao ar MinT Smp 2004 11 11 15 03 45 0 13 7 24 92 2004 11 11 15 04 00 1 13 7 24 95 2004 11 11 15 04 15 2 13 7 24 98 A 1 2 TOB1 TOB files can be generated by RTDAQ when saving data files to the PC This binary file format is typically only used when it is essential to minimize the file size or when other software requires this format It has the following structure ASCII header line 1 ASCII header line2 ASCII header line3 ASCII header line 4 ASCII header line5 Binary Records An example of a TOB1 ASCII header TOB1 STATION CR9000 1000 1 00 CPU BIG DLD 25871 VALUES SECONDS NANOSECONDS RECORD Array 1 Array 2 Fast my_string Y Ww M RN mVolts
35. state when you choose Print Preview the current snapshot will be displayed for printing and the rainflow display will continue to display newer data in the background Selecting the Clear option will clear the display the same as pressing the Clear button see description of the Clear button above Selecting the Start Stop option will start or stop the display of points on the Rainflow screen the same as pressing the Start or Stop button see description of the Start and Stop buttons above m RainFlow 1 Mean Bins 300 500 700 Amplitude Bin Values An example of a Rainflow screen with its controls hidden Choose the Hide Controls option to temporarily remove all of the controls used to configure the Rainflow graph including the Options Clear and Start Stop buttons This will give more room on the screen for viewing the graph While the controls are hidden some of them may still be accessed by using the short cut menu via a right click as described above To restore the controls right click again in the graph and choose Show Controls 7 73 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 74 7 10 9 Setting the Options for the Rainflow Screen Set the options for the current Rainflow screen by pressing the Options button or by selecting Options from a right click menu The Graphing Options screen appears Graphing Options Scaling Visual Display Trace Save Vans x Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits
36. the card is removed from the CFM100 without pressing the Card Control button to stop data storage to the card This corruption can be at the beginning of the data file or anywhere within the stored data Using the standard conversion option CardConvert will stop if it encounters a corrupted frame of data because it assumes it has come to the end of the data file If corrupted frames of data are found at the beginning of the file CardConvert will display a message indicating that no data could be found on the card If corrupted frames of data are found within the data file you may get some but not all of the data that you expect in the converted file CardConvert offers a repair option which will attempt to scan the card for good frames of data and output that data to a new binary file the original file is unchanged To start the repair of a file highlight the suspected corrupt file in the list of Source Filenames and right click to display a floating menu Select the Repair File option from the list The repair process will create a new TOB3 file the default name is Repair_existingfilename which can then be converted to an ASCII file using the standard CardConvert process 10 5 Section 10 Utilities NOTE When CardConvert comes to what it believes is the end of the data file during the repair process the end of valid frames it will stop and display a message The message prompts the user either to continue searching the file for
37. with steps for choosing a datalogger defining the communications path between the computer and the datalogger fine tuning settings for the datalogger e g baud rate or security code testing communications checking or setting the clock and finally sending a program or viewing a program file which is already running After a datalogger has been added you can select and connect to that datalogger from the Clock Program tab via point and click operations EZSetup Wizard CR5000_2 CR5000 Progress Datalogger Type and Name ick eiss Select the datalogger type and enter a name for your datalogger Communication Setup Datalogger Name Datalogger Settings Setup Summary ication Test i ii Communication Tes Click Next to continue Datalogger Clock Send Program CR800Series v Wizard Complete i 4 Previous _ Next gt Cancel l Datalogger Help 1 1 3 Monitor Data Once yov ve added and connected to a datalogger the Monitor Data tab switches to a view that lets you monitor the latest values measured on the datalogger You can monitor variables as they are updated after each execution of the datalogger program scan or monitor the latest data items that have been stored into the datalogger s tables The Monitor Data tab also lets you edit public variables directly or view data using several available real time monitors 1 1 3 1 Real time Monitors RTDAQ has a variety of windows for vi
38. 16 96 99 2002 35 2245 14 26 14 05 2233 22 58 2242 17 36 60 2002 35 2300 14 26 14 01 2200 22 62 2252 16 93 99 2002 35 2300 14 26 14 05 2256 22 62 2252 17 69 99 2002 35 2315 14 24 14 05 2300 22 55 2300 17 42 99 2002 35 2330 14 18 14 01 2329 22 51 2329 17 31 99 2002 35 2345 14 24 14 00 2336 22 51 2331 17 14 60 2002 35 2400 14 26 14 00 2336 22 55 2300 17 14 24 2002 35 2400 14 26 13 70 1244 23 67 730 4 479 99 2002 35 2400 14 26 14 05 2348 22 51 2355 17 20 99 2002 36 15 14 24 14 05 13 22 55 l2 17 50 99 2002 36 30 14 26 14 05 18 22 65 29 17 56 o ss SER REY FIGURE 10 3 1 Data File 10 13 Section 10 Utilities When Edlog compiled Birch dld it also created the Final Storage Label file Birch fs that lists the final storage locations for each data element Figure 10 3 2 Edlog 32 CR23x C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 BIRCHLESL View Onley o alte a File Edit Search Compile Display Options Window Help DH index InLoc Ed InLoc Pick FSL Edit 74 Label a Storage Label File for BIRCH CSI Date 1 2 2001 Time 12 68 11 66 Output_Table 66 66 Min 1 66 L Year_RIM L Day_RIM L Hour_Minute_RIM L BattVolt L BattVolt_MIN L BattVolt_Hr_Min_MIN L Enc1_RH_MAX L Enc1_RH_Hr_Min_MAX L 16 LogrTemp_MAX L 11 LogrTemp_Hr_Min_MAK L WaOWNKMORWN 24 Output_Table 1440 00 Min 1 24 L Year_RIM L Day_RIM L Hour_Minute_RIM L BattUolt L BattVolt_MIN L BattVolt_Hr_Min_MIN L Enc1_RH_MAX L Enc1_RH_Hr_Min_MAX L
39. 21 Hole collected Count2Min 0 150 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM CR23XPB 22 Hole lost Count2Min 4294940483 4294967295 6 9 2004 04 59 26 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 151 301 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 26 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 151 301 6 9 2004 04 59 27 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 302 452 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 27 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 302 452 6 9 2004 04 59 27 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 453 603 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 27 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 453 603 6 9 2004 04 59 28 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 604 754 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 28 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 604 754 6 9 2004 04 59 29 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 755 905 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 29 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 755 905 10 75 Section 10 Utilities 6 9 2004 04 59 29 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 906 1056 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 29 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 906 1056 6 9 2004 04 59 30 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1057 1207 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 30 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1057 1207 6 9 2004 04 59 30 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1208 1358 polling 6 9 2004 04 59
40. 33 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 34 The name of the measurement will appear and the current value will be displayed next to it after the XY Plot window has been started 7 6 2 2 Number of Points per Field You may set the Number of Points per Field displayed on the plot This number represents how many points x y ordered pairs will be placed onto the plot before each new point causes the oldest point to be removed This controls how many points for each y axis measurement can be displayed at one time The minimum value that can be used is five and the maximum value that can be used is 10 000 EA XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensort Add Y Value X Axis Value TempSensor3 13 91 100 fl 7 6 2 3 Right Click Functionality You can also access functionality by right clicking on a selected y value trace to obtain a menu The Add Y function operates the same as pressing the Add Y Value button The Add X function operates the same as pressing the Add X Value button The Delete item will remove the currently selected y value Select All will select all y values Delete All will remove all y values as currently configured Selecting the Trace Options function will bring up the Trace Options configuration screen for displaying and modifying the options for the currently selected trace This screen is described in more detail in the section entitled Using the special Options of the XY Plot found later in this chapter
41. 4 Start the second point of a two point calibration For Zeroing and Offset calibration a mode value of 4 is never used The entire calibration process is initiated with the mode value being set to 1 By properly changing the known value variables and the mode variables in a calibrating program a manual calibration can be performed on a sensor Steps for doing this are given below 9 4 2 Using the Mode Variable for Manual Single Point Calibration 9 6 These steps demonstrate how to perform manual single point calibrations Zeroing or Offset calibrations 1 Ensure the status value of the mode variable is 0 or 6 before you start a Anumber greater than 0 that is not 6 indicates that a calibration is in progress or that the last calibration did not complete properly b A number less than 0 indicates that the calibration process encountered an error Resolve the error before proceeding with the calibration then set the mode value to zero for a fresh start 2 Place the sensor into the zeroing or offset condition 3 Indicate the known offset value if applicable by changing the known value variable to that value 4 Set the mode variable to 1 to initiate the calibration process Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing Note that the datalogger automatically sets the mode variable to 2 during the calibration process Note that the mode variable is set to 6 automatically by the datalogger when the calibrati
42. 43 59 79 23 46 10 3 458 312 110 3 32 61 09 24 12 4 622 299 3 18 3 61 34 210 3 03 10 3 926 303 17 26 60 61 27 46 6 815 309 7 18 71 61 01 210 3 44 8 35 310 2 18 37 60 93 210 3 48 10 92 317 5 12 68 62 3 23 79 8 43 310 6 19 21 63 75 24 31 8 88 321 4 110 3 22 66 15 22 45 7 97 341 17 77 67 33 23 06 6 758 344 1 20 74 66 59 24 75 7 08 341 8 16 09 64 52 26 03 8 76 337 2 14 91 59 84 27 45 11 81 3010 3 4 12 36 56 19 310 3 46 110 3 62 316 7 19 01 510 3 48 38 8 17 12 338 7 11 41 510 3 22 37 13 11 86 351 6 8 22 returns the average of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Avg 3 59 898 average daily temp Avg 3 4 57 36 average 4 hour temp 56 493 average 4 hour temp 60 708 average 4 hour temp 61 998 average 4 hour temp 66 148 average 4 hour temp 56 683 average 4 hour temp returns the number of blanks or bad data in element x over a full data set or every nth value Refer to Table 10 3 9 for definition of blank or bad data Example Blanks 3 0 no holes in data set returns the number of data points non blanks in element x over a full data set or every n value Example Count 1 24 24 data points in data set 10 39 Section 10 Utilities 10 40 NOTE Blanks and Count are functions designed for checking the integrity of the data file A common use for these two functions is 100 BLANKS x n BLANKS x n COUNT x n which gives the percentage of holes bad data in the f
43. 9 Calibration and Zeroing Select the sensor you wish to calibrate press Next Field Calibration Select the sensor to calibrate MeasZA MeasZA 1 MeasZA 2 MeasZA 3 MeasZ If the variable is configured as an array of sensors you may select an individual item to calibrate only that element or you can select the entire array Now you can monitor the reading on the sensor to be calibrated Set the sensor to the zero condition and press Calibrate Field Calibration Set the sensor s to the zero position Field Name Current Value 44 6173 lt Previous The Current Value box will be yellow during the calibration process When it finishes you will see the new value of the sensor after the application of the zeroing offset Press Finish to end the calibration Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 9 6 4 Using the Wizard to Perform Offset Calibrations In the Wizard select Offset for the type of calibration Field Calibration nh he type of calibration to perform Select 9 14 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing Now you can view the current reading on the sensor to be calibrated Set the sensor to the known value calibrate to value Enter that value into the Enter Calibrated Value box Press Calibrate The current value will show Calibrating until the process is complete You will then have the opportunity to press Finish or press Previous to return
44. CR1000 BA File View Datalogger Network Tools Help E diezomect x za a Clock Pragram Monitor Data Collect Data i Datalogger Information cR1000 Datalogger Name CR1000 i Dalles Type CR1000 Datalogger 5 1 2008 4 59 48 PM E Reported StationName 1075 PC 5 1 2008 4 59 48 PM Direct Connect Connection CR800Series COM Port COM3 Pause Clock Update Clocks Datalogger Settings i Baud Rate 115200 Datalogger Time Zone Offset PakBus Address 2 Set Clock ohousom i Security Code 0 Ohous Om Extra Response Time Os Max Time Online Od Oh Om Datalogger Program Current Program z PulseCount CR1 Send Program Retrieve Program 4 6 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 4 Monitor Data Tab Once you ve added and connected to a datalogger you can monitor the values stored by the datalogger in real time Choose the Monitor Data tab to display the Monitor Data screen RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help km S33 OD ERB 0o00 lock Program Monitor Data Collect Data Gs 2 eal a R Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histo a Field Monitor RecNum 471 s TimeStamp 008 17 04 58 Add myValue 5 25 CRe00Seres LJ myValue_FFT 1 90 55 myValue_FFT 2 110 40 myValue_FFT 3 94 25 Delete myValue_FFT 4 121 29 myValue_FFT 5 129 63 myValue_FFT 6 62 39 Deleteal m
45. Calibration Status and Control To perform a manual calibration without use of the RTDAQ Calibration Wizard on a FieldCal enabled program running in a datalogger it is necessary to understand the function of the mode variable that is used as an argument of the FieldCal instruction In a CRBasic calibration program a mode variable is declared and associated with a particular FieldCal instruction thereby associating it with the measurement to be calibrated Most values of the mode variable represent the status of the calibration for that affected measurement A few values of the mode variable are set by the user of the datalogger to instruct the program to proceed with calibrations 9 5 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing NOTE The following values of the mode variable give the status of the calibration No calibration has been performed since program start Calibration in progress OR first stage of two point calibration in progress Waiting for second stage of two point calibration to begin Second stage of two point calibration in progress AlIa wln i co Calibration complete 1 Calibration error 2 Measurement range error 3 Error with the value used as the Reps argument in the FieldCal instruction The following values of the mode variable are used to initiate a calibration process 1 Start the calibration OR start the first point of a two point calibration
46. E RTMC Run time C Campbellsci RTMC temp data rtmc2 File View Window Help 13 5750 130759 13 56 00 When the run time display screen is started the display components will have a red exclamation point in the upper right corner until data is received from RTDAQ If data is not displayed check to see that you are connected to the proper datalogger Once a project file has been created and saved the display screen can be run without starting the RTMC Development application You may switch to the display of a different project by choosing File Open and selecting another RTMC project file In Run time mode you can print an image of the RTMC display screen by selecting File Print Screens Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 9 1 Calibration Essentials 9 1 1 Definition of Calibration Calibration in general refers to actions taken on a measurement system to increase its accuracy This is usually done by matching the system s outputs to known control values in order to increase confidence in the measurement of future unknowns Campbell Scientific s approach to calibration uses a datalogger s measurement and computational capability to calculate the multipliers and or offsets to be used by a measurement instruction to provide more accurate readings The process of calibration uses the datalogger to assist the operator in intelligently and automatically setting the multiplier and offset to be used in a measurement instruc
47. Generator Options Edit CR5000 Generator Options You can find the Generator Options on the Edit menu for the particular kind of generator project you are currently using Set the desired settings to be used by default when a program generator project is created or a CRBasic program is generated Check the boxes next to the options that are desired or set the value of the drop down box Press Done to save the desired configuration The Set Defaults button may be used to return the configuration to the default settings 5 49 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 6 4 10 Help Program Generator This item opens the online help for the RTDAQ Program Generator application amp RIDAQ Program Generator CR9000X File Edit Maan Program Generator About 5 6 4 11 Help About This screen shows the version number and release date of the RTDAQ Program Generator application 5 6 5 Using Save and Send The RTDAQ Program Generator program allows you to send a program to a datalogger that has been defined in the RTDAQ Network Map This only works if RTDAQ is running at the time you attempt to send the program The main screen of the Program Generator displays a Save and Send button that you can press to do this E RTDAQ Program Generator CR9000X File Edit Help CR9000X Generator Program Name ASDG3 C9X RT9GEN Version 6 0 0048 Operator Name CR9000X OS Version Compatibility 06 07 06 or later z Last Sa
48. GoTo button from the toolbar In addition you can move to a particular line number in the program by selecting GoTo Go To Line 5 3 5 CRBasic Editor View Menu This menu item allows you to specify the files used in the CRBasic Editor and customize its look and syntax highlighting 5 3 5 1 Editor Preferences This option sets up the appearance options for the text instructions and the behavior of pop up hints The Editor tab allows the user to toggle on or off the pop up hints for parameters in instructions set the amount of time the cursor must hover over the instruction before the pop up hint appears and the background color of the pop up hint This is also used to choose whether CRBasic automatic instruction indenting indents using tabs or spaces and set the number of spaces if that option is chosen Other options relating to the use of the tab key file compression capitalization and name checking are also available Press the Help button for more information Editor Options Editor Vertical Spacing Syntax Highlighting Parameter Hint Box Show Parameter Hints Hint Delay ms 1000 Parameter Hint Color Select Color Auto Indenting Edit Features O Insert Tabs Enable Drag n Drop Insert Spaces Enable Dup Name Check Spaces 2 Enable Keyword Capitalization Cl Always Save Compressed File M Silent Compressed File Mode Tab Key Mode Use Tab Use Spaces Tab Width 2 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing
49. If the Input File does not exist an error message is displayed when RUN GO is selected from the menu options For instance to process two files named TEST DAT and TEST_1 DAT the user would select TEST DAT and TEST_1 DAT as Input Files Two blank input file templates will be generated To change from one template to the other click the appropriate tab on the bottom of the screen Both templates must be completed before Split will process the data To merge different output arrays from the same input file into one array open the data file once for each different array 10 3 3 1 1 File Offset Using Last Count CAUTION Each time Split runs a parameter file it keeps track of the number of bytes it read from the input file and saves this information in the parameter file Split can then start where it last left off This is done by clicking the Offsets button and selecting the Last Count option see Figure 10 3 9 This feature may be used to process only the new data from a file in which new data are being appended periodically to the data file Start and Stop offsets Specified in number of bytes Start Offset Stop Offset None C Specific lumber of values in each burst Start Stop condition M Midnightis 2400 hours ca Cancel Cancel FIGURE 10 3 9 Offsets Options When using the Last Count option if the Start and Stop Conditions Sections 10 3 3 2 10 3 3 3
50. LogrTemp_MAX L LogrTemp_Hr_Min_MAK L firTemp_AUG L AirTemp_MAX L AirTemp_Hr_Min_MAX L AirTemp_MIN L AirTemp_Hr_Min_MIN L 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 Output_Table 15 66 Min 199 L FIGURE 10 3 2 FSL File 10 14 Section 10 Utilities Split ersion 2 0 32 bit 5 x File Edit Labels Run Printer Help r Cop Input Data File Start Condition Stop Condition Output File Browse Auto Detect Offsets Options M File Info Po Select NOTE FIGURE 10 3 3 Input File Template When you start Split a blank template similar to the one above is shown This template is used to enter the parameters that will define what data from the input file to include in the output file The parameters entered on this template can be saved as a parameter file PAR and reused for other data On the INPUT FILE tab you only need to specify the input file name copy condition and the data to select Split allows start and stop conditions to be specified but if they are left blank the entire file will be read The name of the Input Data File can be typed in or the Browse button can be used to select from available files In this example BirchCreek dat will be selected as the input data file Selecting the data to copy is simplified by the use of the Birch fsl file From the toolbar menu click Labels Use Data Labels From the Data File Labels pop up Sel
51. NE Par New Creates a new program window to start writing a new program If you have defined a default template the new program will start with the defined template instructions B Open Brings up a File Open dialog to select a program file to open File extension filters are provided to list only files of a certain type such as cr5 files for CR5000 programs Data files dat can also be opened H Save Saves any changes to the currently opened program If this is a new program and has not been saved yet a Save As dialog will prompt you for the file name and location to save the file A table definition file tdf of the same name as the saved program will also be created Refer to the online documentation for more information about using table definition files fti Compile Save and Send Saves any changes to the currently opened program checks it for errors with the pre compiler and sends the file to the datalogger via RTDAQ RTDAQ must be running for this function to work properly s Print Prints the currently opened program Print Preview Opens a Print Preview screen that will show what the program will look like when printed You can check and set the margins and printer options a Undo Each time the Undo button is clicked it will step back through the last changes made to the program Q Redo Cancels the undo and steps forward restoring the changes 5 5 Section 5 Program Creation and
52. Options choose the Trace and Display tabs then choose the right axis using the Select Axis drop down box Once started the graph is adding points as it receives them from the datalogger via the communications server While it runs the Start Stop button shows as a Stop button 2 XY Plot 1 PENARE TempSensort Add Y Value X Axis Value TempSensor3 0 02 Add X Value Points per Field fico e If you wish to discontinue adding points to the graph and also stop removing the old points based on the Points per Field setting press the Stop button The graph will suspend its updates and the resulting fixed graph can be examined for as long as is necessary The button will now show as a Start button again 7 37 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time To clear the contents of the graphical x y plot area while it is either stopped or started press the Clear button 2 XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TermpSensor1 Addy Vae X Axis Value TempSensor3 0 02 Points per Field 100 gl If the Points per Field value is set to a very large number and the measurement rate of the datalogger is very fast a period faster than 1 msec for example the ability of the plot to display data in real time may be reduced This is because points are displayed on the XY Plot contiguously as received in time order from the datalogger If y
53. SEPARATED 115 189 1200 89 6 510 3 3 210 3 36 270 115 189 1300 91 3 61 5 27 25 25 10 3 4 115 189 1400 92 7 67 7 110 3 15 220 1 115 189 1500 94 1 69 20 35 260 6 FIELD FORMATTED 115 189 1200 510 3 3 210 3 36 115 189 1300 61 5 27 25 115 189 1400 67 7 110 3 15 115 189 1500 69 20 35 PRINTABLE ASCII 01 0115 02 0189 03 1200 04 089 6 05 0510 3 3 06 210 3 36 07 270 0 01 0115 02 0189 03 1300 04 091 3 05 061 5 06 27 25 07 2510 3 4 01 0115 02 0189 03 1400 04 092 7 05 067 7 06 110 3 15 07 220 1 01 0115 02 0189 03 1500 04 094 1 05 069 0 06 20 35 07 260 6 Elementl Output Array ID 115 Element2 Julian day 189 Element3 hour minute Element4 average temperature in deg F Element5 average soil temperature in deg F Element6 average wind speed in mph Element7 wind direction in degrees TABLE ORIENTED ASCII TOACIL CR1OT 15Minute TMSTAMP RECNBR TCTempF_MAX BattVolt_MIN 2002 02 26 10 30 00 0 73 97 13 99 2002 02 26 10 45 00 1 74 03 13 98 2002 02 26 11 00 00 2 74 53 13 98 2002 02 26 11 15 00 3 74 82 13 98 2002 02 26 11 30 00 4 710 3 23 13 98 Element Timestamp Element 2 Record Number Element 3 temperature in degrees F Element4 minimum battery voltage Section 10 Utilities A maximum of eight input files may be processed by Split at one time Additional input files are added using the EDIT ADD DATA FILE menu option Split looks for a file extension of DAT if no extension is specified
54. Select a color for the cell background that will be displayed when the real time value exceeds the value of the trigger Check the Enable Sound box if you wish a sound to be played on the computer when the value of the trigger is exceeded Use the ellipsis button to browse to an audio wav file containing the sound for the alarm Set a time in minutes or seconds during which the audio alarm will re trigger in cases when the data remains above the trigger value Choose the Low Alarm tab to set up an alarm when selected values in the grid become less than a specified value Enter the low threshold value in the Trigger Value box Select a color for the cell background that will be displayed in when the real time value is less than the value of the trigger Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Check the Enable Sound box if you wish a sound to be played on the computer when the real time value is less than the value of the trigger Use the ellipsis button to browse to an audio wav file containing the sound of the alarm Set a time in minutes or seconds during which the audio alarm will re trigger in cases when the data remains below the trigger value 7 1 5 3 Setup Tab In the Setup tab you can configure the number of rows and columns to be displayed on the data grid Press the Restore Default Configuration button to reconfigure the size of the grid to its default values Field Monitor Options po Display Alar
55. Split will fill the OUTPUT file with the good data This is used to get a more complete record from an error ridden file e g one recorded at freezing temperatures by reading a tape twice and running both files through Split For the Match files option to produce a correct Output File the differences between the two Input Files can only be question marks Both files must have the same Start Condition or the beginning of both files must be the same Transpose file Transposes the rows and columns of the input file Only one Input File can be transposed at a time and no Select options can be specified A maximum of 26 arrays are transposed per pass of Split To transpose a file containing more than 26 arrays several passes are required Change the Output file name and Start Condition for each pass Split may then be used to merge the multiple files No FF Suppresses form feeds and page breaks in RPT and HTML files When this option is selected a header appears on the first page only This option is used for printing reports on continuous feed paper or for displaying HTM files in a browser Break arrays This option breaks up the Output Array into new arrays that are 1 elements in each new array Split automatically assigns an array ID number equal to the first element in the first array Only one Input File may be specified Start Stop and Copy Conditions may be specified but the Select line must be left blank The Break Ar
56. Storage Binary Format Field Formatted ASCII Split default output format Printable ASCII Table Oriented ASCII TOACI1 or TOAS or Raw A D data refer to special Burst Mode instruction in your Campbell Scientific datalogger manual Files stored in Table Oriented Binary TOB format are converted to Table Oriented ASCII files when Split uses them The converter runs in the background when you run Split to create the output file You cannot use the Data Label browser to select the columns of data from a binary file If you want to use the Data Label browser you can convert the binary file using View prior to processing it with Split Split s default output file a field separated ASCII format with a PRN file extension can be processed a second time if desired 10 19 Section 10 Utilities 10 20 Table 10 3 1 provides an example of Comma Separated Field Formatted Printable ASCII and Table Oriented ASCII input file types The data in the various formats are identical Each line of data represents an Output Array starting with an Output Array ID in this case 115 Each data point in the Output Array is referred to as an element The element number is given in the Printable ASCII format and implied in the other formats Data presented in Table 10 3 1 is used for example purposes in the following sections TABLE 10 3 1 Comma Separated Field Formatted Printable ASCII and Table Oriented ASCII Input File Format Types COMMA
57. Table FFTOut Select Data FFTCpx w_FTs Graph Type Area C 3D View X Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins View Ranges ooe na 0 3125 781 25 1250 1 796 875 2500 3046 875 3750 4296 675 5000 Frequency You may create multiple FFT windows in RTDAQ After FFT screens have been created they can be brought to the front by using the drop down list that becomes available on the FFT Histo button You will also use this drop down list to create FFT screens after at least one already exists since pushing the FFT button at that point will bring the focus to an existing FFT window instead of creating a new one RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Kun FFF OF SERGE 00 Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data z 5 EA n a 3 ala2 Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histo 7 Rainflow CR1000 nee Create New wy Fi rT onitor FFT Histogram 1 FFT Histogram 2 CRE00Series add For more information about configuring the FFT Histogram Window see the section entitled Configuration of FFT and Histogram Windows later in this chapter 7 9 Configuration of FFT and Histogram Windows After an FFT Histogram window has been displayed in RTDAQ you can configure the window to meet your data analysis needs 7 52 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 9 1 Moving and Resizing the FFT Histo Window
58. These media include direct connect via serial communications or RS 232 via local serial cable short haul modems other transparent links telephone TAPI TCP IP VHF UHF radios RF400 series spread spectrum radios and multidrop interfaces MD9 and MD485 RTDAQ does not support parallel port communications RF95T modems or multiple media such as phone to RF RTDAQ is designed to use PakBus dataloggers and other PakBus devices in their default configurations they are not supported as PakBus routers In order to be easy to use RTDAQ relies on user attended communications It does not provide for automated scheduled data collection or automated clock checks It does not support remote connections from other PCs Help for each application is available from the Help menu item or by moving the focus to a control by clicking on or tabbing to a control and pressing F1 To exit RTDAQ either click the X in the upper right hand corner of the main screen or select Exit under the File menu 4 2 EZSetup Wizard Dataloggers are added to the network with the EZSetup Wizard This Wizard is also used to edit the settings for a datalogger after it s been added The EZSetup Wizard is automatically displayed when RTDAQ is run for the first time 4 2 1 Add Datalogger When RTDAQ is not connected to a datalogger you may add a datalogger to your network map by selecting the Add Datalogger button ms or by choosing Network Add Datalog
59. adjust the settings of the graph see Setting the Options for the Graph Screen below You may choose the Print Preview item to view the current snapshot in a window showing how it will be printed along with the options for selecting the printer the orientation the margins etc You may also print the snapshot if desired Print Preview Printer ssq v Setup Print Close Orientation O Portrait Landscape Margins a View Margins Detail More Normal J Proportional C Smooth NOTE If the Graph is in the started state when you choose Print Preview the current snapshot will be displayed for printing and the graph will continue to display newer data in the background You may choose the Print item to immediately send the current snapshot to the currently selected printer without pre viewing it The Clear Fill and Stop and Start Stop items perform the same function as pressing the button see descriptions given above Choose the Hide Controls Show Controls to hide or show the items for controlling the graph that are given to the left of the display Hiding these items allows more room for the graphical display for enhanced viewing after all of the settings have been set to the desired configuration 7 4 9 Setting the Options for the Graph Screen Set the options for the current Graph screen by pressing the Options button or by selecting Options from a right click menu The
60. after the decimal point in those numeric displays Timestamps are not graphed on an XY Plot although they can be added as a y axis item for numeric display only 7 44 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 6 6 3 Visual Display Tab 7 6 6 4 Trace Tab Select the Visual Display tab to control various visual aspects of the XY Plot Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Chart Colors Titles Back Wall Color a C Show Graph Title Left Grid Color m C Show Left Axis Title Right Grid Color E laj C Show Right Axis Title Colors for parts of the display can be selected including the background color of the display area the color of the grid corresponding to the left y axis and the color of the grid corresponding to the right y axis You may also define titles to be displayed on the plot The text and font can be specified for the graph s main title and for both the left and right axes If at least one y axis value was selected at the time the options screen was opened then the Trace tab will be available Use the Trace tab to control how the points or connecting lines are drawn in the graphical display area The Trace tab contains a Display tab and a Marks tab Use the Display tab to control point and line display options for the selected trace s You may select the color of the point or line and you can choose which y axis left or right will control
61. are similar to that of array based dataloggers Hourarray changes a 0000 hourly timestamp to 2400 and dayofyear produces a Julian Day In older versions of Split the date and edate functions were limited to converting the Julian day to a MM DD format with a syntax of date doy y where doy the element number for the day of the year y the element number for the year This older format is still supported Split will mark the date as Bad Data if the time and date resulting from the conversion will not fit in the specified column width The on screen display and the report file will precede the date with asterisks In the PRN output file Split uses the Bad Data string When Date and Edate are used within other functions they must be used with the older format Date doy y and Edate doy y instead of using the extended date functions as shown in the table For example AVG 1 Date 2 2002 0 The decimal is needed to indicate a fixed number Numbers without the decimal are interpreted as element IDs 10 45 Section 10 Utilities 10 46 NOTE Date Format Examples Assume that in an array based data file element 2 is Year element 3 is Day of Year element 4 is Hour Minute and element 5 is Seconds String Entered Output date mm dd yy h nn 5 4 3 2 02 25 02 4 10 edate mm dd yy hh nn 5 4 3 2 02 25 02 04 10 edate dddd mmmm d yyyy 5 4 3 2 Monday February 25 2002 edate Date mmm d yyyy 5 4 3 2 Date Fe
62. box When you release the mouse button the area within the box will become the full display area on the Rainflow display Press the Undo Zoom button in the top right corner of the graph to return to the full scale display m RainFlow 2 a Select Table FFTOut Select Bin FFTView_RFH Zoom 7 10 8 Save and Print Options When you right click on the graph a short cut menu is displayed from which you can access further options r 7 Save As 14q eat ae Copy 134 ae TRIAL oy Options Print Preview Pe ee P Prints ele i Clear 07 Start Stop Hide Controls 750 024 4 W 0 17 a 250 Mean Bins 0 100 300 500 700 900 Amplitude Bin Yalues NOTE Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Use the Save As option to save the current state of the display to a windows bitmap file bmp or windows metafile wmf format Use the Copy function to copy the current display state as a graphical object to the Windows clipboard This facilitates pasting the graphic into other programs Select the Options function to change the Graphing Options For more information about viewing and changing the Graphing Options see the section below entitled Using the special options of the Rainflow screen Use the Print Preview option to preview and possibly print the graph to a selected printer Use the Print option to print the graph without any preview If the Rainflow screen is in the started
63. box that is displayed is used to select the type of noise rejection to apply to the measurements in the program Noise rejection filters out AC signals that might affect the accuracy of your measurements such as noise from fluorescent lighting or a generator Typically 60 Hz rejection is used for North America and 50 Hz rejection is used for countries following European standards AC Noise Rejection AC Noise Rejection 60Hz 60Hz 5 29 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 30 NOTE This dialog box will be displayed the very first time you create a program for a specific datalogger type it will not be displayed thereafter With each subsequent program you create the noise rejection you chose when the datalogger was initialized in SCWin will be used However you can change the noise rejection from the Settings menu If you make this change the setting will remain in effect for all programs for that datalogger type whether they are new programs or edited programs until it is changed again The last dialog box displayed is the Sensor Support dialog box This dialog box will not be displayed when creating a CR9000X program This is used to select which group of sensor files will be displayed when creating a program Campbell Scientific Inc CSI USA or Campbell Scientific Ltd CSL UK The standard set of Short Cut sensor files was created by CSI however CSL has created some additional files that are customized
64. by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 10 71 Section 10 Utilities Message Text Selective manual poll complete Selective manual poll aborted Polling started on collect area Collect area poll data Collect area polling complete Collect area polling failed Collect area first poll Table mount failed Message Parameters Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Table name Operating system information regarding the failure Message Meaning The user specified manual poll has completed The user specified manual poll failed Data has been requested for the specified collect area This message is always associated with another message indicating whether this is scheduled manual or selective manual polling Data has been received from an array based datalogger for the specified collect area Data collection for the specified collect area has successfully completed Data collection for the specified collect area failed This message is posted either the first time data is collected for a collect area or holes were lost for the datalogger The server was not able to create a data collection area from the stored table configuration file or new table definitions This could be the result of trying to create table files that are too large for the comput
65. cececsccsseeccssecseesecsereeceseeeesaeeaeeseeneeees 4 4 4 2 3 Datalogger Settings eee ceceseceseceseceseceecaeecseeeseseeeeeeeeeees 4 4 4 2 3 1 Max Time Online i cce ce ecesseecsseceeeeecneeeecseeeeeeseeseeeeens 4 5 RTDAQ Table of Contents 4 2 4 Summary Communications Test and Clock Set ceeeee 4 5 425 Send Program scsi tey sek vies Sikes Ste Save a ee Sie 4 5 4 2 6 Editing and Deleting Dataloggers oes ceeeeseeeeseeeetecneeeeenees 4 6 4 3 Clock Program Tab isvcs ccssscsscsssesstscssasstisstbassssstysctsdsousssasseuseesestisessesevees 4 6 4 31 Basic Operation 05 4s aira ere E e Rt tapes 4 6 4 4 Monitor Data Tabuen an eae Te EE EEE EE E EEES 4 7 4 4 1 Field Monitor 2 0 cecceccceceesceecceesceesceeeceeceseeeaecaecaeceeeaeeeneeneeees 4 7 4 4 2 Editing Variable Values ssneneseseneeeseeeeseeeeeseeeessteeesseserseseesess 4 7 4 4 3 Specialized Real time Monitor Screens ceeeeseeseesecseeeeeees 4 8 4S Collect Data Tab sccsesc 5 ss sescoesd ah re a nesses wei a E a RS 4 8 4 6 Pull down Menus rninn e E e eat E bie veentes 4 9 46T File MEM ai csia recs a a e Weed de rads dies stue activates ees de tenets gees 4 9 4 6 1 1 Saving and Loading Configurations 0 ce eceseeeeeereeeee 4 9 4 6 1 2 Exit EEA ATEREA 4 9 A G 2 Vale WMO mlirscs scat E vacant ostiae vst vevas teantsanae Acvaptonssatuaboeeeipats 4 9 4 6 3 Datalogger Menus orse eee r fe ade sevecis aene Tae T assets 4 9 4 6 3 1 Connect Dis
66. clears all collected data out of the table in the datalogger and begins storing data again starting with record zero Ensure you have collected all the data you need from a table before you reset it since after that the data cannot be recovered 7 13 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 3 3 Moving and Resizing the Table Monitor Window The Table Monitor screen can be moved by dragging the title bar You can resize the height of a Table Monitor screen as desired by dragging the window corners You can also maximize restore and minimize the screen using the standard buttons in the upper right corner of the window or by clicking on the window s icon in the upper left corner When minimized the Table Monitor screen shows as an icon on the task bar Use the close button red X to shut down a Table Monitor screen There is also a help button the question mark button which brings up online help about the Table Monitor window 7 4 Real Time Graph 7 14 The Real Time Graph window displays time series data items graphically from a datalogger The data value from the datalogger is displayed on the y axis and the timestamp of the data value is displayed on the x axis Linear and logarithmic scaling can be applied to both axes The upper and lower limits for scaling the y axis can be fixed to certain user specified values or they can be automatically scaled based on the actual data being displayed 7 4 1 Using Graph Wi
67. component images used traces plotted etc Select the Show Component Summaries box to display these hint boxes or clear the box to turn off the display of the information The Grid Properties group box enables you to turn on or disable the display of a grid in the project workspace and allows you to see the size of the grid All of the View menu items are toggles When a check mark appears to the left of the menu item it is enabled When the check mark is absent the option is disabled If an option is off unchecked select it once to turn it on checked and vice versa Show Project Tree hides or displays the RTMC Project Tree left pane of the default window Show Toolbox hides or displays the RTMC Component Toolbar Toolbar hides or displays the Toolbar Status Bar hides or displays the Status bar at the bottom of the screen The Status Bar provides hints on objects window size and the server connection Show Grid hides or displays a grid background for the workspace 8 1 4 4 Project Menu Project menu options affect the whole project or workspace Configure Workspace allows you to specify the size of the run time display screen The default size is 640 x 480 There are two size options Auto Size and Fixed Size When Auto Size is selected the size of an RTMC display is Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software set by dragging the boundaries of the RTMC Development window to a new size When the project is run
68. computer itself in a PakBus network must have a unique PakBus address less than 4095 and typically less than 4000 Setting up a PakBus network that communicates between the nodes can be a complex task so RTDAQ avoids complexity by setting up each PakBus datalogger within its own PakBus subnetwork RTDAQ uses a PakBus Port with a unique PakBus address to receive communications from PakBus devices Setting this global address will cause each new PakBus datalogger added to the Network Map to connect to RTDAQ using the specified PakBus address Change Computer s Global PakBus Address Enter a new global PakBus address for the computer koso The CR800 850 CR1000 and CR3000 dataloggers keep track of the PakBus addresses of other devices that communicate with them including PCs If more than one PC is communicating with a single PakBus datalogger it may be helpful to assign each PC its own PakBus address PakBus addresses greater than 3999 are reserved for PCs or routers Address 4095 is reserved for broadcast messages Keep in mind that although PakBus devices keep their own routing tables they will communicate with any other PakBus device that has an address gt 3999 Therefore you may want to use different PakBus addresses for each PC communicating with your PakBus dataloggers RTDAQ uses address 4090 by default LoggerNet uses 4094 PC400 uses 4093 PC200 W uses 4092 and 4091 is used by CSI s PDA software This menu item provid
69. d setup exe in the Open field or use the Browse button to access the CD ROM drive and select the setup executable This activates the RTDAQ Installation Utility 3 Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the installation The installation will require a CD key You will find this code printed on the back of the jewel case of the original installation CD A shortcut to launch RTDAQ is added to your computer s Start menu under Programs RTDAQ If the default location is used RTDAQ executable files and help files are placed in the C Program Files CampbellSci directory folder with the main RTDAQ application located in the C Program Files CampbellSci RTDAQ directory Working directories will also be created in the C Campbellsci directory for RTDAQ s configurations and data files user programs and settings for the accessory applications and utilities Trial Version During installation if you chose to install the trial version of RTDAQ you will have 30 days to use this fully functional trial version Each time you run RTDAQ you will be advised as to how many days are remaining on your trial version At the end of the 30 days the trial version of RTDAQ will no longer function If you choose to purchase RTDAQ you will need to run the install program again and input the CD Key from the back of your CD case This can be done either before or after the 30 day trial period has expired Note that the trial version will in
70. data with field is output to the Output File See Table 10 3 5 10 32 Section 10 Utilities 10 3 3 6 Select The Select line specifies which elements of an Output Array are selected for processing and or output to the specified Output File The Select line becomes operable only after the Start Condition and Copy condition are met and before the Stop Condition is satisfied If the Select line is left blank all elements in output arrays meeting the Start Condition and Copy conditions are output to the Output File Processing is accomplished through arithmetic operators math functions spatial functions and time series functions 10 3 3 6 1 Ranges TABLE 10 3 5 Effects of Out of Range Values for Given Output Options Output Option Report None No other options defined default Report File or Printer no other options defined Report None replacement text abc in Replace bad data with field See Section 10 3 3 6 1 Report File or Printer comment in Replace bad data with field Element numbers may be entered individually e g 2 3 4 5 6 7 or in groups e g 2 7 if sequential Range limits lower to upper boundary conditions may be placed on elements or groups of elements specified in the Select or Copy lines For example 3 3 7 5 4 7 10 3 10 implies that element 3 is selected only if it is between 3 7 and 5 inclusive and elements 4 5 6 and 7 must be between 5 and 10 inclusive I
71. datalogger defined in the main RTDAQ application For more information about this process see the section below entitled Using Save and Send For more detailed information about various options for generating programs press the Help button from the main generator screen Select Contents for an overview of how the generator works Select links within the help screens to view details about the kinds of measurements calculations and controls that can be configured within generated programs 5 6 4 Supporting Functionality 5 6 4 1 File New In addition to the main program generator functionality described above the following menu items provide supporting functionality as you create your datalogger programs Use File New to start a brand new generator project from scratch Choose File New and then select the kind of generator project to create based on the target datalogger CR5000 or CR9000X Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 8 RTDAQ Program Generator CR9000X a Edit Help Open cR3000 Progra Save As CR9000 Last S Edit Generator Program Scan I Open Wire Diagram 1 EditTemp GE9 Sh Exit OUTPUT TABLES THERMOCOUPLES VOLTAGES HIGH VOLT 5 6 4 2 File Open NOTE Use File Open to open an existing generator project file that was previously created and saved When you choose File Open you will be given a file browsing screen that will allow you to browse to
72. datalogger memory The datalogger s data tables are typically configured as ring memory Records will be stored to a table until the number of records reaches a predefined size and then each new record will overwrite the oldest record If the data is backed up more often than the oldest records in the datalogger are overwritten a complete data record can still be maintained by restoring the data from the backup and then re collecting the newest records from the datalogger 3 3 Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 4 3 2 2 1 Performing a Backup NOTE RTDAQ provides a simple way to back up the network map the RTDAQ data cache and the initialization files for the main application The network map will restore all settings and data collection pointers for the dataloggers and other devices in the network The data cache is the binary database which contains the collected data from the datalogger Initialization files store settings such as window size and position configuration of the data display etc The INI files backed up in the RTDAQ backup procedure are those found in the C Campbellsci RTDAQ sys inifiles folder only Other INI files such as those for Short Cut CardConvert Split and the CRBasic Editor are not a part of the backup From RTDAQ s menu choose Network Backup Restore Network and then press Backup The backup file is named RTDAQ bkp and is stored in the C CampbellSci RTDAQ dire
73. destination file If the destination file does not exist when a conversion is done a new file will be created On subsequent conversions converted data will be appended to the end of that file If the header of the new data does not match that of the data in the destination file an error will be generated This option is most useful with the Convert Only New Data option to create a continuous file with no repetition of data 10 1 2 4 TOA5 TOB1 Format 10 4 These two options are available when the ASCII Table Data TOAS or the Binary Table Data TOB1 output option is selected Store Record Number By default the record number for each row of data is stored in the data file This record number can be omitted from the converted file by clearing the Store Record Number check box Store Time Stamp The time stamp can be omitted from the file by clearing the Store Time Stamp check box Section 10 Utilities 10 1 3 Converting the File Once the file and conversion settings are selected press the Start Conversion button CardConvert will begin processing the file When the file is being processed the estimated number of records and a percentage of the conversion completed will be displayed at the bottom edge of the window Note that the values reflect an estimate of the amount of data in a table If the table is set to a fixed size CardConvert returns a fairly close estimate However if the table is set to auto allocate CardConvert e
74. displays rainflow histograms that have been calculated and stored by the datalogger 7 10 1 Rainflow Histogram Overview A rainflow histogram is 3 D histogram representation based on the rainflow counting algorithm of Endo and Matsuiski which was first published in 1968 These diagrams can be used to monitor fatigue levels of structures under stress such as components of a large scale transportation bridge 7 10 2 Opening Rainflow Histograms To view real time rainflow histograms from your datalogger in RTDAQ first ensure that a proper rainflow program is running in the datalogger you wish to monitor including the proper output instruction s in one of the tables of the CRBasic program For more information about using the Rainflow output instruction refer to its online help topic within the CRBasic Editor program Connect to the datalogger in RTDAQ by clicking on the datalogger s icon and pressing Connect Now choose the Monitor Data tab to make the real time displays available and choose the Rainflow button RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help WY discomea R ya o A Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data Ee a 5 Pry Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph xY Plot FFT Histo Raintlow Field Monitor Add 7 66 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Now you will see the Rainflow histogram display window m RainFlow 1
75. for the current screen of data However the graph will catch up to real time at the beginning of each new screen If Newest Records is selected only the newest records will be collected and displayed The number or records to collect is specified in the box In this mode records may be skipped but the display will not fall behind Care should be taken in choosing between these options when running a program with extremely fast data generation i e several hundred records per second As a general rule Graph All Data should be used when looking at a large Graph Width time span with fast data generation Fill Graph Width may be useful when looking at a smaller Graph Width with fast data generation The best option will depend on your PC datalogger and datalogger program Therefore experimentation may be necessary to determine the best option Differences between the options will diminish with slower data generation rates These options all function the same when graphing values from the Public table which contains only one record 7 19 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 4 7 Drawing Methods used by the Graph Screen e Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields FFTView_FTs 1 0 01 SOS FFTView_FTs 2 0 00 pepe FFTview_FTs 3 0 00 a ee 0 0128 4 0 0126 0 0124 ff f 0 0122 H 1 j 0 012 j 0 0118 f 0 0116 0 0114 0 0112 0 0108 Graph Width 0 0106 00h 00 m 10 s 000 ms 0 0
76. for their client base When one option is selected the sensor files developed specifically for the other are filtered out Sensor Support Sensor Support Campbell Scientific Inc US Campbell Scientific Inc US This setting is similar to the AC Noise Rejection setting in that the dialog box will be displayed only the first time you create a program for a specific datalogger type and the setting will apply to all programs created or edited for that datalogger unless it is changed via the Settings menu Note that programs containing sensor files that are filtered from the List of Available Sensors will still load and work correctly in Short Cut The AC Noise Rejection and the Sensor Support settings are persistent settings for each datalogger model The first time you create a program for a particular datalogger model you will be presented with these two dialog boxes The state of these settings is saved between Short Cut sessions Any subsequent new or edited programs that are generated after a setting has been changed will reflect the change as well Each time you create the first program for a datalogger model you will be presented with these dialog boxes e g the first time you create a CR10X program you must initialize these settings the first time you create a CR1000 program you must initialize these settings The settings can be changed at any time and the datalogger program will be regenerated to use the new setti
77. formats 1 1 10 Short Cut Short Cut is a datalogger program generator You select the datalogger type sensors and desired outputs and then Short Cut creates a simple program file to send to the datalogger Users don t need to learn about the individual programming instructions generated within the datalogger program Short Cut includes support for multiplexers and a limited number of other peripherals and also provides a wiring diagram that you can print to leave in the field with the datalogger Section 1 Introduction SCWIN File Edit Settings Help Progress 1 New Open Sensor 4 Finish Wiring Wiring Diagram Wiring Text Open Program New Open Help Short Cut is also an excellent way to learn about the CRBasic programming language The CRBasic programs created by Short Cut can be loaded directly into the CRBasic Editor for inspection or editing 1 1 11 CRBasic Editor The CRBasic Editor is a program editor for CRBasic datalogger programs including programs for the CR800 CR850 CR1000 CR3000 CR5000 and CR9000X It is used to manually create programs or to edit existing or generated programs Program instructions are defined within the editor for variable declarations data table configuration measurements and control operations numeric processing logical operations data output and program control Extensive assistance and program examples are provided in the online help system 1 1
78. hourly versus daily data In addition to splitting out mixed array data Split can filter output data based on time or conditions calculate statistics and new values reformat files or check data quality limit testing Split can generate tables with report and column headings as well as time synchronize and merge up to eight data files Input Files maximum of eight are read by Split specific operations are performed on the data and the results are output to a new Output File or a printer Split creates a parameter file filename PAR that saves all of your settings such as which data files are read what operations are performed on the data set and where the final results will be saved The parameter file may be saved and used again Input Files Section 10 3 3 1 must be formatted in Printable ASCII Comma Separated ASCII Field Formatted ASCII Final Storage Binary Format Table Oriented ASCII TOACI1 or TOAS Table Oriented Binary TOB or Raw A D data such as the results of a burst measurement Split can be used to convert a file of one format to a different format For example a Table Oriented ASCII file can be converted to the Comma Separated ASCII format used in mixed array datalogger data files This is useful to convert table based data files to work with applications that were written to work with mixed array files Output files generated by Split can be Field Formatted default Comma Separated ASCII or Printable
79. in the menu when it is selected Close Message Window After you have pre compiled your program with the Compile Compile menu item or using the toolbar a message window opens up at the bottom of the CRBasicEditor main screen This option will close down that message window View Instruction Panel Select this option to View or Hide the instruction panel which displays a list of available instructions which can be used in your datalogger program based on the pre defined instruction filter selected with the drop down selection box Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 3 6 CRBasic Editor Edit Menu This menu item allows you to edit and manipulate the text currently being displayed in the Editor Standard text editing functions such as Cut Copy Paste Delete Select All Undo and Redo are found in this menu 5 3 6 1 Other Options Create Compressed File Creates a new file with a _str extension All user comments and line spacing in the program are removed from the file Removing comments and spaces can significantly reduce the file size in larger programs Rebuild Indentation Reworks the indentation of loops f Then Else statements and other logic nesting and removes blank lines based on the Vertical Spacing rules Options Editor Preferences Vertical Spacing tab Save As CRB Saves highlighted text to a file with a CRB extension This file is referred to as a library file The file can then be reused by
80. item in RTDAQ To store these logs to disk choose the Log File Settings item from the Options menu of the LogTool application and choose the desired logs by selecting To Disk check box The number of log files RTDAQ will save can be changed by entering a new value into the File Count field The size of the log files can also be changed by entering a new value into the File Size field By default RTDAQ stores five historical files of each type of log each file 1 4 MB in size After five files have been created the oldest log file is deleted as a new one is begun RTDAQ stores the most recent log records in a file that has a character in the place of the version number or X in the above file names When this file grows to the point that it will exceed the threshold set by the File Size setting for that log default 1 4 MB in RTDAQ the server renames the log file by replacing the dollar sign with a new version number At the same time that the server rolls over to a new log file the File Count parameter for that log will also be evaluated If there are more saved files for that log than are allowed by the File Count parameter default is five files in RTDAQ the server will delete the oldest of these files until the count is less than or equal to the File Count 10 63 Section 10 Utilities 10 4 1 2 Log File Message Formats 10 4 1 2 1 General File Format Information The communications status transaction and object state logs all s
81. items will be listed in the order in which they were declared in the CRBasic datalogger program Drag and drop your selection onto the grid of the Monitor Data screen or after highlighting your selection select the cell where the data value should appear and press Paste If you want the Monitor Data screen to remain in front for multiple pasting of selections check the Stay on Top check box You may add values for monitoring from multiple tables to see activity in more than one table at a time 7 3 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File view Datalogger Network Tools Help Kom 3S OD a ola P m z a Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph xY Plot FFT Histo cR1000 Say Field Monitor RecNum i 246 553 Eo TimeStamp 2008 10 10 19 myValue l 0 85 CR800Series myValue_FFT 1 106 10 f myValue_FFT 2 149 01 myvalue_FFT 3 110 35 Delte myValue_FF ira CREO0GK F MultiOut myValue_f FFT 3 110 35 imyValue_ myValue_FFTYS S9 myValue_FFT 7 48 38 Ll myValue_FFT 8 7 ie OE If you no longer wish to monitor a data item highlight it on the grid and press the Delete key You can right click on the item for removal and select Delete To remove all items from the display the Delete All button can be used or the function can be accessed as an option from the right click menu er 7 1 3 Using the Start Stop Button To begin the
82. more good data frames or to stop the repair process CardConvert displays the last time stamp for data in the repaired file If you think there should be additional data on the card you can continue to run the repair process If it appears that all the data has been stored to the new file you can stop The option to continue processing the file allows you to recover all good data on a card with more than one corrupted frame Note that CardConvert can repair only TOB2 or TOB3 files TOB1 files cannot be repaired The Repair File option should be used only if a standard conversion cannot be done 10 1 5 Viewing a Converted File Converted data files can be reviewed using the View Pro file viewing application View Pro can be launched by pressing the View Files button If a file is highlighted in the list of files that file will be displayed when View Pro is opened Otherwise you can select the file to view from View Pro s File Open menu 10 2 Device Configuration Utility 10 2 1 Overview 10 6 The Device Configuration Utility DevConfig is used to set up dataloggers and intelligent peripherals before those devices are deployed in the field and before the devices are added to networks in Campbell Scientific datalogger support software such as LoggerNet or RTDAQ Some key features of DevConfig include e DevConfig supports only direct serial connections between the PC and devices e LoggerNet or RTDAQ must be closed if you are
83. of data and just one day is desired the start and stop values allow the user to get just that day s data The array containing the Stop Condition is not included in the output file If the stop value is not found Split will display a dialog box that gives the option to select a new file and continue processing the data This feature is useful when data are contained in more than one data file The Start Stop On After Time function can be used with a Stop Condition This will stop processing of the file when the exact time is found or at the first instance of data after that time has occurred This option is found on the Output tab Other button The C and F commands alter the meaning of the Stop Condition 10 3 3 3 1 C Option Formatting Event Tests Containing Conditional Output Arrays 10 28 The C option is used to combine data from two or more conditional arrays onto one Split output line A conditional array is one that is only output when a defined event occurs Section 10 Utilities Assume that two or more conditional Output Arrays with unique Output Array IDs compose a test period followed by an unconditional Output Array that defines the end of a test The unconditional end of test Output Array is at the end of each test but the conditional Output Arrays may or may not be present The data file is comprised of several of these tests As an example let s look at a vehicle test application The start of the test is when
84. of data will be drawn on the screen Choose the Line Only option to display only lines on the graph that connect between the data points obtained from the datalogger Choose the Points and Line option display both points and lines on the graph Choose the Points Only option to display only the points obtained from the datalogger The Buffer Options section allows you to turn the data buffering functionality on or off When the Buffer Data check box is checked the option is active arrow buttons appear at the bottom of the graph and the stopped graph can be scrolled backward in time for a specified interval into the past You can control the size of the buffer by specifying how many pages worth of data you want to be available to scroll backward to when the graph is stopped Set the Number of Pages to Buffer spin box to control this setting 7 23 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 24 Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields RecNum TimeStamp FFTView_FTs 2 _ Graph Width 00 h 00 m 05 s 000 ms 2 Collect Mode Graph All Data O Newest Records 1 Drawing Mode Strip Chart Shift Z O Shift Data 11 29 16 AM 11 29 18 AM 11 29 20 AM Fill and Stop Si The stopped graph has arrow buttons that appear below it to move backward or forward one page at a time moving to the earliest page or to the latest newest page of the buffer You can also manually navigate through the bu
85. one for the calibration type in the FieldCal instruction of your CRBasic program The Calibration Wizard can be used to calculate and apply the proper offset while the program is running in the datalogger or code can be configured within the CRBasic program to trigger the offset event based on flags or other user defined conditions that occur while the program runs 9 3 3 Two Point Multiplier and Offset Calibration Two point multiplier and offset calibration uses a linear fit technique against two different known value conditions of the sensor s measurement The sensor is placed into the first condition and the known value for that condition is provided to the datalogger program One or more measurements of that first condition are stored and then the datalogger informs the user that the second known condition should now be applied to the sensor The second condition is applied and its known value is then provided to the datalogger The datalogger then measures the second condition When the measurement of the second point condition is complete a linear fit of the two points is calculated The results are a slope value m value or multiplier and a y intercept b value or offset Thus the simple form y mx b is a representation of the linear fit where m is the new multiplier value used and b is the new offset used A simple example of a two point multiplier and offset calibration would be placing two objects of known weight such as 5 Ibs
86. operations can vary from device to device Two common operations are sending a new operating system and communicating with a device in terminal emulation mode These two operations are covered below Refer to DevConfig s embedded help or the user manual for a device for more device specific operations 10 2 3 Downloading an Operating System DevConfig can send operating systems from the Send OS tab to all Campbell Scientific devices with flash replaceable operating systems An example for the CR1000 is shown below Device Configuration Utility 1 10 File Language Help POTETENE Device Type CR1000 Send O cD295 m CR1000 OS Download Instructions TA This page is used to download an operating system to the CR1000 using CR10X PB the datalogger s boot code As a result of this process the datalogger CR10 TD will reset all of its memory including programs data and settings pare Denes Alternatively the operating syster can be sent to the datalogger by CR23 PB connecting to the datalogger and using the Logger Control tab This CR23X TD alternative method is more likely although not guaranteed to preserve the CR3000 rogramming and settings of the datalogger CR5000 prog g g gg CR510 1 Connect the RS 232 port on the datalogger NOT the CS KO port CR510 PB to a serial port on your computer CRS510 TD CR800 Series 2 Remove power from the datalogger CR9000 3 Make sure that the appropriate serial port is selected
87. process of retrieving values from the datalogger for display in this screen press the Start button To discontinue this continuous monitoring press the Stop button The Start button changes into the Stop button after the screen begins displaying data The Stop button becomes the Start button after the data updates have been stopped All specialized real time window display screens use Start and Stop buttons to control the monitoring of data Data values will continue to update when the display is in active mode i e when started with the Start button Hovering over the field name will display a pop up indicating the source table full field name and current value of the display item 7 1 4 Customizing the Display of Data in the Monitor Data Screen Numerous data items can be displayed simultaneously in the Monitor Data screen You can adjust the separator between the field names and their current values by positioning the mouse over the dividing line and moving the line to the left or right To adjust the number of columns shown see the description for the Options button below To change the font size of the window resize the main RTDAQ window to a larger or smaller size and the font size will adjust automatically to take up the window display area If the full numeric value of a measurement cannot be seen with the current width you can bring up a separate screen by right clicking on the value s name cell and choosing the View Mo
88. program the datalogger will allocate memory to all fixed size tables first and then divide the remaining memory among any tables configured as auto allocate In doing so the datalogger attempts to set the size of the auto allocated tables so that they all fill at about the same time When you ve configured all of your outputs click Finish 5 38 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 2 4 Step 4 Generate the Program in the Format Required by the Datalogger The Finish button completes the process If you haven t yet saved the program Short Cut asks for a program name and offers the default directory within its program working directory default is C Campbellsci SC Win Short Cut also displays a Results Summary and Advanced window Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin test99 SCW Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds File Program Tools Help Results Summary Advanced Progress 1 New Open Short Cut File Your Shortcut program settings have been saved in C Campbellsci SCWin test99 SCW 2 Sensors 3 Outputs Datalogger Program Successfully Generated 4 Finish The following datalogger program has been created C Campbellsci SCWin test99 CR1 Use PC200W PC400 LoggerNet RTDAQ or VisualWeather to transmit C Campbellsci SCwit Wiring Or you can send the program to the datalogger now Wiring Diagram Compile Results C Campbellsci Lib Compilers cricomp exe exit code 0 C Campbellsci SCwin test99 CR1
89. respectively An example of each of these file types is given in Table 10 3 1 in the Input Files section 10 51 Section 10 Utilities 10 52 NOTE The Custom file format uses the regional settings in the Windows operating system to determine the decimal symbol and the separator used with data values In the Regional Settings for Numbers the decimal symbol uses the character specified in the Decimal Symbol field the separator uses the character specified in the List Separator field These settings are typically found in Control Panel Regional Settings or Options Numbers tab This allows users who are used to the comma as the decimal and the period as a data separator to see the output data in that format Default Column Widths The Default Column Widths field is used to set the default width of the columns Valid entries are 6 7 8 and 9 The initial width is 8 High Resolution Final Storage data requires a minimum column width of 8 Entering a number in the Width row for each column overrides the default settings and sets the width of individual columns If this field is left blank the Default Column Widths field is used Screen Display The Screen Display field controls writing the processed data to the screen To write to the screen check the box For faster execution uncheck the box to omit writing to screen The data will then be written to the file only Report A report with page and column headings ca
90. results you need RTMC Development C Campbellsci RTMC temp data rtmc2 File Edit Yiew Project Screen Component Window Help DE oi SB oo is 0 ter On Ost i COM A H hb Ea tro ol Bw Vive me NT KAO pix EEEEEEE E fo temp data rtme2 n P s r x A Fi H E Screent Screen2 Current Value is B8 13 58 20 13 58 25 13 58 30 13 58 3 Workspace Size 648 488 As seen in the example screen above different types of graphical components can be combined to create an attractive real time display Company logos maps or any image stored in a standard graphics file format can be placed on the screen Many images have been included with RTMC The directory in which these files are stored is C Campbellsci Lib RTMCMediaLib Custom images can be used as well these should be placed in the media library directory to make them available for RTMC s use 8 2 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software 8 1 1 The RTMC Workspace The RTMC workspace is a container for holding one or more display screens As new display screens are added Project Add New Screen they appear as tabs in the project The size of the workspace and the resulting run time window can be changed by selecting Project Configure WorkSpace or by dragging the workspace to a new size You must add a new display screen before components from the Component Too
91. select the file name and directory for the project file Save As brings up the Save As dialog to save the current project with another name or in a different directory Exit closes RTMC If there are unsaved changes the user will be prompted to save changes before exiting Cut Copy Paste are standard editing operations to take selected objects to an internal clipboard and paste back into RTMC 8 5 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software 8 6 NOTE 8 1 4 3 View Menu Cut Copy does not go to the Windows clipboard so these objects are not available to paste into other applications Undo cancels the last change made to the project Redo repeats the change that was just undone Select All selects all of the components in the workspace The components can then be cut copied deleted grouped etc The Preferences menu item opens the Editor Preferences screen used to change some global settings that affect all projects in RTMC The Working Directory is the directory in which to store RTMC project files By default this is C Campbellsci RTMC Press the Change Default Font button to set a new font for components that have text numeric value text graph titles and axes labels etc Component summaries are small boxes that are displayed on the screen beside a component when your mouse cursor hovers over the component for a few seconds The box displays information on the type of component the data value linked to the
92. selected you can press the Start button to begin monitoring the FFT spectra or histograms as they are received by RTDAQ from the datalogger The y axis scale shows on the left side of the graphical area and the x axis scale is shown at the bottom of the graphical display area 7 9 3 Using the Buttons Press the Start button to begin graphing the spectra or histograms from the datalogger The FFT Histogram screen displays data from the datalogger as quickly as it can Spectra or histograms will be displayed in the graphical area 7 53 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 54 of the FFT Histogram screen Press the Stop button to discontinue retrieving and graphing data The FFT Histogram window displays the Start button when the window is stopped and displays the Stop button in the same location when the window is running FFT Histogram 1 Select T able FFTOut v Select Data FFTView FTs v Graph Type Histogram i 3D View Number of Plots 14 aj Color Each Plot Zoom a f lt gt Axis Mode Show Values View Bins View Ranges Press the Clear button to remove the display of the current spectrum or histogram and begin displaying the next record The display will not stop if it is in the started state but just clear the screen and continue displaying new data Press the Options button to modify various display characteristics for the graph More det
93. serial BMPI1 communication framing packet was sent and the response received from the device CRIOX TD table based type devices The listed command was sent to an array based datalogger A BMP packet was received from the device CR10X TD type devices only A BMP3 packet was exchanged CR5000 CR9000 dataloggers only The computer tried to terminate the connection but the datalogger did not acknowledge the shutdown The packet received from the device got corrupted and the packet signature doesn t match the packet contents The serial communications port has been initialized The communications link has been initialized to transfer data packets The serial communications port has been closed The low level communications synchronization byte was not received after the computer sent out a serial packet Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message For a list of the commands and their meanings see the datalogger operator s manual This is an indication that there is a communications problem between the computer and the datalogger Check the cables and connectors and make sure the datalogger has power Check to find out where in the communications link noise or signal corruption is causing the data to be disrupted This indicates that the device is either not responding or responding with an invalid communications protocol This message would appear if trying to talk to an array ba
94. software allows you to install and use the software on one computer only 2 This software cannot be loaded on a network server for the purposes of distribution or for access to the software by multiple operators If the software can be used from any computer other than the computer on which it is installed you must license a copy of the software for each additional computer from which the software may be accessed 3 If this copy of the software is an upgrade from a previous version you must possess a valid license for the earlier version of software You may continue to use the earlier copy of software only if the upgrade copy and earlier version are installed and used on the same computer The earlier version of software may not be installed and used on a separate computer or transferred to another party 4 This software package is licensed as a single product Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer 5 You may make one 1 backup copy of this software onto media similar to the original distribution to protect your investment in the software in case of damage or loss This backup copy can be used only to replace an unusable copy of the original installation media WARRANTIES The following warranties are in effect for ninety 90 days from the date of shipment of the original purchase These warranties are not extended by the installation of upgrades or patches offered free of charge Campbell S
95. specific files for the a operation of PakbusGraph tion ofthe CR5000 CR9000X Program Generators ProgGen Contains user specific files for the opera Oo RTDAQ Default folder for collected data files RTDAQ SYS RTDAO working directory these files are controlled by the communications server and should not be disturbed by the user except when back ing up the system Tampering with these directories or files can cause unexpected and undesired results in program operation RTMC Contains user specific files for the operation of RTMC B SCWin Default folder for user s datalogger pro grams created in the Short Cut program generator oe View Pro Default directory for View Pro s window 2 Splitw Default folder for user s Split parameter files and resulting reports and output files settings FIGURE 3 2 1 Typical Working Directories for RTDAQ 3 2 2 Backing up the Network Map and Data Files As with any computer system that contains important information the data stored in the RTDAQ working directory should be backed up to a secure archive on a regular basis This is a prudent measure in case the hard disk crashes or the computer suffers some other hardware failure that prevents access to the stored data on the disk The maximum interval for backing up data files collected from dataloggers depends primarily on the amount of data maintained in the
96. specific starting times Split starts the output at the earliest specified starting time In a PRN file Blanks or the comment entered in the Replace bad data with field are inserted for values from other input files until their starting times are reached In a RPT file only blanks are used When using time synchronization with an array based data file with a midnight time stamp of 2400 you will need to select the Other button Midnight at 2400 hours check box 10 3 3 2 2 Starting Relative to PC Time Included in the time synchronize function is the ability to start relative to the current PC TIME computer time This feature allows a PAR file to be run on new data files without changing the Start Conditions provided the Input Data File is collected at a fixed interval and Split is run at a fixed interval For example the same PAR file could be run every day to display the last 48 hours of data without changing the start conditions For example using a table based data file Start Condition 1 1 1 1 1200 1 In this instance Split will begin processing data when the date for both files is one less than the current date 1 1 1 1 1200 1 and the time is 1200 1 1 1 1 1200 1 As an expanded example assume that RTDAQ is used to append data to an archive file SplitR is executed using a desktop shortcut In this case the frequency of data collection and data reduction is the same Time values in the data file day
97. supports the following values IEEE4 IEEE8 FP2 ULONG LONG SecNano BOOL and ASCII len Each data record following the header is a sequence of binary values The length of each value is determined by the data type assigned to it in header line five and the length of the entire record is the sum of the individual data value lengths There are no characters that separate records so the application that reads the TOB1 file must understand the file header so that the record length can be calculated The timestamp and record number for each record are an optional output in a TOBI file If these elements are present a SECONDS NANOSECONDS and RECORD column will be generated as names in the field list of header line two A 2 Datalogger Data Formats A 2 1 TOB2 or TOB3 TOB2 and TOB3 files are created when data is stored on external PC cards with dataloggers such as the CR9000X CR5000 CR3000 and CR1000 Once data has been collected from the card using RTDAQ or LoggerNet it is stored in another format such as TOB1 or TOAS Only uncollected data files on cards or copied from cards are in the TOB2 or TOB3 format The TOB2 file format has been replaced in newer datalogger operating systems by the TOB3 file format TOB3 format is similar to TOB2 in most respects but differs from TOB2 in the following ways e Frame headers in TOB3 are 12 bytes long rather than 8 bytes long The additional 4 bytes contain an unsigned integer
98. that appear on the left side of the generator window Use these buttons to set various options for the program to be generated After making changes review the information in the summary pane on the right side of the generator display This contains an overview of what will be in the generated program based on the program settings already created within the generator application for this particular project Versioning information about the CR5000 and CR9000X program generators is also given By hovering the mouse over each button the user can display a quick help reminder in the status line at the bottom of the screen and a pop up window with the same text For more information about each of these buttons and its function press the Help button from the generator window to access the online help screens To access the online help system in the Windows Vista operating system you will need to download the Win32Help program from Microsoft s website You will be prompted to do this the first time you open the help system if it has not already been done previously to accommodate the help system of another software program Press the Save button to save the generator project to a file GE9 for the CR9000X GES5 for the CR5000 and also to create the CRBasic program based on the current generator s settings C9X for the CR9000X CR5 for the CR5000 Use the Save and Send button to send a program generated from the current project to a
99. that corrective action may be taken You may check the Run Now check box to run the program immediately after it has been sent to the datalogger You can choose whether or not to erase card data files by selecting the appropriate option button If you want the program to start the next time the datalogger is powered up then check the corresponding check box Checking the Compress File check box will send a renamed version of the CRBasic program to the datalogger which has all unnecessary spaces indentation and comments removed in order to minimize the file size To send the file and perform the associated functions as you have selected in the screen press the Send button If RTDAQ is not running an error message will appear indicating that there is no communications server currently running If RTDAQ is running and the program compiles properly on the hardware you will receive a message indicating that the program is now running on the datalogger If something goes wrong when sending the program a message will appear indicating the error conditions This may be a NOTE Section 5 Program Creation and Editing hardware level compile error or another failure as reported to the software by the datalogger s program load and run process Press Cancel if you do not wish to send the program to the datalogger If you start the CRBasic Editor in some way other than the RTDAQ toolbar or Tools menu such as by double clicking on the progra
100. the number itself until it turns yellow then use the PC keyboard to enter a new value Alternately you can right click the value select View Modify Value and edit the value in the resulting dialog box 4 7 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 4 3 Specialized Real time Monitor Screens The Monitor Data screen is also used to access the specialized real time data monitor screens For more information about the Monitor Data screen see Chapter 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 4 5 Collect Data Tab To retrieve a copy of the data from the datalogger and store it permanently into a file located on your PC select the Collect Data tab RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Kw Disconnect Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data a Collection Options cR1000 Collect Mode Data Since Last Collection File Mode Append to End of File CR800Series Record Information File Format ASCII Table Data TOA5 v Include Timestamp Starting Record Information V Include Record Number Starting Date Time Ending Date Time Table Collection Table File Name Status C Campbellsci ATDAGQ CR1000_Status dat MultiQut C CampbellsciR TDAG CR1000_MultiOut dat Public C Campbellsci R TDAQ CR1000_Public dat Select All V Use Station Name Change File Name Start Collection The Collect Data s
101. the Start button to begin graphing the data The Real Time Graph displays data from the datalogger as quickly as it can Data value items will be displayed in the graphical area of the Graph screen Press the Stop button to discontinue retrieving and graphing data The Graph window displays the Start button when the Graph window is stopped and displays the Stop button in the same location when the Graph window is running Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time You can create a vertical line cursor on a stopped i e paused screen by double clicking on the screen If the Graph is running when you double click it will be stopped automatically When the vertical cursor is moved around the screen you can see the value for the current point in the Selected Fields data display area Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields RecNum TimeStamp NoisyVal Rndyvidth 36 777 08 17 51 46 89 84 100 00 j j i Graph Width 00h 00m 10s 000 ms lt Collect Mode Graph All Data O Fill Graph Width O Newest Records i Drawing Mode Strip Chart Shift OshitDaa 9 G l Options Clear Fill and Stop stat 5 51 41 PM S 51 43PM S 51 45PM S5 5148PM 5 51 48PM 5 51 50 PM Press the Clear button to clear all traces on the Graph window and begin graphing again The display will not stop if it is in the started state but just clear t
102. the Time Series functions remain synchronized to the starting time even if a complete array is missing from the input data When elements are missing the Time Series calculations are based on the actual number of elements found Semicolons are used in Time Series functions to separate the elements or expressions from the count which determines the interval SmplMax and SmplMin require two elements separated by a semicolon The first is checked for a maximum or minimum while the second is sampled on the maximum or minimum The following set of weather data from Mt Logan in northern Utah gives a total of seven elements each hour This Field Formatted output with title and column headers was generated by Split These data are used in the following examples of Time Series functions Mt Logan Weather Data Day 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 179 Time 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 Avg x n Blanks x n Count x n Section 10 Utilities Air RH Mean Mean Std temp Wind Wind Dev deg Speed Vec of F mph Dir Dir 58 56 17 42 10 3 855 338 3 6 562 57 48 17 65 8 27 344 8 7 51 56 85 17 76 7 75 330 8 10 3 065 56 55 18 89 7 6 319 7 10 93 56 57 19 6 10 41 307 3 4 23 510 3 33 23 32 8 99 317 7 6 258 510 3 95 24 79 9 52 322 3 4 609 58 12 23 98 6 588 3110 3 6 9
103. the datalogger currently selected in the datalogger Network Map The Monitor Data screen contains the Field Monitor a built in numeric display window as well as buttons used for opening other specialized real time data displays x t a m pra Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph Y Plotter FFT Histo Field Monitor RecNum 1 152 pr TimeStamp 2008 16 52 27 NoisyVal 39 75 Rndvvidth 100 00 Delete Delete All Options Stop 7 1 2 Selecting Items for Display in the Monitor Data Screen To monitor numeric data in the main screen press the Add button The Add Selection screen will appear You may also right click on the field display area and choose Add TimeStamp NoisyNum Start Add Delete Select All Delete All View Modify Options You may select an entire table from the Tables column or you may select individual fields from a table in the Fields column To view and select individual fields from a table first select the table in the Tables box then select the individual field desired from the Fields box 7 2 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Add Selection Tables Fields HstNoise RecNum Public TimeStamp Status NoisyNum_Hst 1 NoisyNum_Hst 2 NoisyNum_Hst 3 Stay On Top C List Alphabetically You may list the items alphabetically by checking the List Alphabetically check box When the List Alphabetically check box is not checked the
104. the date and time at which those calibrations were performed This data is separate from the calibration file and forms a permanent history of calibration constants used within the program 9 1 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 9 2 Writing Calibration Programs with the CRBasic 9 2 9 2 1 The FieldCal Instruction If you wish to make measurements that will be calibrated as discussed above you should use the FieldCal instruction within the CRBasic program When the program is running in the datalogger you can use the RTDAQ Calibration Wizard to perform the actual calibrations in real time on the sensors that were previously designated for calibration You can also perform a manual calibration against a running program using the RTDAQ Monitor Data screen see Chapter 7 or from a keyboard display connected directly to the datalogger The FieldCal instruction works together with other related CRBasic instructions to complete the calibration task These instructions are shown in Table 9 2 1 TABLE 9 2 1 The FieldCal Instruction Family Instruction Description FieldCal This is the main calibration instruction The CRBasic program should contain one FieldCal instruction per measurement requiring calibration This instruction is placed after the measurement instruction to which it applies LoadFieldCal optional This instruction loads values into program variables from the calibration file cal if it exists
105. the scaling of the points drawn You can select the thickness and style to use for lines and you can select the symbol to use for points 7 45 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Color Select Axis Line Width Saco A Line Style Symbol Style Soldline M Rectanle l Use the Marks tab to control whether or not each point will be marked in the graphical display area Check the Show Marks check box to turn on marking The Round Frame check box controls whether or not the pop up box used to mark the points will have rounded corners The Transparent box is used to control whether or not the marks will show up in a box on the display When they are transparent only the values are shown in the vicinity of the points Graphing Options Scaling Data Display l Visual Display Trace Save Display Marks CI Show Marks 7 Draw Every jes C Round Frame CI Transparent Coin a Style YValue v 7 46 7 6 6 5 Save Tab Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time The Draw Every setting indicates how many points will actually have a mark as they appear on the screen If the setting is set to 5 then only every fifth point will have a mark as it appears on the XY Plot The Color option controls the background color of the box used to show the mark This is only used when the Transparent setting is not checked
106. the units Split Win Splitman PAR Mek Fie Edit Labels Run Printer Help Input File s Output File Output Dat Fi File Formal Browse Fourly pm iz IV Screen Display Column Widths fe Report and Column Headin Hourly Data Report Heading Coumnt E a e a a penataan o eon e tan 9 _ Dize AE Temp Wind Wind Wind deg C Speed Chill Chill mis deg C deg F Frannsnsnansnenanananansnnnnnnnnnnnnnd Time Series Heading Insert Delete Add This PAR file produces a wind chill summary of the Mt Logan Peak data set The formula for calculating wind chill is given as follows Te 33 h 22 066 where Te Wind Chill equivalent temperature degrees C h 100V 10 45 V 33 T where h Kcal m hr wind chill index v wind speed in meters second T temperature in degrees C Note that at wind speeds between 0 to 4 mph 0 to 1 8 m s the wind chill should be ignored because this formula results in wind chill temperatures that are greater than the ambient temperature The National Weather Service includes wind chill in reports only when temperatures drop below 35 F 1 7 C The formula is for example purposes and is not endorsed by Campbell Scientific as a standard When this PAR file is executed the following output is displayed on the screen 10 48 Section 10 Utilities Wind Chill Report from Mt Logan Temp Wind H Wind Wind deg C Speed C
107. the vehicle is turned on and the end of the test is when the vehicle is turned off The conditional output arrays could be e monitoring the engine temperature and outputting data to a unique array when the temperature exceeds a limit e outputting data to a unique array when the brakes are applied e outputting data when engine RPM exceeds a limit The unconditional array data the stop condition would be output to a unique array when the engine is turned off By processing the data with Split using the C option the data collected during each test could be merged on to one line with blanks inserted if a set of data didn t exist e g if the engine temperature never exceeded the defined limit e An Input File must be set up for each array ID in the test The first Input File is configured on the Input File tab that appears when you open Split Additional Input Files are added by choosing Edit Add Data File from the Split menu The same data file will be used as the Input File for each array e Type in the array ID in the Copy field of the Input File tab for each array The array ID is the first element of a data file so the line should read 1 123 where 723 is the actual array ID you want to process e In the Select field type in the number for each element data value you want to be output in the report e In the Stop Condition field type in a C followed by the ID of your stop condition array If your end of test array was
108. this button to be enabled Oo g 4 22 coon Tz gt Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen RTMC Development Opens RTMC Development for the setup or editing of RTMC projects RTMC Run time Opens RTMC Run time for the execution of RTMC projects RTDAQ must be in a connected state for this button to be enabled View Pro Opens View Pro for viewing collected data files Split Opens Split for splitting collected data files based on timestamp or other criteria Card Convert Opens Card Convert to convert binary data including data obtained from a removable card Short Cut Opens Short Cut for the generation of CRBasic programs CRBasic Editor Opens the CRBasic Editor for manually creating or editing CRBasic programs CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator Opens ProgGen for the generation of CR5000 or CR9000X CRBasic programs 4 23 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 24 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing The CRBasic Editor is a programming tool which can be used with the CR1000 CR3000 CR800 CR850 CR5000 and CR9000X dataloggers It is intended for use by experienced datalogger programmers who need more flexibility and control over the datalogger operation than what can be achieved using program generators such as SCWIN or the CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator ProgGen This programming language is similar in syntax program flow and logic to the Structured BASIC programming language SCWIN and the CR5
109. to be displayed by the left y axis or the right y axis or both For more information about using the Visual Display options refer to the online help which can be accessed by opening the Options screen and pressing the Help button 7 4 9 4 Customizing the Traces on the Display 7 4 9 4 1 Individual Trace Options NOTE For the Trace tab to appear in the Graphing Options window you must select an individual display field from the Selected Fields section of the main graph screen before pressing the Options button You can also right click on the individual field and choose Trace Options 7 25 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Display Marks Color Select Axis Line Width aC Line Style Symbol Style SolidLine v xi Circle In the Display tab of the Trace Options screen you can select the color to be used by the trace on the graph Use the Select Axis drop down to select whether the point scaling of the trace should follow the left or right y axis Use the Line Width setting to select the width of the line used to connect points together if you are connecting points with lines Use the Line Style drop down to choose what kind of line will be drawn dotted dashed solid etc You can also use the Symbol Style drop down to choose a symbol to be used for displaying the points on the graph If you ri
110. up a program that performs zeroing calibration is to generate it See Generating Calibration Programs later in this chapter 9 3 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 9 4 9 3 2 Offset Calibration Offset Calibration is the act of placing a sensor into a state where the output condition is known to be a certain value and then changing the measurement s offset variable so that the sensor output reads as exactly that value It is similar to a zeroing calibration except that the known value is a non zero value By measuring the output of the sensor in this specialized condition the known offset condition the offset variable will be changed to ensure that this condition results in a measurement value that matches it Note that this process only changes the offset variable that is shared between the measurement instruction and the Fie dCal instruction The multiplier variable is unaffected A simple example of offset calibration would be placing an object of known weight such as 10 Ibs on a scale designed to measure the mass of objects With a known weight on the scale this is the condition in which the scale should give a known reading for its output First the calibration is triggered then the user informs the datalogger about the value of the known weight and finally the offset is adjusted to ensure that the scale gives a properly matched reading for that condition To perform an offset calibration use an argument of 1 the number
111. used to change the name of a datalogger 4 6 4 2 Backup Restore Network This function can be used to save a copy of the network map to a file and then to restore the network if necessary The settings for all the devices in the network will be saved A default is given for the directory and file name to be used for the backup or restore This can be changed by typing over the default directory and or file name or selecting the button to the right of the field containing the file name and browsing to the desired directory and file name To backup the current network map select the file name to which the backup will be stored and then press the Backup button The network map will be saved to the chosen file and a message will appear indicating that the network has been backed up To regenerate the network map from a backup file select the name of the backup file to restore from the dialog box and then press the Restore button Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen Note that this backup will replace the existing network it does not add to the existing network The backup restore option will be disabled if you are currently connected to a datalogger You must disconnect from the datalogger before performing a backup or restoring the network 4 6 4 3 Computer s Global PakBus Address RTDAQ communicates with the CR1000 CR3000 and CR800 series dataloggers using the PakBus protocol All nodes and routers including dataloggers and the
112. values to be graphed The Add Selection screen appears for you to make your selections Drag and drop the desired items into the Selected Fields area of the Graph window or highlight the desired items select the cell where the data value should appear and press Paste You may add one or more traces from same table and also add traces from different tables 7 15 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 16 Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields FFTView_FTs 1 FFTView_FTs 2 FFTView_FTs 3 Graph Width 0 00 h 00m 10s 000 ms x For more information on using the Add Selection dialog box see the Add Selection description in the Monitoring Data in Real Time section found earlier in this chapter 7 4 3 Moving and Resizing the Graph Window The Graph screen can be moved by dragging the title bar You can resize a Graph screen as desired by dragging the window corners You can also maximize restore and minimize the screen using the standard buttons in the upper right corner of the window or by clicking on the window s icon in the upper left corner When minimized the Graph screen shows as an icon on the task bar Use the close button red X to shut down a Graph screen There is also a help button the question mark button that brings up online help about the Graph window E Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields FFTView_FTs 1 7 4 4 Basic Graph Operation Once the desired fields are in place press
113. version of Campbell Scientific s newly updated data viewing application View Pro lets you examine data files DAT files collected onto the PC from the datalogger and displays data in either comma separated or tabular format record by record A graph can be displayed showing multiple traces columns of data This program also allows the viewing of specialized data records such as FFT spectra and histograms 1 1 8 Split Section 1 Introduction View Pro 4 0 jojyx ele Pe a vii 1990 06 10 11 21 22 374 44149 191G 11 2122 976 44144 LIO 16 11 2122 970 44145 1990 04 16 11 21 22 39 44481 LGW 16 112122 992 AS By sU O6 16 11 21 22 994 44159 NARWI MATIU NADE NAMM View Pro can be launched from a button on RTDAQ s main screen View Pro is a simple analysis tool and includes some basic printing and export capabilities Split is a stand alone application used to post process data files on the PC and generate reports A button on RTDAQ s main screen launches the Split brad application Jl Tt can be used to merge data from multiple stations into one file perform calculations and change date time formats Split can create reports or new files for input to other data analysis and display applications including HTML formats 1 1 9 CardConvert CardConvert is a utility to retrieve binary data from Compact Flash cards containing program output data and convert the data to an ASCH file or other useful
114. vi ATN C ATN2 AvgRun AvgSpa CheckSum Ceiling vi COS COSH Covariance CovSpa DewPoint v EXP FFT vv Select All Clear All Cancel Help 5 3 7 2 Other Options Associate Files This option is used to set up file associations within the Windows operating system so that if a program file is double clicked while in Windows Explorer that file with be opened in the CRBasic Editor Check one or more boxes for file extension s you want to associate and press the Associate Files button Show Keyboard Shortcuts This option displays a list of the functions of the CRBasic Editor which are accessible via the keyboard The list can be copied to the clipboard for printing or other uses Show Labels This option displays details about the output tables and the items they store as they are defined in the current CRBasic program The list can be copied to the clipboard for printing or other uses Set DLD Extension This option selects which datalogger s pre compiler will be used when performing a pre compile check on a DLD program which uses conditional compile statements A CRBasic program must be named with the DLD extension for this item to be active 5 3 8 Available Help Information Pressing the Help button of the Parameter dialog box will bring up a detailed help topic for the instruction being edited Pressing F when your cursor is within a parameter field will bring up help only on that parameter Som
115. which is a different location than that of Short Cut s included sensor files Once the custom sensor file has been saved it will be added to the Available Sensors list 5 43 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 6 Program Creation with the RTDAQ Program 5 44 Generator 5 6 1 Basic Operation RTDAQ includes the ProgGen application which generates detailed CRBasic programs for the CR5000 and CR9000X dataloggers Once generated these programs are ready to be loaded to the datalogger and executed Users with little or no knowledge of the CRBasic datalogger programming language can easily produce efficient programs using this application This is done by specifying details about the kind of program to be created along with the applicable parameters within the application s interface The CRBasic program is created automatically i e generated at the time the generator project is saved Generator projects can be retrieved at a later time so that some of the project s settings can be changed to generate variant programs based on the original program The RTDAQ Program Generator is a new revision of the program generators which were previously available with Campbell Scientific s PC9000 software This program creates CRBasic programs wiring diagrams and table information files for both the CR5000 datalogger and the CR9000X CR9032 CPU datalogger Creation of programs for the CR9000 datalogger CR9031 CPU is not support
116. will also see the CRD storage device The File Control window displays a list of files stored on each of its devices such as the CPU PC card or user specified drive The window on the left lists all of the data storage devices available for the selected datalogger CPU CRD or USR Selecting a device shows a list in the right pane of the screen displaying the files stored on that device The USR drive is a user created drive in the CR800 CR1000 and CR3000 dataloggers It can be set up by assigning a value to the datalogger s UsrDriveSize setting in the status table This drive must be set to at least 8192 bytes in 512 byte increments If the value entered is not a multiple of 512 bytes the size will be rounded up The size may also be rounded up to the account for a certain amount of overhead that is required for the drive to operate The Run Options for a program file indicate whether it is set to Run Now Run On Start up or both Run Always The currently executing program is indicated by the Run Now or Run Always attribute The file size is also displayed for each file as well as the last time the file was modified and whether or not the file is Read Only or Read Write Note that the Size and Modified date are not available for the CR9000X and CR5000 dataloggers 4 6 3 4 3 Working with Files and Directories There are several options for working with the files and directories on the datalogger Send is used to transfer files f
117. will correspond to the kind used most recently CR5000 or CR9000X 8 RIDAQ Program Generator CR9000X File Edit Help CR9000X Generator Program Name cR9000X OS Ve Operator I Fiat Last Saved ID Number Number Scan Interval CONFIGURATION TP SCANINTERVAL OUTPUT TABLES THERMOCOUPLES VOLTAGES HIGH VOLT The generator project type is given in the top left corner of the main generator screen and also in the title bar of the application 5 6 3 Using the CR5000 or CR9000X Program Generator Upon opening an existing or new generator project the main screen of the RTDAQ Program Generator application appears 8 RTDAQ Program Generator CR9000X File Edit Help ia CR9000X Generator Program Name NONAME C9X RT9GEN Version 6 0 0048 Operator Name CR9000X OS Version Compatibility 06 07 06 or later Last Saved ID Number Number Scan Interval 10 mSecs Shortest Possible Scan Time SCAN INTERVAL OUTPUT TABLES THERMOCOUPLES VOLTAGES HIGH VOLT ISOLATED BRIDGES FFTIFILTER PULSE AM25T CANBUS CALCULATED FIELDS PORTS FLAGS CAO OUTPUT SAVE AND SEND SAVE QUIT Print Help Test Summary of program Right column is measurement time only Processing can take considerably longer 5 45 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 46 NOTE You can access the functions of the CR5000 and CR9000X program generators by using the buttons
118. x y n Total x n WAvg x n element y when the maximum is found If an n value is specified then it outputs the sample on a maximum every n value otherwise it outputs the sample on a maximum at the end of file Examples SmpIMax 5 3 510 3 48 on max wind speed sample temperature Smp Max 5 3 6 8 56 57 307 3 60 93 317 5 510 3 48 338 7 on max wind speed sample temperature and wind direction every 8 hours looks for a minimum value in element x and samples element y when the minimum is found If ann value is specified then it outputs the sample on a minimum every n value otherwise it outputs the sample on a minimum at the end of file Examples SmplMin 3 5 11 86 on min temp sample wind speed SmpIMin 3 5 6 8 8 99 317 7 10 3 458 312 11 86 351 6 on min temperature sample wind speed and wind direction every 8 hours returns the total of element x over a data set or every n value Examples Total 5 211 36 daily wind run Returns the unit vector mean wind direction in degrees of element x wind direction in degrees over a full data set or every nth value Example WAvsg 6 323 14 mean wind direction for the day WAvg 6 4 333 41 mean wind direction for 4 hours 3110 3 73 mean wind direction for 4 hours 306 mean wind direction for 4 hours 314 92 mean wind direction for 4 hours 341 03 mean wind direction for 4 hours 328 09 mean wind direction for 4 hours 1
119. you wish to display Connect to the datalogger by double clicking on the corresponding icon in the Network Map the list of available dataloggers shown on the menu at the far left of the main RTDAQ screen Also clicking on the datalogger icon and pressing the Connect button will initiate a connection RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X Clack Pragram Monitor Data Collect Data Clocks Datalogger Information cR1000 Datalogger Name CR9000 Datalogger Type CR9000x Datalogger ay a PC t Direct Connect Connection COM Port COM1 R800Serie Datalogger Settings Baud Rate 115200 Extra Response Time Os Max Time Online Od Oh Om CROOK C Pause Clock Update Datalogger Program manana rn ree ffurrent Program Once connected to the desired datalogger select the Monitor Data tab from the main screen RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Kw Disconnect ar OO ogg _Clock Progran Collect Data Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph xY Plot FF CRIS a Field Monitor RecNum 243 992 TimeStamp t2008 09 59 39 Add myValue 41 17 CR800Series myValue_FFT 1 81 76 5 myValu mon 114 21 maag 7 1 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time You may select the Monitor Data tab without connecting to a datalogger and RTDAQ will automatically connect to
120. 0 41 Section 10 Utilities 10 42 10 3 3 6 6 Special Functions Details and Examples NOTE TABLE 10 3 8 Split SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Crif Insert carriage return line feed in Output File Date format S H D Y Convert day of year and time to a timestamp with calendar date and time where format uses Windows conventions to specify output format S seconds H HoursMinutes D Day Y year The output timestamp is quoted text Date can be used to create monthly time series summaries See Section 10 3 3 10 3 3 Edate format S H D Y The same as the Date function except that the output text is not quoted EDate can be used to create monthly time series summaries See Section 10 3 3 10 3 3 Label Insert Comment in Output file Label is anything within the quote marks Line Number of lines written to Output file smpl pa n Page break such that n is the number of lines per page for the printer or the RPT file PCdate or PCEdate Used in a report header to print the current date WDQ Outputs the wind direction using an alphabetical abbreviation based on 8 quadrants Outputs the wind direction using an alphabetical abbreviation based on 16 quadrants The Mt Logan data set is used for the Special Function examples These functions are helpful in converting time fields to formatted timestamps and formatting the output Since one of the main differences between mixed array data files
121. 00 CR1000 or CR5000 dataloggers will be excluded from the list even when they are defined in the network map because those dataloggers are not associated with CR9000X programs If there are no dataloggers on the network map which match the extension of the program being sent then all dataloggers on the network map will be shown This will make the user aware of the mismatched program extension so that corrective action may be taken 5 6 5 2 Run Options You may check the Run Now check box to run the program immediately after it has been sent to the datalogger You can choose whether or not to erase card data files by selecting the appropriate option button If you want the program to start the next time the datalogger is powered up check the corresponding check box Checking the Compress File check box will send a renamed version of the CRBasic program to the datalogger which has all unnecessary spaces indentation and comments removed in order to minimize the file size 5 51 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 52 5 6 5 3 Datalogger Response To send the file and perform the associated functions as you have selected in the screen press the Send button If RTDAQ is not running an error message will appear indicating that there is no communications server currently running If RTDAQ is running and the program compiles properly on the hardware you will receive a message indicating that the program is now running on the d
122. 00 13 61 13 52 2 932 077 60 2002 42 1600 13 59 13 53 1 673 067 60 2002 42 1700 13 8 13 56 724 2 963 60 2002 42 1800 13 88 13 59 2 677 405 60 2002 42 1900 13 99 13 75 4 235 2 941 60 2002 42 2000 13 87 13 8 6 903 5 224 60 2002 42 2100 14 05 T3782 8 06 7 3 60 2002 42 2200 14 07 13 85 7 37 6 424 60 2002 42 2300 14 09 13 86 7 1 6 189 60 2002 42 2400 14 12 13 88 9 6 8 58 60 2002 43 100 14 16 13 92 12 5 11 13 60 2002 43 200 14 16 13 96 12 09 10 89 ime 60 2002 43 300 14 13 13 93 11 14 9 74 A 2002 43 400 14 12 13 92 9 59 A AP xi Lines Read 953 Lines Written 189 Pause stop o FIGURE 10 3 8 Split Run Showing Hourly Data 10 3 3 Split Parameter File Entries 10 3 3 1 Input Files The name of the Input File is entered in the space to the right of the Browse button The default directory is the working directory for Split if the default installation directories were chosen this will be c campbellsci splitw If the input file is not in the default directory use the Browse button to find the input file If the default installation directories were chosen RTDAQ s default data file directory will be c campbellsci RTDAQ Array based datalogger files are stored in a simple comma separated ASCII format tabled based datalogger files are stored in TOA5 a comma separated format with headers Split can process Input files from other software but they must be formatted in Comma Separated ASCH Final
123. 000 CR9000X Program Generator are also discussed in this chapter 5 1 CRBasic Editor As shown below the CRBasic Editor s main window is divided into three parts the Program Entry Window the Instruction Panel and the Message area The Instruction Panel on the right side is a list that comprises the instructions for a particular datalogger in the CRBasic language Instructions can be selected from this list or entered directly into the Program Entry Window on the left The Message area at the bottom becomes visible after a program is compiled and shows results of the compile and any errors detected 4 amp CRBasic Editor C BenchWave CR5 for the CR5000 File Edit view Search Compile Template Instruction Goto Window Tools Help H02A 9 4458 SSA SESER rran g Public ScanCounter BenchWave DataTable Main True 1 DataInterval 0 0 0 0 Sample 1 BenchWave IEEE4 EndTable BeginProg Scan 10 mSec 1E3 0 ScanCounter ScanCounter 1 BenchWave Sin 2 3 141592654 ScanCounter 100 lt ersion C Campbellsci Lib Compilers CR5Comp exe VERSION 2 3 DATE 071030 C BenchWave CR5 Compiled OK C BenchWave CRS loaded Insert 5 1 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 2 Inserting Instructions An instruction can be easily inserted into the program by highlighting it in the Instruction Panel list and pressing the Insert button or by double clicking the instruction name If an instruction has one or more parameters an ins
124. 00Series J a 7 81 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 82 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software NOTE The Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC software provides the ability to create and run graphical screens to display real time data as RTDAQ collects it from a datalogger Controls are also provided to view and set datalogger ports and flags as well as values of variables As RTDAQ collects data from a datalogger the displays in RTMC are automatically updated RTMC has two operating modes Development and Run Time The Development mode allows you to create and edit a real time graphic display screens for displaying data collected from a datalogger The custom creation of data display screens helps to meet specialized data display requirements Once the screen is built and saved as a project file the screen can be displayed using RTMC Run Time Both RTMC Development and RTMC Run Time are provided with RTDAQ For RTMC s display to update in RTDAQ you must be connected to a datalogger This is different from the operation of RTMC within LoggerNet which requires scheduled data collection to be active for updates to occur Scheduled data collection is not available within RTDAQ 8 1 Development Mode E NOTE RTMC Development is a graphic display editor that allows the user to easily place graphical components on the display screen and associate them with data values There is an enhanced versi
125. 07 3 T107_C z 8 107 3 T1O07_C E 9 107 3 T107 C s Wiring Wiring Diagram Wiring Text 1 Table1 Add Table Delete Table Note that outputs for a sensor don t have to be added in the same sequence as the measurement You can even drag and drop the outputs to rearrange their order Note also that multiple outputs can be added for any one sensor For example you may want to store the maximum and minimum air temperature as well as the average Table based dataloggers have a TableName field as opposed to an array ID There is also a check box used to store data to a PC card if that functionality is supported by the datalogger model see below for more information The Advanced Outputs check box in the lower left corner provides more output options 5 37 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds File Program Tools Help Progress j a Sensors asuremer 1 New Open Default Batty ETO n befauit F EE 3 Outputs ute Maximum Enc_RH avr Wiring RM StdDev Wiring Diagram 4 Finish T107_C 1 T107_c 2 T107_C T107_C Sensors asureme ocessin tput Lal Units fesolutio T107_C CS105 BP_mmt Sample BP_mmtimmHg low Wiring Text T107_C HMP35C AirTC Average AirTC_A Deg C low T107_CG T107_C E iT107 coc 1 Table1 42 Table2 Add Table Delete Table The Advanced Output all
126. 1 2 Selecting Items for Display in the Monitor Data Screen 7 2 7 1 3 Using the Start Stop Button occ ee eeeeeceseeeesecreesecnereeseeenees 7 4 7 1 4 Customizing the Display of Data in the Monitor Data Screen 7 4 7 1 5 Setting the Monitor Data Screen Options 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 TAS A Display Tabni sinisisi tenes arte hoa nena 7 6 M522 Alarms Tab 5 303 isd sist E TE Bish en gies 7 6 FAS3 gt Setup Tabs secestsiscessessepeeitiistecssectewioedt serere sentetas eesis 7 7 7 1 6 Specialized Real time Monitoring Screens ee eeeeeeseeeeenees 7 7 1 2 POTtSAN GIF LAGS teases segecsty es tien e EE nE aree ster tees Meee soma 7 8 1 3 Fable Monitor yetenegi dd tense chink ibe iba cacedeap aati ue ivteb gee E 7 9 7 3 1 Using the Table Monitor ccc eeceesecsseeeceseeeeeeceeeeecneseeeeeenees 7 9 7 3 2 Displaying Tables on the Table Monitor ci eeeeeeeteeseeeeeee 7 10 73 2 1 Start and Stopiran i anpes e 7 11 T322 Fieldsand Valie Sienie aen aa e 7 11 7 3 2 3 Save Load Configurations eseseseeeseeeiereresrsrrreerereerees 7 12 7 3 2 4 Saving Displayed Data to a File eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 12 7 3 3 Moving and Resizing the Table Monitor Window 0 7 14 TA Real Time Graphivis sisi isssabecscysoctaashavereistid Sasshacssviottesthbhsestisatidstest ies 7 14 7 4 1 Using Graph Window ec cecesesceesecreesecneeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaees 7 14 74 2 Adding Items for Display on the Graph
127. 1 3 Running Multiple Copies of Splitr M Switch NOTE Multiple copies of Splitr can be run at one time by using the M switch This switch must appear immediately after Splitr For instance a batch file containing the lines SPLITR M Logan R SPLITR M Sinks R will open two copies of Splitr and process the two files simultaneously When using the M switch in a batch file you must begin each line of the batch file that runs an instance of Splitr with the start command Otherwise Windows will wait until the first Splitr command has finished before proceeding to the next 10 3 6 2 Using Splitr exe in Batch Files Batch files containing one or more Splitr command lines can be useful for automating data processing Batch files can be executed manually or by setting them up in a third party task scheduler Batch files process each command in succession without waiting for execution of a command to be completed before proceeding to the next unless they are configured to do so If multiple parameter files are being processed using Splitr in a batch file there are no conflicts because only one copy of Splitr can be active at any one time unless the M switch is used However if other commands are used along with Splitr such as opening the file in a spreadsheet copying it to an archive directory or appending it to an existing file these commands might be executed before Splitr finishes processing data The Windows Start w wait
128. 10 03 53 017 Fiynamic link added From 3 leaF to 4090 10 04 13 999 Started managing router connection 10 04 14 009 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 119 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 229 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 339 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 449 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 559 Reply From 3 bytes 12 tine 10 msec 10 04 14 670 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 780 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 14 890 Reply from 3 bytes 12 time 10 msec 10 04 15 000 Reply From 3 bytes 12 tine 10 msec gt Savelog Log Clear Log Log C Pause Connected localhost 4 6 5 4 1 Selecting the PakBus Network to View When PakBus Graph is opened it is set to view the first PakBus network on the computer on which the datalogger support software is running Each PakBus datalogger in RTDAQ is set up in its own PakBus network If more than one PakBus network is set up on the computer the different networks can be viewed individually by selecting a port name from the PakBus Network drop down list 4 20 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 6 5 4 2 Dynamic and Static Links There are two types of links to PakBus dataloggers that the server recognizes static links and dynamic links Static links depicted using red lines are the communication links to dataloggers that have been set up in the software but which have n
129. 104 Collect Mode ne j Graph All Data 0 0098 4 O Fill Graph Width 0 0096 Newest Records Drawing Mode i Lo e Strip Chart a O Shift Data Use the Drawing Mode section to decide how the graph will display data in its graphical area When you choose the Strip Chart option the default setting for the Graph window the data will display across the area until the screen is full and at that point the points on the screen will continuously shift back to make room for the newest points to show This works similar to a paper based strip chart such as those that have been used in scientific and medical applications for many years for example a seismograph or electrocardiogram Select the Shift Data option to move the data over as a block when the screen becomes full The shift percentage indicates how much of the oldest data will be moved off the screen to make room for newer data 7 4 8 Graph Window Display and Print Options You can access the display and print options for the main graph screen by right clicking on the display 7 20 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time You may select the Save As item to save a current snapshot of the screen to a graphics file You may choose the Copy item to store a current snapshot of the screen graphically to the clipboard of the Windows operating system The graphical snapshot will then be ready to paste into other graphics aware applications You may choose the Options item to
130. 12 CR5000 CR9000X Program Generators RTDAQ includes updated versions of the program generators for the CR9000X and CR5000 which were previously available in PC9000 Section 1 Introduction E RTDAQ Program Generator CR9000X File Edit Help CR9000X Generator Program Name HONAME C9X RT9GEN Version 6 0 0034 Operator io CR9000X OS Version Compatibility 06 07 06 or later a Last Saved ID Number Number Scan Interval 10 mSecs CONFIGURATION Shortest Possible Scan Time SCAN INTERVAL OUTPUT TABLES THERMOCOUPLES CALCULATED FIELDS FLAGS CR9000X and CR5000 programs can be generated using a detailed instruction level interface resulting in extensive control over generated programs 1 2 Getting Help for RTDAQ Applications Detailed descriptions of each application or tool are included in later sections of this manual Each application also has its own built in help system Context sensitive help for an application can usually be accessed by moving the focus to i e clicking on a particular item and pressing the F1 key or by selecting Help from the application s menu Contact your Campbell Scientific representative if you are unable to resolve your questions after reviewing the above noted resources 1 3 Windows Conventions There are numerous conventions and expectations about the way a software program looks and behaves when running under Microsoft Windows Campbell Scientific has a
131. 15 Cos 5 6 73551 returns the exponential base e to the power of element x Example Exp 4 00037 returns the fractional value of the element x Examples Frac 4 89 Frac 6 7 95 returns the integer portion of the element x Examples Int 7 270 Int 5 6 685 returns the natural log of element x Examples Ln 6 2 5217 Ln 7 6 5 1 2 4337 returns the sine of element x in degrees Examples Sin 7 99996 Sin 7 2 5 50603 Spatial functions included under Mathematical functions operate on a per Output Array basis The average maximum minimum and standard deviation of a specified group of elements within an array are calculated SpaAvg x y SpaMin x y SpaSd x y returns the spatial average of elements x through y Examples SpaAvg 1 7 258 74 SpaAvg 1 4 7 122 54 SpaMax x y returns the maximum value of elements x through y Examples SpaMax 1 7 1200 SpaMax 1 2 5 176 returns the minimum value of elements x through y Examples SpaMin 1 7 7 89 SpaMin 1 2 5 510 3 1 returns the standard deviation of elements x through y Examples SpaSd 1 7 394 57 SpaSd 5 2 1 49 607 Section 10 Utilities Sqrt x returns the square root of element x Examples Sqrt 3 34 641 Sqrt 3 2 0 1200 10 3 3 6 5 Time Series Functions Details and Examples TABLE 10 3 7 Time Series Functions TIME SERIES FUNCTIONS Avg x n Average Blank
132. 2 Note that if special formatting font style color is assigned to Matched Parentheses when your cursor is on an opening or closing parenthesis it will be highlighted with the formatting and the other half of that parenthesis will also be highlighted When your cursor moves off the parenthesis the formatting will return to normal text 5 3 5 2 Instruction Panel Preferences This option determines whether or not the instruction dialog box will be displayed when the user inserts an instruction Instruction Panel Options When Inserting An Instruction Show Instruction Dialog 5 3 5 3 Other Options Font Displays a font selection dialog to select the font typeface and size for the text in the CRBasic Editor Font style and color are set under Editor Preferences Background Color Displays a color selection dialog to set the color of the CRBasic program window Wrap Text When Printing When this option is selected long lines that extend past the right margin will be wrapped to the next line This option affects printing as well as the Print Preview mode A check mark will appear next to the option in the menu when it is selected Display Last Window Used When this option is enabled the program that was active in the CRBasic Editor when it was last closed will be visible when the Editor is reopened If this option is disabled no program will be loaded when the Editor is opened A check mark will appear next to the option
133. 3 3 2 Start ConditiOn cissstctunnsieisdedisisenouasnies 10 23 10 3 3 3 Stop Condition cececseeecssecseeeecneceeceeeeecsseeeeeseeneeeas 10 28 103 34 GOP nne deities eh aie adie eia E SEs 10 32 10 3 3 5 Time Synchronization eeeeeseeeeeseeeerereererrrrrrerereeee 10 32 10 33 06 Select a noe aiea e E Mave aioe 10 33 10 3 3 7 Output Fil Sa iat aer oaaae sorrie aatra rea esteti 10 50 10 34 Hel POPI Oi n e er ere e eeik aa s 10 56 10 3 5 Editing Commands iiite tes enues erte nnee 10 57 10 3 6 Running Split From a Command Line s s s 10 57 10 3 6 1 Splitr Command Line Switches ee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 10 57 10 3 6 2 Using Splitr exe in Batch Files cee eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeee 10 58 10 3 6 3 Processing Alternate Files cc eeeseseesecneeeeeneeeeeees 10 58 10 3 6 4 Processing Multiple Parameter Files with One Command Line siete a nnn naaa nda tiene 10 62 10 4 Log Files and the LogTool Application cc eeesssesecseeeeeeeeeeeees 10 62 10 4 1 Event Loggins netat ei aats or ri E rE Eara ier 10 62 10 4 1 1 Log Categories esineen rrari i asena 10 63 10 4 1 2 Log File Message Formats 10 64 Appendices A Campbell Scientific File Formats 0 A 1 A1 PCFil Data F rmats d eeaeee ara areto t asa oa eE r SEE ETA EERST A 1 Pall LOAD E E E EE EE EERS A 1 AT TOB a a aE E E EE E A 2 A 2 Datalogger Data Formats esssesssseessseeeseseeeresesresrrsrererrrsrrsreeresreerese A 3 A 2 1 TOB2 or TOB3 isan e
134. 3 647 5 4 8 The Scan Measurement Timing and Processing Once the measurements and calculations have been listed and the output tables defined the program itself may be relatively short The executable program begins with BeginProg and ends with EndProg The measurements processing and calls to output tables bracketed by the Scan and NextScan instructions determine the sequence and timing of the datalogging BeginProg Scan 1 MSEC 3 0 PanelTemp RefTemp 250 TCDiff TCO 6 mV50 4 1 TypeT RefTemp RevDiff Del Integ Mult Offset CallTable Temp NextScan EndProg The Scan instruction determines how frequently the measurements within the scan are made Scan Interval Units BufferOption Count Scan 1 MSEC 3 0 The Scan instruction has four The Interval is the time between scans Units are the time units for the interval The BufferSize is the size in the number of scans of a buffer in RAM that holds the raw results of measurements Using a buffer allows the processing in the scan to at times lag behind the measurements without affecting the measurement timing see the scan 5 21 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 22 instruction in the CR5000 help for more details Count is the number of scans to make before proceeding to the instruction following NextScan A count of 0 means to continue looping forever or until ExitScan In the example the scan is millisecond three scans are buffered and the measurement
135. 30 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1208 1358 6 9 2004 04 59 31 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1359 1509 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 31 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1359 1509 6 9 2004 04 59 32 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1510 1660 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 32 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1510 1660 6 9 2004 04 59 32 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1661 1811 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 32 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1661 1811 6 9 2004 04 59 33 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1812 1962 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 33 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1812 1962 6 9 2004 04 59 33 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 1963 2113 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 33 PM CR23XPB 21 Hole collected Count2Min 1963 2113 6 9 2004 04 59 34 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 2114 2264 polling 10 4 1 2 3 Communications Status Log Format Each record in the communications status log includes two fields in addition to the timestamp and device name Severity A single character code that indicates the type of message The following values are legal e S Status Indicates that the identified operation has successfully completed e W Warning Indicates that the server has attempted to retry the operation with the identi
136. 4 59 41 PM PakBusTran release focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 28986 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM Release Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM Transaction focus start table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM arm transaction watchdog table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 7250 28990 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM Request Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM PakBusTran release focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 28990 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM Release Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM Transaction focus start table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM arm transaction watchdog table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 7250 28997 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM Request Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM PakBusTran release focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 28997 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM Release Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM Transaction focus start table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM arm transaction watchdog table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 7250 29003 6 9 2004 04 59 43 PM PakBusTran release focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 29003 6 9 2004 04 59 43 PM Release Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 43 PM PakBu
137. 4 7 The RTDAQ Toolbar RTDAQ 1 0 Dianea Support Software CR1000 CR1000 Mess 33 OD BRBaARE oeo B Information a Nome CR1000 i rs The Toolbar gives quick access to commonly used functions Many of the more frequently used functions of RTDAQ can be activated from the toolbar in addition to the pull down menus as described earlier in this chapter The following chart explains the functionality of the toolbar We cornet Connect Disconnect Toggles and displays the connection state The Connect button indicates that no datalogger is currently connected Press this button to connect to the YK once currently highlighted datalogger The Disconnect button indicates that you are connected to the highlighted datalogger Press this button to disconnect Add Datalogger Opens the EZSetup Wizard to add a new datalogger to the network map RTDAQ must be ina disconnected state for this button to be enabled Delete Datalogger Deletes the selected datalogger from the network map RTDAQ must be in a disconnected state for this button to be enabled Edit Datalogger Setup Opens the EZSetup Wizard to edit the settings for the selected datalogger RTDAQ must be in a disconnected state for this button to be enabled Medd Datalogger Status Opens the datalogger status screen RTDAQ must be in a connected state for this button to be enabled File Control Opens the file control screen RTDAQ must be in a connected state for
138. 518 163 0595 175 0196 85 4095 w l x WindSpd S WYT WindSpd U 27 04 8 2007 07 16 16 04 01 75 2007 07 16 16 04 02 2007 07 16 16 04 02 25 2007 07 16 16 04 02 5 2007 07 16 16 04 02 75 2007 07 16 16 04 03 2007 07 16 16 04 03 25 2007 07 16 16 04 03 5 2007 07 16 16 04 03 75 2007 07 16 16 04 04 2007 07 16 16 04 04 25 2007 07 16 16 04 04 5 2007 07 16 16 04 04 75 lt u won nonnruone m m N o 4 C DataFiles Logan_OneHour_a dat No Graph Associated 799 Records RECORD Batt olt Min Batt olt TMn 0 A 2005 09 09 12 32 15 PoiTemp Avq EncRH 33 99 4irTemp Avg RH 27 6 2005 09 09 14 00 00 2005 09 09 15 00 00 2005 09 09 16 00 00 2005 09 09 17 00 00 2005 09 09 18 00 00 2005 09 09 19 00 00 2005 09 09 20 00 00 2005 09 09 21 00 00 2005 09 09 22 00 00 2005 09 09 23 00 00 2005 09 10 00 00 00 2005 09 10 01 00 00 2005 09 10 02 00 00 ill aOnonsrane 2005 09 09 13 02 04 2005 09 09 14 00 01 2005 09 09 15 15 03 2005 09 09 16 55 03 2005 09 09 17 50 03 2005 09 09 18 05 01 2005 09 09 19 40 03 2005 09 09 20 03 08 2005 09 09 21 40 03 2005 09 09 22 45 03 2005 09 09 23 50 03 2005 09 10 00 10 03 2005 09 10 01 32 36 27 13 25 87 25 81 25 8 25 25 24 06 22 81 21 98 21 25 19 64 20 36 15 55 12 15 25 92 7 a 27 55 27 76 28 51 29 91 29 95 35 24 26 21 29 86 26 66 19 91 49 31 48 51 FIGURE 6 4 1 View Pro Main Screen 6 4 1 Column Size When a data f
139. 930 Table Size Fields Values a Save Table Monitor Configuration F Load Table Monitor Configuration FFTView_FTs 3 0 0005232354 FFTView FTs 4 0 0001569482 4 seoor ee naan nans 7 11 4 Saving and Loading Global Configuration Files You can group together the configuration options of multiple screens by saving and loading global i e master configuration files To do this first connect to the datalogger for which you want to use a global configuration file Open the various windows and configure each one When all of the settings are configured as you want them create the global configuration file by choosing Save Configuration from the File menu A dialog box appears with which you may browse to a folder and specify a name with which to save the file To load a global configuration that was saved previously choose Load Configuration from the File menu A dialog box appears with which you may browse to and open a global configuration file The settings from that file will be immediately loaded into all of the affected screens RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X aG view Datalogger Network Tools Help 33 gt OB BB 1m fagram Monitor Data Collect Data param LONCH Save Configuration Load Configuration i Exit amp ee E Bni i Forts amp Flags Table Monitor Y Graph Fast Graph xY Plot CR1000 y Field Monitor i CRS
140. ASCII Split can also create reports in ASCII as well as html formats or send them directly to a printer Split lends itself to experimentation The processed data are displayed on the screen giving immediate feedback as to the effect of changes or new entries to the parameter file Split does not modify the original Input File Section 10 Utilities 10 3 2 Getting Started The most common use of Split is to separate array data collected on a particular interval from a data file containing data output at several different intervals In the following example hourly data are split from a data set that contains 15 minute hourly and daily data The data was collected from BirchCreek a CR10X datalogger The CR10X was loaded with a program created by Edlog named Birch dld The 15 minute data array 99 the hourly data array 60 and the daily data array 24 are intermixed in the data file Figure 10 3 1 fe Campbell Scientific iew32 Data Panel C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 BirchCreek dat File View Help AEA Yalanays gt ee EB KE 99 Year RT Day_ RTM Hour_Mi BattVol BattYol BattVYol Encl_RH Encl RH LogrTem LogrTe 99 2002 35 2130 14 23 14 00 2118 22 07 2128 15 45 a 99 2002 35 2145 14 24 14 03 2133 22 31 2143 15 92 60 2002 35 2200 14 19 13 96 2113 22 44 2155 15 43 99 2002 35 2200 14 19 14 01 2158 22 44 2155 16 69 99 2002 35 2215 14 23 14 01 2200 22 38 2214 16 93 99 2002 35 2230 14 25 14 04 2218 22 48 2229
141. An audible alarm can be disabled by right clicking the component with your mouse and selecting Acknowledge Alarm i z Slider depicts the selected data value as a single horizontal bar The E data value can also be set to a new value by moving the slider Label displays a text string that can be used to label other components value A 0 is considered Off false any non zero number is considered On True In run time mode right click a switch to change its state The option to change the state of a switch with a double click can be enabled in the Properties window Switch indicates the state of a port flag input location or Boolean Image allows you to place a static image on the display Chart displays one or more traces on a line graph The time stamp on the x axis reflects the server clock Note that a difference in the server clock and the datalogger clock coupled with a small time window for the chart could result in no data being displayed COM CommStatus Alarm provides a visual and or audible alarm when W communication has failed a sufficient number of times to put the datalogger into a Primary or Secondary Retry mode the retry mode used is based on the Sensitivity property for the component An audible alarm can be disabled by right clicking the component with your mouse Time displays the server time server time at last data collection 12 18 station time station time of last record stored or PC time Sectio
142. Brings the main View Pro window in front of other windows making the data file s visible Show Hide Gradient A toggle button that turns on and off the gradient background of the Histogram It may be useful to hide the gradient when printing the Histogram Modify Selection Brings up the Histogram Setup dialog box from which you can choose the data to be viewed Undo Zoom Returns the Histogram to its original state after zooming From the XY Plot screen you can graph a data value on the y axis against a different data value on the x axis The user specifies what will be used for both the X axis data value and the Y axis data values Each Y axis data value is plotted against the X axis data value with the identical timestamp 6 13 Section 6 View Pro amp XY Plot6 Shik iam v Logan_OneHour dat J i FIGURE 6 5 5 XY Plot 6 5 3 1 Selecting Data to be Plotted To select the data value s to be plotted highlight the column headings in the data file with a single mouse click Each column that is selected in the data file will be added to the XY Plot in both the X and Y drop down lists Select from the X and Y drop down lists the values to be used for the X axis and Y axis respectively 6 5 3 2 XY Plot Toolbar The XY Plot toolbar includes the following icons Ee Copy to Clipboard Places the XY Plot graphic on the Windows clipboard It can then be pasted into other applications
143. CANADA www campbellsci ca dataloggers campbellsci ca Campbell Scientific Ltd CSL Campbell Park 80 Hathern Road Shepshed Loughborough LE12 9GX UNITED KINGDOM www campbellsci co uk sales campbellsci co uk Campbell Scientific Ltd France Miniparc du Verger Bat H 1 rue de Terre Neuve Les Ulis 91967 COURTABOEUF CEDEX FRANCE www campbellsci fr info campbellsci fr Campbell Scientific Spain S L Psg Font 14 local 8 08013 Barcelona SPAIN www campbellsci es info campbellsci es Please visit www campbellsci com to obtain contact information for your local US or International representative
144. Data ne e eree Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histo Rainflow CR1000 7 Field Monitor l a Webbs 7 29 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 5 2 Similarity between the Real Time Graph and the Fast Graph The Fast Graph operates in a similar fashion to the Real Time Graph except that it cannot display points on the lines it draws and it will not attempt to draw lines or points that are redundant based on the current pixel resolution of the display screen This increases the drawing speed of this screen which may be needed for some high speed applications For details on how to use the Fast Graph refer to the Real Time Graph sections described earlier in this chapter 7 6 XY Plot An XY plot is a graphical display in which measured data from the datalogger is not only used for the y axis values such as in a regular graph but also for the x axis values instead of using time for the x axis as is typically done such as in a regular time series graph By using one of the measured values as the x axis a special type of comparison can be made between measurements Measurements which are linearly dependent to each other related by a linear relationship should form a line on an XY plot When exact lines are not formed the relationship between the two measurements is evaluated by viewing how closely the graphed points approximate a line There are other kinds of graphical patterns
145. Drive button to bring up dialog box that helps you browse for the drive assigned to the card reader Note that you can also select a directory on your hard drive in which binary data files have been copied When a card drive or directory is selected any convertible files found with a dat extension will be displayed in the Source Filename column in CardConvert By default the converted data files will be saved to the same drive or directory as the source files To change the destination press the Change Output Dir button Once again you will be provided with a dialog box that helps you to browse for the desired drive or directory When the drive or directory is selected the path and the filename that will be used for the converted files will show up in the Destination Filename column The default filename for a converted file is comprised of the table name in the datalogger program along with a prefix that reflects the file format and an extension of either dat or a numeric value e g 000 depending upon whether or not filemarks are processed see below for information on file 10 1 Section 10 Utilities formats and filemarks For instance the default name for a table called MyData stored in TOAS format would be TOA5_MyData dat The destination directory or filename for a converted file can be changed on an individual file basis Click on the row for the file that you wish to change It will be highlighted Select Options Chan
146. E S ine A 3 A 3 Binary Data Value Types nennen riaa Ena A 5 A 3 1 FP2 2 Byte Low Resolution Format cccceeeseeteeeeeee A 5 A 3 2 FP4 4 Byte High Resolution Format A 5 AsB 3 TEEF nna eGieees e e denis aeea ER Bahra KAE A adie liven ties A 5 A34 JEEES i ich hides Sta iO Ae i A ale A 6 viii RTDAQ Table of Contents A 4 Converting Binary File Formats 00 0 0 cessessseeseeeeeeceeecsereeceeeeeens A 6 ACT Spliter niana i a oe ee A 6 AA Card Convert pais Aoi nites ties ieee See ai ee ER A 6 Importing Files into Excel c ceeeeeeeeeeeeee B 1 B 1 Table Based Data File Import TOAS 0 esceeseessestecseeeneeeeeeeeeeesees B 1 Step Lot Bis csspschetyssieeeipiocsa Aad esstecatad dev sascpeotee eee suastesi deity hs eas B 1 Step OF 3 irate baldness cree pitedese Moatitd se EE E tees B 2 Step 3 OF e E thei A ES B 3 Figures 3 2 1 Typical Working Directories for RTDAQ ssesseseseeeeeseeererersrrreeees 3 3 6 4 1 View Pro Main Screen essseseesiesesesrsrsresrerersesrseetssrsrsrerrerersesrseee 6 4 6 5 1 Lime Graph morenen nen ey aia ean 6 7 6 5 2 Graph CUTSOT sepci eses cie apip neesi rpe oresoao S 6 9 6 5 3 HIStO Sait iraan n aa ese e E ii a ATE 6 11 6 5 4 Histogram Setup Dialog BOX sssssesessssseseesiesesesrsrsrerrereesesrsrerrereesees 6 12 6 555 XY Plot a ia nea eee aaea eae e ene ea Ee aE E EE hale 6 14 6 5 6 Rainflow Histogram e esssseseseesesesrstsrereerersrsesrerreret
147. EEOSE EN EEAS 1 9 1 1 11 CRBasic Editor eine eee ea t pe a iy 1 10 1 1 12 CR5000 CR9000X Program Generators eee eeeees 1 10 1 2 Getting Help for RTDAQ Applications 1 11 1 3 Windows Conventions se csccccecc i E L ERE cis ER G 1 11 2 System Requirement 0 0 eee 2 1 2 1 Hardware and Software ccccccccccccceessscecessseeecssseeceesseeeceesaeeeenssseeeens 2 1 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 1 3 1 CD ROM Installation oe eeecsseeeesecneeseceseeesaseecaecaeesesnecaseseenees 3 1 3 2 RTDAQ Operations and Backup Procedures 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 3 2 1 RTDAQ Directory Structure and File Descriptions 0 3 2 3 2 1 1 Program Directory n ane nn ehen noseiu e aa 3 2 3 2 1 2 Working Directories eeeseeeseeseeeeeeseerstsrrerereresrsesrerrere 3 2 3 2 2 Backing up the Network Map and Data Files eee 3 3 3 2 2 1 Performing a Backup cece arinn 3 4 3 2 2 2 Restoring the Network from a Backup File 3 4 3 2 3 Loss of Computer POWer 0 ccc eeeecceseecssecseesecereeceaeeeseaesaeeseenees 3 4 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen cee 4 1 43 OVERVIEW coryne ee E E a A O a hoes ieee be aly 4 1 4 1 1 Program Startup and Main Screen Functionality 0 0 0 4 1 4 1 2 Datalogger Connectivity Help and Program Exit eee 4 3 4 2 EZ Setup Wizard ei n aeaa e o du tintlon anid ERS 4 3 4 22 Add Datalog tersen a a A ES aoe 4 3 4 2 2 Communication Setup
148. Editing 5 6 fir Wy yt A m ma i f B g te w Cut Removes the selected part of the program and puts it on the clipboard to be pasted elsewhere Copy Places a copy of the selected part of the program on the clipboard to be pasted elsewhere Paste Inserts a copy of the contents of the clipboard into the program at the cursor location Find Brings up a Find dialog to specify a text string to search for in the program Click the Find Next button or press F3 to go to successive occurrences of the text Replace Brings up a Find and Replace dialog that allows you to specify a text string to search for and a text string to replace it with You can replace all occurrences of the text or check them one at a time to make sure they should be replaced Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the text string specified in the Find dialog Compile Starts the compiler to check the current program for errors and consistency Compile results and errors will be displayed in the message area at the bottom of the screen Save and Compile Saves and then compiles the opened file Previous Error Moves the cursor to the part of the program where the previous error was identified Next Error Moves the cursor to the part of the program where the next error was identified Instruction Panel Controls whether the Instruction Panel is displayed Hiding the Instruction Panel allows more room
149. Graphing Options screen appears 7 21 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Save i isplay Visual Lis ve Y Axis Right Y Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits Automatic Max Value 0 26 Min Value Custom Limits C Logarithmic 0 16 7 4 9 1 Scaling the Axes When data is displayed in the Graph window a scale is also displayed showing various values for spatial levels on the screen You can use a y axis scale either on the left side of the graph on the right side or both See Select Axis in Section 7 4 9 4 1 for details on how to do this You can also show time scales for the x axis below the graph if desired Chose the Scaling tab from the Graphing Options screen to set up parameters used to space data on the X and Y axes of the graph The graph may display two y axes one on the left side and one on the right Choose the Y Axis tab to customize the axis on the left With the Scaling Option section you choose the method used for determining the maximum and minimum values on the current axis as well as whether to use linear scaling equal interval scaling or logarithmic scaling Maximum and minimum values can be chosen automatically depending on the data set currently displayed or the user can specify what the maximum and minimum values should be Choose the Automatic option to do a linear scale with the maximum and minimum values on t
150. Identifier Client s logon name New value of the setting Setting Identifier Client s logon name Client defined message Message Meaning A client has changed one of the device configuration settings A client has changed one of the server configuration settings These messages are placed in the transaction log by client applications The message should indicate which client entered the message Indicates an error in the computer system that prevents the server from listening for client connections User Response to Message definitions make sure the needed data in the data cache has been saved to a file if desired See section This is a rare error and results in a problem with the computer operating system If rebooting the computer on a socket does not clear the error contact an application engineer The name of a device in the network was changed This message indicates the start of a transaction such as terminal emulation that will tie up the datalogger preventing other operations Device renamed Logger locked The transaction blocking datalogger access has completed The server has sent a null program to get an older datalogger CR7X or 21X out of keyboard emulation mode 78 Server started The server version The server has been started Logger unlocked Null program sent 10 70 Code Message Text Server shut Collect area initialized Collect area remove
151. Instructions 0 5 17 5 4 5 Inserting Comments Into Program eeseeeeersererereererrrsreere 5 18 5 4 6 Example Program cece eceecceeceseceseceseceseceecseecseeeseseeeeeeees 5 18 54 7 Data Tables c s6n2ai icone a iy 5 19 5 4 8 The Scan Measurement Timing and Processing 5 21 54 9 Numerical Entries Linra eee aa a EE 5 22 5 4 10 Logical Expression Evaluation sseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereerereereeee 5 22 SAMO Whatis Tue lse sueo menti erik naan ni ra EA ENESE eoni 5 22 5 4 10 2 Expression Evaluation ssseeeeseseeeeereeieeresrserrerrereerses 5 23 5 4 10 3 Numeric Results of Expression Evaluation 5 23 SATI Pla gs ss a aa E A a E REEE 5 24 5 4 12 Parameter Vy pes huir heen ersero ree a NESE E EE ETE ey 5 24 5 4 12 1 Expressions in Parameters seseseeeeeereeeeereersesrereerees 5 24 5 4 12 2 Arrays of Multipliers and Offsets for Sensor Calibration sporra e e E E E E Ea 5 25 5 4 13 Program Access to Data Tables 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 25 52D Short CUT i see cesses tives tes r E aE e re T SN AT ar hein tides Ratatat ete 5 26 5 5 J OVEINIC Wiis iis leis iuened Si stei oat nhs wees oa EEEE Bist Ea 5 26 5 5 2 Creating a Program Using Short Cut cece ee eeeeseeeeeseeneeeeeee 5 27 5 5 2 1 Step 1 Create a New File or Open Existing File 5 28 5 5 2 2 Step 2 Choose Sensors to Monitor cc eeeseeseeeenees 5 31 5 5 2 3 Step 3 Setup Output
152. It will also indicate whether the attempt to load those values was successful or not by returning a boolean true false result SampleFieldCal optional This is a table output instruction It writes the latest calibration values for all calibrated measurements to a data table separate from the cal file NewFieldCal optional This is a boolean system value indicating when a calibration has succeeded During one scan cycle after a calibration has occurred this value will be true Its value is then set to false until another calibration occurs The value of this variable cannot be set within a CRBasic Program but only evaluated The main purpose for this variable is to be used together with the SampleFieldCal instruction to output one table record per calibration to a specified table To set up a measurement for calibration in CRBasic first insert the instruction s that make the measurement using variables for the multiplier and or offset Then add a FieldCal instruction after the measurement instruction and refer back to the measurement being calibrated using the variable containing the measured output Provide the FieldCal instruction with the variables holding the multiplier and the offset of the measured sensor If you need to retrieve a calibration value into multipliers and offsets upon program start or under other conditions use the LoadFieldCal instruction To store calibration values to a data table in addition t
153. LES OF SYNTAX FOR MATHEMATICAL OPERATORS 3 5 3 5 3 5 8 10 3 5 3 5 3 9 5 8 7 10 3 2 0 243 0 MATH FUNCTIONS Abs x Arctan x Cos x Exp x Frac x Int x Ln x Sin x SpaAvg x y SpaMax x y SpaMin x y SpaSd x y Sqrt x multiply element 3 by element 5 divide element 3 by element 5 same as 3 8 4 9 5 10 add element 3 to element 5 subtract element 5 from element 3 same as 3 8 9 7 5 10 multiply element 3 by a fixed number 2 raise element 2 to the third power Absolute value of x Arc tangent of x in degrees Cosine of x in degrees Natural Exponent function e Fractional portion of x Integer portion of x Natural logarithm of x Sine of x in degrees Spatial average of elements x through y Spatial maximum of elements x through y Spatial minimum of elements x through y Spatial standard deviation of elements x through y Square root of x The following array of ASCII data will be used for all Mathematical function examples 0105 0176 1200 07 89 510 3 10 12 45 270 5 Abs x returns the absolute or positive value of element x Examples Abs 4 7 89 Abs 4 5 434 74 Arctan x returns the arc tangent of element x in degrees Examples Arctan 7 89 788 Arctan 7 6 87 365 10 35 Section 10 Utilities 10 36 Cos x Exp x Frac x Int x Ln x Sin x returns the cosine of element x in degrees Examples Cos 5 572
154. NW SE SW NNE ENE ESE SSE SSW WSW WNW NNW n is an element containing wind direction For example if n 111 ESE would be returned in the output file Date format S H D Y Converts a datalogger s time stamp to a different format and encloses it in double quotes edate will produce a date without quotes Format is a string which identifies how the date should be output The format string is similar to the date format used by Windows See the online help in Split to get a complete list of the format parameters S is the element number that contains seconds H is the element number that contains hours minutes D is the element number that contains day and Y is the element number that contains the year A constant can be used in place of any of the element numbers the constant must be a valid value for the type of date field and include a decimal point e g 2000 0 for the year If only three elements are specified these will be assumed to be hour minute day and year When using the Date function for a table based datalogger e g a time stamp in the format 2002 02 03 21 16 00 if the time stamp is the first element in the array a 1 is used for all of the time stamp elements S H D Y If serial is entered for the format string a serial date will be output Other special functions are hourarray and dayofyear Both of these are used when processing data from table based dataloggers so that the timestamps
155. OTE The current project is silently saved with its current name before being opened in the CRBasic Editor Users should plan accordingly before using this feature 5 6 4 5 File Open Wire Diagram Use File Open Wire Diagram to view a wiring diagram which was created when a CR5000 or CR9000X program was generated during the project s Save process This wiring diagram will give details about how the datalogger should be appropriately wired based on the specifications given in the generator project for the generated program An Open dialog box appears which allows the user to select the desired wiring diagram file WI5 WI9 and after pressing open the user can view it in the Wiring Diagram Viewer For more information on how to use the Wiring Diagram Viewer open the online help topic from that screen NOTE Wiring diagrams are stored in Rich Text Format RTF As a result the extension of a wiring diagram file can be changed to rtf and then the file can be opened in any RTF compatible viewer such as Microsoft Word WordPad or Open Office Writer 5 6 4 6 File lt Previously opened programs gt Generator projects GES GE9 which have been previously opened using the File Open function will be listed at the bottom of the File menu to allow them to be opened again quickly in the future 8 RIDAQ Program Generator CR9000X New gt Open Program Save As 0 0048 CR9000X Edit Generator P
156. On subsequent conversions only new data will be converted However if CardConvert cannot tell what data is new i e if data on the card has wrapped ring memory since the last conversion all data will be converted This option can be used with Append to Last File to create a continuous file with no repetition of data 10 1 2 3 File Naming Time Date Filenames When this option is selected the date and time of the last record of data in the file will be appended to the end of the base file name The suffix includes a four digit year a two digit month a two digit day of month and a four digit hour minute When this option is selected Use Day of Year becomes available If this option is selected the Julian day day of year will be used for the suffix instead of the year month day hour minute suffix Create New Filenames When the Create New Filenames option is selected CardConvert will add a _01 to the filename if a file of the same name is found e g TOA5_Mydata_01 dat If a _01 dat file is found the file will be named with a _02 suffix If the Create New Filenames check box is cleared and a file with the same name is found you will be offered the option to Overwrite the existing file or Cancel the conversion The Create New Filenames option is disabled when the Use Filemarks Use Removemarks or Use Time option is enabled Append to Last File When this option is selected converted data will be appended to the end of the
157. Options for the FFT Screen later in this chapter You may choose the Print Preview item to view the current snapshot in a window showing how it will be printed along with the options for selecting the printer the orientation the margins and so forth You may also print the snapshot if desired NOTE Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Print Preview DAR Printer ssg Orientation O Portrait Landscape Margins EE x u a E Reset Margins View Margins Detail More Normal v Proportional Cl Smooth If the FFT Histogram screen is in the started state when you choose Print Preview the current snapshot will be displayed for printing and the display will continue to display newer data in the background You may choose the Print item to immediately send the current snapshot to the selected printer without pre viewing it Selecting the Clear or Start Stop items performs the same function as pressing the corresponding button see button descriptions given above Choose the Hide Controls Show Controls to hide or show the items for controlling the FFT Histogram display that are shown on the left side of the graph Hiding these items allows more room for the graphical display for enhanced viewing once all of the settings have been set to the desired configuration 7 59 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 9 8 Setting the Options for the FFT Histogram Screen Set the options for the cur
158. RTDAQ INSTRUCTION MANUAL Campbell Scientific Inc Software End User License Agreement EULA NOTICE OF AGREEMENT This software is copyrighted software Please carefully read this EULA By installing or using this software you are agreeing to comply with the following terms and conditions If you do not want to be bound by this EULA you must promptly return the software any copies and accompanying documentation in its original packaging to Campbell Scientific or its representative This software can be installed as a trial version or as a fully licensed copy All terms and conditions contained herein apply to both versions of software unless explicitly stated TRIAL VERSION Campbell Scientific distributes a trial version of this software free of charge to enable users to work with Campbell Scientific data acquisition equipment You may use the trial version of this software for 30 days on a single computer After that period has ended to continue using this product you must purchase a fully licensed version This trial may be freely copied However you are prohibited from charging in any way for any such copies and from distributing the software and or the documentation with any other products commercial or otherwise without prior written permission from Campbell Scientific LICENSE FOR USE Campbell Scientific grants you a non exclusive license to use this software in accordance with the following 1 The purchase of this
159. S x ACOS x x AND y ASIN x ATN x ATN2 y x COS x COSH x CSGN x x EQV y EXP x FIX x FRAC x IIF x y z x IMP y 8 10 Description Returns the absolute value of a number Returns the arc cosine of a number Performs a logical conjunction on two numbers Returns the arc sine of a number Returns the arc tangent of a number Returns the arctangent of y x Returns the cosine of a number Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number Changes the sign of a number by multiplying by 1 0 Performs a logical equivalence on two numbers Returns e raised to the x power Returns the integer portion of a number If the number is a negative the first negative integer greater than or equal to the number is returned Returns the fraction part of a number Evaluates an expression x and returns one value if true y a different value if false z Performs a logical implication on two numbers Function INT x LOG x LOG10 x x MOD y NOT WORY PWR x y RND SGN x SIN x SINH x SQR x TAN x TANH x x XOR y 8 1 5 4 Order of Precedence Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software Description Returns the integer portion of a number If the number is a negative the first negative integer less than or equal to the number is returned Returns the natural log of a number Returns the logarithm base 10 of a number Performs a modulo divide of two numbers Performs a logical negatio
160. SA OM 4R8 AISA Bag cRS000 Series Datalogger To create a different opening program template type in new instructions and select Template Save as Default Template dete program author ee a ee ae 4 5 7 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 8 When using the Compile Save and Send operation you will see the Download dialog box Download TestFor CR1 Select the destination Select the Run Options Run Now CR1000_1 CR1i000_2 mt cR1000_3 Do not erase the card data files Erase all card data files C Run On Power up C Compress File The Select the destination list shows all dataloggers configured within RTDAQ that may receive a program matching the extension of the current CRBasic program to be sent Assume for example that you have three CR1000s and some other dataloggers in your RTDAQ network map When you send a CR1000 program this screen will show only the three CR1000 dataloggers Any CR3000 CR9000X or CR5000 dataloggers will be excluded from the list even when they are defined in the network map because those dataloggers are not associated with CR1000 programs A program with the extension of DLD will be associated with all RTDAQ datalogger types If there are no dataloggers on the network map which match the extension of the program being sent then all dataloggers on the network map will be shown This will make the user aware of the mismatched program extension so
161. Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 100 Select 1 2 3 4 Second Input File Data_1 DAT 2 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 101 Select 1 2 3 Third Input File Data_1 DAT 3 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 102 Select 1 2 3 4 5 Fourth end of test Input File Data_1 DAT 4 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 200 Select leave blank NOTE The number after the data file name is inserted automatically by Split 10 30 Section 10 Utilities TABLE 10 3 3 Processed Data File Using Option C 100 12 1 10 32 6 101 92 7 67 7 102 56 1 48 7 98 220 1 100 12 5 9 89 30 1 102 56 2 50 100 5 210 6 100 13 1 10 1 33 1 101 94 1 69 When Split is run the resulting data file will look similar to Table 10 3 3 Each line of data represents one test Notice that blanks were inserted if the data set conditional array did not exist 10 3 3 3 2 Trigger on Stop Condition F Option Output of Time Series The Trigger on Stop Condition or F option changes the function of the Stop Condition when one or more Time Series functions Section 10 3 3 10 3 2 are contained in the Select field When a Stop Condition is met the time series data is calculated and written to the output file However instead of stopping at this point processing resumes and time series data is output the next time the Stop Condition is met This continues until the end of file or until the user stops Spl
162. Switches for Processing Alternate Files NOTE The one caveat of using the command line to specify an alternate input and or output file name is that Split s default options will be used with the alternate file For instance by default output files are written with field formatted columns If the original PAR file specified a comma separated output that option would be ignored and the and defaults would be used Command line switches can be used to control these options for the output and input files The switch is added immediately after the input or output file name In most instances full path names to the Splitr executable and the input and output file names must be used In addition if long file names are used in the path you may need to surround the path and file name by double quotes Output File Options These switches are entered after the output file name e g Splitr Test par r Input dat Output prn P P Sends the output to a printer This is the same as checking the Printer box for the Report type on the Output File tab R Creates a formatted RPT file This is the same as checking the File box for the Report type on the Output File tab W Creates a simple HTML file This is the same as checking the HTML box for the Report type on the Output File tab A Appends the output to the end of an existing file This is the same as selecting Append for the If File Exists option on the Output File tab L Creates a new o
163. TDAQ fills in as many communications settings as possible and in many cases you can use the default settings It provides fields for user entered communications settings such as phone numbers and RF radio addresses Help for entering these settings is provided on the right side of each screen by clicking the F key or by pressing the Help button for each wizard screen You may also want to consult the manual corresponding to the particular communications hardware you are configuring 4 2 3 Datalogger Settings The Datalogger Settings step is provided for fine tuning the connection to the datalogger The baud rate offered is typically the maximum baud rate supported by that datalogger and communications medium lower rates may be required for cell phones or noisy telephone links Enter a Security Code only if the datalogger is configured via the keyboard display or settings in the datalogger program to use it 4 4 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 2 3 1 Max Time Online Note that the default Max Time On Line setting for most communications links is zero 0 d 00 h 00 m which means that RTDAQ will never hang up until you click Disconnect For telephone links the default Max Time On Line setting is 10 minutes in order to reduce the possibility of inadvertent and expensive long distance or cellular telephone charges There are however other links that can result in expensive connection charges such as digital cellular links u
164. Tables eee eeeeeeeees 5 36 5 5 2 4 Step 4 Generate the Program in the Format Required bythe Datalog feriereiser a s 5 39 5 35 3 Short CutSet ngs eiin iiare a n eee 5 40 5 5 3 1 S an Interval cieee ar aaee n e 5 40 5 5 3 2 Program SECULIEY 5 43 ied cscite te gel rie AA Hees 5 40 3 53 33 Datalog ser ID ices tiie tonsa chine tention eee 5 41 5 5 3 4 Power up Settings eeceescessecseeeecsereeceeeeeesaeceeeseenees 5 41 5 5 3 5 Select CR200 Compiler cies ceeecesesecesecreeeecseeeeeneeees 5 41 5 5 3 6 CR9000X Configuration eee eeeeecseeeecseeeeeeeceeeseenees 5 42 5 5 3 7 Sensor SUPPOFt os seecsssssenssscdsseessessseesgessacveussesedapsonteaassyeess 5 42 5 5 3 8 AC Noise Rejection tsere eged aeie e 5 42 5257319 FONE r ae tise Bisnis Pe E EE tetas rece 5 42 5 5 3 10 Set Working Directory 0 0 0 cee ceesecseeeceseeeeeseeeeeeenees 5 42 5 5 3 11 Enable Creation of Custom Sensor Files 0 5 42 5 5 4 Editing Programs Created by Short Cut 5 43 5 5 5 New Sensor Filesi nerts irea e e eE tances tte 5 43 5 5 6 Custom Sensor Files mesaer iniae es erani i itkaa 5 43 5 6 Program Creation with the RTDAQ Program Generator 00 5 44 5 6 1 Basic Operations aise athe iden svete nile eae 5 44 5 6 2 Program Startup as iscisiisctusssesssededas tosses ssoveedsespbestecsovenssbavessseess 5 44 5 6 3 Using the CR5000 or CR9000X Program Generator 5 45 5 6 4 Supporting Functionality ce eesesseesec
165. The FFT Histogram screen can be moved by dragging the title bar You can resize an FFT Histogram screen as desired by dragging the window corners You can also maximize restore and minimize the screen using the standard buttons in the upper right corner of the window or by clicking on the window s icon in the upper left corner When minimized the FFT Histogram screen shows as an icon on the task bar Use the close button red X to finish using an FFT Histogram screen There is also a help button the question mark button that brings up online help about the FFT Histogram window 7 9 2 Displaying FFT Spectra or Histograms m FETs Histogram 1 Select Table v Select Data FFTView_FTs v Graph T ype l Histogram v C 3D View rf NG NC 4 To display an FFT spectrum or histogram you must make these selections a table a row item and a display type First use the Select Table drop down box to choose a table containing an FFT or Histogram output structure Only tables with FFT or Histogram outputs will be listed Second use the Select Data drop down box to choose the output item from that table some CRBasic Programs are written with more than one FFT or Histogram output instruction in the same table in which case multiple items will show on this list Third select the type of display method to use with the Graph Type drop down box Area Histogram Bar Line Fast Line Volume With these three items properly
166. This line would output values for elements through 4 each time an array was output Additionally an average value for element 4 would be calculated for the entire file and output as the last line of data in the output file 1 2 3 4 Avg 4 24 This line would output values for elements through 4 each time an array was output and an average value for element 4 would be calculated every 24 array and output as an additional column in the file An additional summary 10 37 Section 10 Utilities 10 38 NOTE would occur for an Interval Count if the count was not evenly divisible into the number of output arrays present in the Input File The summary in this case is calculated from an incomplete interval count The date function can be used for the interval in a time series function to produce monthly output Refer to the Monthly summary example in Section 10 3 3 6 6 When Date and Edate are used within other functions they must be used with the older format Date doy y and Edate doy y instead of using the extended date functions For example AVG 1 Date 2 2002 0 The decimal is needed to indicate a fixed number Numbers without the decimal are interpreted as element IDs The interval count in a Time Series Function is optional and does not require a decimal point To determine the interval Split counts the number of arrays which meet the specified conditions Stop Start and Copy If the time synchronize function is enabled
167. To move the highlight to the previous error in the program press the Previous Error button or choose Previous Error from the Compile menu It is important that the compilers used for checking programs match the OS version loaded in the datalogger otherwise errors may be returned when the program is sent The error window can be closed by selecting the Close Message Window menu item from the View menu or by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the message window For CR5000 CR1000 CR3000 CR800 and CR9000X dataloggers this function only verifies the integrity of the program Actual compilation of the program takes place in the datalogger 5 3 2 Compile Save and Send The CRBasic Editor allows you to send a program to a datalogger that has already been defined on the RTDAQ network map This only works if RTDAQ is running at the time you attempt to send the program This function first checks the program for errors using the pre compiler then saves the program using the current name or by prompting the user for a name if the program is new After the compile and save this function sends the program to a user specified datalogger To do this use the Compile Save and Send item on the File menu or Compile menu or you can press the corresponding button on the toolbar CRBasic Editor C Tests CR5000 Histogram CR5 for the CR5000 File Edit View Search Compile Template Instruction Goto Window Tool AHH
168. Use this option when you do not need to see points that extend above the maximum value or below the minimum value There will be no re scaling as the points are drawn which sometimes makes the graphical display easier to view Check the Logarithmic box to use a base 10 logarithmic scale for displaying items on the axis If the box is unchecked linear scaling between the maximum and minimum will be used 7 43 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time NOTE When using logarithmic scaling with custom limits the maximum and minimum values should be positive numbers and the maximum value should be greater than the minimum value 7 6 6 2 Data Display Tab Use the Data Display tab to control the plotting and precision schemes of the graphical display area Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Data Flow Time Display Plotting Options Numeric Data Display C Show Milliseconds Line Only Points and Line Points Only Data Precision Use the Plotting Options to select how the points should be graphed on the screen To see only points choose Points Only To draw lines between time adjacent points use Line Only and to draw both points and lines choose Points and Line Use the Numeric Data Display to control whether or not to show milliseconds in the numeric display of time measurements that are used as Y Axis Values such as the timestamp and to control the number of digits shown
169. Variable or Expression Variable Array or Expression Table 5 5 4 lists the maximum length and allowed characters for the names for Variables Arrays Constants etc TABLE 5 4 4 Rules for Names Maximum Length Name for number of characters Allowed characters Variable or Array 39 Letters A Z upper or lower case underscore Constant 39 Ge a _ and numbers Alias 39 0 12 The name must start with a letter Data Table Name depends on logger CRBasic is not case CR1000 CR3000 CR800 sensitive 20 CR5000 CR900X 8 5 4 12 1 Expressions in Parameters Many parameters allow the entry of expressions If an expression is a comparison it will return 1 if the comparison is true and 0 if it is false An example of the use of this is in the DataTable instruction where the trigger condition can be entered as an expression Suppose the variable TC 1 is a thermocouple temperature Section 5 Program Creation and Editing DataTable Name Trig Var Size DataTable Temp TC 1 gt 100 5000 Entering the trigger as the expression TC 1 gt 100 will cause the trigger to be true and data to be stored whenever the temperature TC 1 is greater than 100 5 4 12 2 Arrays of Multipliers and Offsets for Sensor Calibration If variable arrays are used for the multiplier and offset parameters in measurements that use repetitions the instruction will automatically step through the multiplier and offset arrays as it steps through the chann
170. WW w j ppn Wh mup ty lk atdi iii MIANN i Ah YY NMA A INH ah TO T AER AR A MRSA LIRA Mu dadka d KAA AAIEN EA ii AAA N Lati Aa k gt Use the Zoom scroll bar to adjust the zoom level of the entire display when the window is in the 3D View mode This will help move the FFT or histogram display and grid farther away or closer within the apparent view area enabling labels to show more clearly or to be fully visible The X Rotation and Y Rotation scroll bars are also enabled while in the 3D View mode By using these scroll bars you may adjust the horizontal or vertical display angle for the 3D display Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 9 5 X Axis Mode FF T Histogram 1 Select T able FFTOut v Select Data g FFTViewFTs X Graph Type ER H istogram v 3D View Number of Plots u A Color Each Plot Zoom lt a Asis Mode Show Values View Bins O View Ranges The X Axis Mode box allows you to set up how the frequency domain of the spectrum or the value ranges of the histogram bins will be represented on the display Choose the Show Values option to show a frequency scale in units of Hertz i e Hz or cycles per second for FFT spectra and in a measurement s units for a histogram Some of the locations along the x axis will then have their values displayed as space permits Choose the View Bins option to have the individual bins labeled with their unique o
171. able will monitor the specified time domain value until the proper number of points has been measured for creating a spectrum At that point the spectrum is calculated and stored within a single record of the table This spectrum contains one value or value pair for each frequency bin The FFTSample instruction works in a similar manner except that it outputs only the results of an FFTFilt CRBasic measurement instruction which can only be executed on a CR9000X datalogger equipped with at least one CR9052DC or CR9052IEPE module 7 8 3 Opening FFT Viewer Windows To view real time FFT spectra from a datalogger in RTDAQ first ensure that a proper FFT program is running in the datalogger you wish to monitor including the proper output instruction s in one of the tables of the CRBasic program Connect to the datalogger in RTDAQ by clicking on the datalogger s icon and pressing Connect Now choose the Monitor Data tab to make the real time displays available and choose the FFT Histo button RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Kem BSE OD FRA a G Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data x T z a z gra m Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histo Rainflow CR1000 v Field Monitor _CR8O0Seres 7 51 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Now you will see the FFT Histogram display window M FFT Histogram 1 Select
172. ad Transaction 13 Memory Image Up load Transaction 14 Get Table Definitions Transaction 15 RF Test Transaction 16 Communication Status Notification Message Meaning The server was not able to write data records to the data storage area The specified collect area was skipped because the associated table has not been initialized by the server yet The specified collect area was skipped because the server could not initialize the associated table The specified BMP1 packet was sent to the serial communication interface The number specifies the type of message that was sent Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message This indicates a problem writing to files on the computer hard disk Verify write permissions are set and that there is sufficient space left on the disk During system startup this is a normal message If it occurs at other times contact an application engineer See message 100 10 73 Section 10 Utilities Code Message Text 105 BMP packet received Data file output failed Max time on line exceeded Table reset 10 74 Message Parameters The packet message type code 0 Packet Delivery Fault Notification 1 Status Warning Fault Notification 2 Network Description Transaction 3 Clock Check Set Transaction 4 Program Down load Transaction 5 Program Up load Transaction 7 Data Advise Command Transaction 8 Data Advise Notification Packet 9 Ho
173. ail about these settings are given below in the section entitled Setting the Options for the FFT Histogram Screen 7 9 4 3D View Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time FF T Histogram 1 Select T able FFT Out v Select Data Fe FFTView_FTs Graph Type ER Histogram Number of Plots 14 a Color Each Plot Zoom g iw gt lt Asis Mode Show Values View Bins O View Ranges Select the 3D View check box if you would like to show a time history of FFT spectra or histograms on the screen The Number of Plots value can be set to choose how many records will be shown on the screen at the same time The newest record is shown at the front of the display with the oldest record at the back As the screen updates you see a new record appear at the front then move its way to the back as newer records arrive until it finally becomes older than the last record shown and disappears Select the Color Each Plot check box to have each spectrum drawn with a unique color 7 55 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 56 M FFT Histogram 1 Select Table FFTOut v Select Data FFTView_FTs v Graph Type Area v 3D View Number of Plots 14 Bil Zoom lt gt X Aris Mode Show Values View Bins View Ranges Clear ay DER baei ihan AA A halaa AAA in TEN ERNIE EETAS P PRAE INTE CR MURS maa nn m rR PATE AAEE RE E A ATTENT d tt
174. alue box Press Set First Value Wait for the calibration process to measure the first value The word Calibrating will be visible in the Current Value box until that process is complete Now place the sensor into the second known condition and then enter the corresponding known value into the Second calibrated value box Press Set Second Value The calibration process measures the second point value At that point the datalogger calculates the new multiplier and offset and applies them within the running program These values are also written to the calibration file Field Calibration Set the sensor to two known values for MeasMOA 1 Current Yalue 31 09696 Second Calibrated Value d 7 Set Second Value 9 11 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing After the multiplier and offset have been calculated and set the ending screen of the Wizard appears You can conclude the calibration or return to the starting point to perform more calibrations of the same or different sensors Field Calibration You haye now finished the calibration of your sensor s Click on Finish to close the wizard To perform another calibration without closing click New Cal 9 6 3 Using the Wizard to Perform Zeroing Calibrations In the Wizard select Zero for the type of calibration Field Calibration Select the type of calibration to perform eo Offset Multiplier amp Offset Multiplier Only 9 12 Section
175. alue may not be zero or less than zero 7 10 9 2 Visual Display Options Select the Visual Display tab to modify chart colors and configure the titles on the rainflow histogram display Graphing Options Scaling Visual Display Trace Save Chart Colors Titles Back wall Color ka CI Show Graph Title Left Grid Color LJ C Show Left Axis Title Right Grid Colo Color Each Bin The Chart Colors section allows you to set the color for the back wall of the Rainflow display set the color of the left grid scale or put the display into the Color Each Bin mode When the Color Each Bin check box is selected each bin is given a different color on the display so that bins can be distinguished from each other Use the Titles section to set up titles to show alongside the values shown on your Rainflow display You may elect to show a title for the entire rainflow histogram specifying the text to display and the font used to display it You can also set up a title to be displayed by the y axis For more information about using the Visual Display options refer to the online help that can be accessed by opening the options screen and pressing the Help button 7 75 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 76 7 10 9 3 Trace Options Graphing Options Scaling Visual Display Trace Save Select Axis Line Width E Line Style pae Symbol Style Solid Line The Trace tab on the Graphing Options w
176. am display when Color Each Bin is not selected Use the Line Width setting to select the width of the line used to connect bin values together if you are connecting points with lines Use the Line Style drop down to choose what kind of line will be drawn dotted dashed solid etc You can also use the Symbol Style drop down to choose a symbol to be used for displaying the points on the spectrum You can select the Marks tab if you want to show markers on the FFT Histogram display and to control how they are shown Marks can contain information about a specific bin such as its value on the current y axis or the bin number that applies to the point Select the Show Marks check box to use marks on the display Select the Round Frame check box if the corners of the mark should be round instead of pointed square Choose the Transparent check box if you wish the background of each mark to be transparent the same color as the display background Set the Draw Every spin box with a value greater than 1 if you wish for only some of the points to display an associated mark A setting of 1 will display a mark on every point You can also choose the color and fill style of the box in which the markings text is shown with the Color and Style selections Use the Style drop down box to determine what information from each axis will be displayed 7 63 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Di
177. ame of the instruction The two parameters associated with PanelTemp are Destination the name of the variable in which to put the temperature and Integration the length of time to integrate the measurement To place the panel temperature in the variable RefTemp using a 250 microsecond measurement integration time the code is PanelTemp RefTemp 250 5 17 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 4 5 Inserting Comments Into Program It is often useful to provide comments in your datalogger program so that when you review the program at a later date you will know what each section of code does Comments can be inserted into the program by preceding the text with a single quote When the program is compiled the datalogger compiler will ignore any text that is preceded by a single quote A comment can be placed at the beginning of a line or it can be placed after program code If Syntax Highlighting is enabled Options Editor Preferences Syntax Highlighting commented text will appear formatted differently than other lines of code CR5000 The following program is used to measure 4 thermocouples VARIABLE DECLARATION Dim TCTemp 4 Dimension TC measurement variable Alias TCTemp 1 EngineCoolantT Rename variables Alias TCTemp 2 BrakeFluidT Alias TCTemp 3 ManifoldT Alias TCTemp 4 CabinT In the sample code above the datalogger compiler will ignore the commented text 5 4 6 Example Program The followi
178. and calibrate more sensors Field Calibration Set the sensor to a known value for MeasO Current Value fi 4 87242 Enter Calibrated Value 24 lt Previous 9 7 Strain and Shunt Calibration In addition to the FieldCal instruction that performs calibrations on measurements there is a specialized instruction for performing calibrations on strain bridge measurements strain or shunt calibration This instruction is called FieldCalStrain It functions in a similar manner to the FieldCal instruction but has additional arguments to meet the specialized needs for shunt and strain gauge calibrations It uses the same calibration file cal as well as the other utility calibration instructions SampleFieldCal NewFieldCal LoadFieldCal For more information about how to use these instructions refer to the FieldCalStrain instruction section of your datalogger manual or refer to the online help topic for FieldCalStrain within the CRBasic Editor The Program Generator can generate programs using this functionality for the Bridge Strain 1 2 Bridge Strain and Full Bridge Strain measurements The Calibration Wizard also assists users through the process of calibrating sensors in a program using the FieldCalStrain instruction For more information refer to the online Help topic provided within the Wizard 9 15 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 9 16 Section 10 Utilities CardConvert is a utility that is used to quickly read
179. and convert binary datalogger data that is retrieved from a compact flash or a PCMCIA card The binary data can also be a file already saved to the user s PC The binary data is converted to another format such as TOAS and saved on the user s PC The Device Configuration Utility or DevConfig is a utility for setting up datalogger and communication peripherals for use in a datalogger network CardConvert and DevConfig can be accessed by opening the Windows Start menu and selecting Programs RTDAQ Utilities desired utility CardConvert is also on the RTDAQ Toolbar Split is a tool that works with output data files dat collected from Campbell Scientific dataloggers It is used to post process data from either mixed array or table based dataloggers It is accessed from the RTDAQ Toolbar LogTool is used to monitor the logs created by the RTDAQ communications server This utility is accessible from the Tools LogTool menu item in RTDAQ or the actual log files can be opened directly in a simple text editor 10 1 CardConvert CardConvert is a utility that is used to quickly read and convert binary datalogger data that is retrieved or copied from a compact flash or a PCMCIA card The converted data is saved on the user s PC 10 1 1 Input Output File Settings The file settings are used to specify the directory where the binary data is stored and the directory in which the converted file s should be saved Press the Select Card
180. and master configuration files for every datalogger that has been defined within RTDAQ The following individual screens can save their own custom options into a configuration file Field Monitor The main data viewer on the Monitor Data tab screen Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histogram Rainflow Saving and loading a master configuration file for a particular datalogger is done from the File menu of RTDAQ after establishing a connection to the appropriate datalogger 7 11 1 Saving and Loading Configuration Files for Real Time Data Screens Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Save Save Graph Configuration Load Graph Configuration 7 79 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 80 Except for two real time data monitor screens the configuration file management is located on the Save tab of the Options screen For example after opening a Graph screen press the Options button Now select the Save tab and you will see two buttons one called Save Graph Configuration and one called Load Graph Configuration The basic process for using the saved configurations in a particular screen is as follows 1 Open up the screen you wish to configure 2 Press the Options button 3 Configure the settings of that screen in all the other tab options located in the Options screen 4 Press Apply to preview those changes if necessary 5 When all of the options are set the way you w
181. and returns 1 if the expression is true and 0 if the expression is false W X gt Y will set W equal to 1 if X gt Y or will set W equal to 0 if X lt Y The datalogger uses 1 rather than some other non zero number because the and and or operators are the same for logical statements and binary bitwise comparisons The number 1 is expressed in binary with all bits equal to 1 the number 0 has all bits equal to 0 When 1 is anded with any other number the result is the other number ensuring that if the other number is non zero true the result will be non zero 5 23 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 24 5 4 11 Flags Any variable can be used as a flag as far as logical tests in CRBasic are concerned If the value of the variable is non zero the flag is high If the value of the variable is 0 the flag is low RTDAQ looks for the variable array with the name Flag when the option to display flag status is selected from the Monitor tab If a Flag array is found as many elements of that array which can fit will be displayed in the Port and Flags dialog box 5 4 12 Parameter Types Instruction parameters allow different types of inputs These types are listed below and specifically identified in the description of the parameter in the following sections or in CRBasic help Constant Variable Variable or Array Constant Variable or Expression Constant Variable Array or Expression Name Name or list of Names
182. and table based data files is the time format these functions can be used to convert between file types If you are processing the data file in multiple passes including formatting of the date and time fields you should put the date processing in the final pass Split cannot read all of the timestamp formats that it can produce For example the quoted timestamp in table based data files has a specific structure Any changes to the structure will make the timestamp unreadable for Split Crif Section 10 Utilities returns a carriage return and line feed where the Crlf is placed in the parameter file Examples Smpl Max Temp 24 Max 3 24 Smpl Crlf 24 Smpl Max RH 24 Max 4 24 Max Temp 67 33 Max RH 38 8 The Crlf is placed after the maximum temperature 67 33 so that the maximum RH is on the next line NOTE A carriage return line feed is recognized by Split as an element and may throw the column headers off in the output file Label returns a comment in the output file This is a useful formatting function when labels are desired on the same line as the data The label includes anything within the quote marks the quote marks are not output but must be in the parameter file The label cannot exceed the width of the output column default is eight characters A maximum of thirty 30 labels are allowed per Select line Make sure that the column widths are big enough for the label to fit Otherwise the output will indica
183. are specified they must exist in the newly appended data or Split will never begin execution Because Last Count keeps track of the number of bytes in the file if you delete data from the beginning of a file Last Count will not work properly 10 21 Section 10 Utilities 10 22 By selecting the Specific option and entering a number Split will seek that position in the file This option saves time by starting part way through a large data file The number specifies the number of bytes into the file to seek before processing data A positive or negative number can be entered If the number is positive Split will start reading from the beginning of a file if the number is negative Split will start reading from the end of a file All characters including spaces carriage returns and line feeds are counted A stop offset can also be specified In Figure 10 3 10 Split will skip the first 256 bytes of data before it begins processing the data in Input File In Figure 10 3 11 Split will skip the first 256 bytes of data before beginning and stop execution on byte 1024 FIGURE 10 3 11 Example of a Stop Offset Section 10 Utilities 10 3 3 1 2 Input File Exceptions In most instances Split automatically recognizes the type of data file it is reading by using Auto Select in the File Info field However there are two exceptions e Reading Raw A D Data from Burst Measurements To read this type of data and conv
184. array ID 200 the Stop Condition field would read C 1 200 This should be typed into the Stop Condition fields of each array including the end of test array Set up the Output File as you would for any Split process If you are including column headings the arrays and elements will appear in the order they are listed on the Input File tabs That is the first column will be Input File number 1 element number 1 the next column is Input File number 1 element number 2 Input File number 2 element number 1 follows in the column immediately after the last element of Input File number 1 10 29 Section 10 Utilities Consider Table 10 3 2 below TABLE 10 3 2 Example of Event Driven Test Data Set Data from arrays 100 12 1 10 32 6 ee sisi A 101 92 7 67 7 PREN 102 56 1 48 7 98 220 1 200 100 12 5 9 89 30 1 _ Second test 102 56 2 50 100 5 210 6 200 100 13 1 10 1 33 1 TOLOG p Third test 200 This table contains four different output arrays 100 101 102 and 200 During the first test data was output from all three conditional arrays 100 101 and 102 with 200 signaling the end of the test During the second test data was output from arrays 100 and 102 During the third test data was output from arrays 100 and 101 To process these files using the C option the parameter file would be set up as follows assuming the name of our data file is Data_1 DAT First Input File Data_1 DAT 1
185. as 3 1500 where 3 means the third element within the array and 1500 is the value of that third element The element must match this start value exactly to trigger the start condition However when starting based on time you can enable the Start Stop On After Time function to trigger the start of processing when the exact time is found or at the first instance of data after that time has occurred This option is found on the Output tab Other button 10 23 Section 10 Utilities 10 24 NOTE Table data files contain the time and date as a single quoted string at the beginning of each data record Split handles the dates as long as you include a colon separator as a placeholder for each of the fields in the timestamp 1 Year 1 Day of Year 1 Time of Day 1 Seconds See the examples below 1 60 Day of Year 60 1 2002 1 60 1 1250 Year 2002 Day of Year 60 Time of Day 12 50 1 1445 1 30 Time of Day 14 45 Seconds 30 Logical and and or statements can be used when specifying the Start Condition A logical and statement means that all conditions must be true for the statement to be true Up to three conditions can be connected with and statements If too many and statements are used an error message will be displayed when you run Split The logical or statement means that if any of the conditions are true then the statement is true Split allows up to six conditions to be connected wit
186. as Excel TABLE 10 3 9 Definition of Blank or Bad Data for each Data File Format File Format Definition of Blank or Bad Data Printable ASCII 229 Comma Separated ASCII blank or any character except numeral or space Field Formatted blank or double quotation marks Only display lines with bad data Outputs only those arrays containing one or more Out of Range elements If a report is generated an asterisk precedes the Out of Range value in the RPT file 10 53 Section 10 Utilities 10 54 CAUTION NOTE Trigger on Stop condition Changes the meaning of Stop Condition to trigger Time Series processing output The Stop Condition is included in the Time Series processing if it satisfies the Copy line If the Trigger on Stop Condition is selected a Time Series output will occur each time the Stop Condition is met See Select line elements Section 10 3 3 3 2 Start Stop On After Time In most instances Split will not start or stop processing a file unless the exact start condition is found However when starting or stopping based on time you can enable Split s Start Stop On After Time option This will trigger the start or end of processing when the exact time is found or at the first instance of data after that time has occurred which meets other defined criteria in the PAR file Match files This option compares two files of the same data If good data exists in one and not the other question marks then
187. at the message means Where appropriate a suggested response to the message is provided Code Message Text Message Parameters Device Name Device Name Device Name Network device added Network branch deleted Network branch moved Network logon succeeded Network logon failed Modem custom database read failed Clock check started Clock checked Datalogger time Clock check Reason code failed 3 Communication failure 4 Invalid datalogger security clearance 5 Invalid transaction number specified already in use 6 Communications are Message Meaning A new device was added to the network map A branch of the network map was deleted this may consist of a single device A branch of the network map was moved from one parent device to another A client application successfully attached to the server A client application failed to attach to the server When the server started up it could not read the user customized modem settings file wmodem cust A clock check has been initiated This clock check is not sent out to the station until the transaction is sent Clock set Device time before set The device clock has Server time been set The datalogger clock has been checked The clock check set failed for the reason specified in the reason code Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message If unsuccessful logon messages occur frequently use a network monitor t
188. atalogger If something goes wrong when sending the program a message will appear indicating the error conditions This may be a hardware level compile error or another failure as reported to the software by Ia 66 the datalogger s program load and run process Press Cancel if you do not wish to send the program to the datalogger Section 6 View Pro 6 1 Overview 6 2 The Toolbar The View Pro button B on the RTDAQ main screen brings up View Pro This program can be used to open data files DAT or other CSI file types DLD CSI FSL LOG CR1 CR3 etc View Pro can easily handle files up to 2 Gigabytes in size Once a data file is opened data can be printed or graphed in several different graph types including Line Graphs Histograms XY Plots FFTs Fast Fourier Transforms or Rainflow Histograms as appropriate for the data type Note that these graphical windows are only available for DAT files Other file types are viewable only as text Since View Pro is primarily a file viewing utility a file cannot be edited or saved using this program View Pro can also be run as a stand alone program by using the Windows Start Menu and selecting Programs RTDAQ Utilities View Pro or by using Windows Explorer and double clicking on the ViewPro exe file in the C Program Files CampbellSci View Pro folder A desktop shortcut can be created by right clicking on this file in Windows Explorer and choosing Creat
189. ation or if it is unable to provide corrected software or corrected documentation within a reasonable time it will either replace the software with a functionally similar program or refund the purchase price paid for the software All warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed and excluded Campbell Scientific shall not in any case be liable for special incidental consequential indirect or other similar damages even if Campbell Scientific has been advised of the possibility of such damages Campbell Scientific is not responsible for any costs incurred as a result of lost profits or revenue loss of use of the software loss of data cost of re creating lost data the cost of any substitute program telecommunication access costs claims by any party other than licensee or for other similar costs This warranty does not cover any software that has been altered or changed in any way by anyone other than Campbell Scientific Campbell Scientific is not responsible for problems caused by computer hardware computer operating systems or the use of Campbell Scientific s software with non Campbell Scientific software Licensee s sole and exclusive remedy is set forth in this limited warranty Campbell Scientific s aggregate liability arising from or relating to this agreement or the software or documentation regardless of the form of action e g contract tort computer malpractice fraud and or otherwi
190. ays be specified Records back is the number of records back in the data table from the current time 1 is the most recent record stored 2 is the record stored prior to the most recent For example the expression Tdiff Temp TC_Avg 1 1 Temp TC_Avg 1 101 could be used in the example program to calculate the change in the 10 ms average temperature of the first thermocouple between the most recent average and the one that occurred a second 100 x 10 ms earlier In addition to accessing the data actually output in a table there are some pseudo fields related to the data table that can be retrieved 5 25 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 Short Cut 5 26 NOTE NOTE 5 5 1 Overview Tablename record 1 n the record number of the record output n records ago Tablename output 1 1 1 if data were output to the table the last time the table was called 0 if data were not output Tablename timestamp m n element m of the timestamp output n records ago where timestamp 1 n microseconds since 1990 timestamp 2 n microseconds into the current year timestamp 3 n microseconds into the current month timestamp 4 n microseconds into the current day timestamp 5 n microseconds into the current hour timestamp 6 n microseconds into the current minute timestamp 7 n microseconds into the current second Tablename eventend 1 1 is only valid for a data table using the DataEvent instruction Tablename event
191. b 25 02 If a time element is missing from an array based data file use a valid constant instead If processing a table based data file use a 1 for all time elements assuming the time stamp is the first element in the data file For the examples above date mm dd yy h nn 1 1 1 1 02 25 02 4 10 edate mm dd yy hh nn 1 1 1 1 02 25 02 04 10 edate yyyy dayofyear hhnn 1 1 1 1 2002 56 0410 Notice that this last example essentially creates an array type of timestamp When processing a data file from an array based datalogger if the time stamp uses midnight as 2400 with today s date the date function will convert that time stamp to 0000 hours with tomorrow s date The No Date Advance function can be used to stop the date from rolling forward Other button No Date Advance check box edate format S H D Y edate functions identically to date above except that the time stamp is not surrounded by quotes Monthly Summary Example The Date function can be used to produce a monthly summary of daily time series data by using Date for the interval in the time series function This will trigger time series output for the first day of each month The syntax is avg 7 date 3 2 where you want to take a monthly average of element 7 and the day of year is contained in element 3 and the year in element 2 If you have data recorded on a once per minute or once per hour basis it must first be pr
192. be 1 189 and4 90 150 Jand5 0 61 99 or1 189 and6 0 20 99 and7 25 10 3 265 Only Output Arrays with hours 1300 and 1500 Table 10 3 1 conform to the above Copy conditions 10 3 3 5 Time Synchronization To use the time synchronize function time element s must be specified in the Start Condition Section 10 3 3 1 1 The user must also specify a time interval in the Copy condition For instance if the original data had 15 minute outputs and you only want hourly outputs then an interval of 60 minutes must be specified following the element number This is entered as assuming hrmn is element number 3 3 60 If time synchronization is specified in the Start Condition Split looks for the interval in a time element in the Copy condition Only one time interval is specified This interval is the unit of time to synchronize each file The interval can be given tolerance limits by following the interval with a comma and the tolerance For example if 3 is the hrmn element and the time interval is 60 minutes 2 minutes the syntax is 3 60 2 Table based data files need to use the same time format as described in Section 10 3 3 1 You can specify the interval for time synchronization on table files as 1 60 which will give you an output interval of 60 minutes If the time synchronize function is enabled and data are missing at one or more of the time intervals specified then a blank or the comment entered in the Replace bad
193. bed above To restore the option controls to the left side of the screen right click again in the graphical display area and choose Show Controls 7 6 5 Zooming with the XY Plot You can zoom in on the graphical area of the XY Plot Click and drag the mouse to define a rectangle that becomes the zoomed to display area after you release the mouse button As soon as you are zoomed in on the graph the Undo Zoom button appears in the upper right corner of the display Pressing this button will remove the zooming and return the graph to its original display configuration zoom level E XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values Undo Zoom TempSensort 7 41 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time If you stop the plot and then zoom in to a region you can use a right mouse click to drag the screen and thus scroll to other locations of the graph at the current zoom level 7 6 6 Using the Special Options of the XY Plot XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensor1 Add Y Value Delete X Axis Value TempSensor3 0 01 Add X Value Points per Field 100 a Press the Options button to access the special options for the operation of the XY Plot The Graphing Options screen will appear with the following main tabs Scaling Data Display Visual Display and Save If one or more y axis values are currently selected a Trace tab will also be available which applies only to the selected y axis value s 7 42 Section 7 M
194. bles in the datalogger as defined by the currently running program You can retrieve the uncollected data appending it to a file on the PC or you can retrieve all of the data from the datalogger You can also use other custom configurations for the collection The Change File Name button lets you choose a folder and file name in which to store the data Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data Collection Options Starting Record Information Collect Mode Data Since Last Collection v ets I File Mode Append to End of File lt Record Information File Format asci Table Data T 045 5 il Include Timestamp Include Record Number Starting Date Time Ending Date Time Table Collection Table File Name CO HstNoise C Campbellscit A TDAQ CRSO00 _HstNoise dat C Public C Campbellsci A TDAG CRS000 _Public dat O Status C Campbellsci A TDAG CRIOO0X_Status dat C Select All Use Station Name Change File Name Start Collection Section 1 Introduction 1 1 5 Field Calibration and the Calibration Wizard RTDAQ includes the Calibration Wizard for performing real time non intrusive calibration of measurements Datalogger programs that use the FieldCal CRBasic instruction activate this Wizard for use This feature allows calibration to occur within a simple interface instead of requiring manual calibration via the numeric displays or with the keypad display at the datalogger site Field Cal
195. button You can drag and drop a value to move it to another location on the Y Axis Values numeric display area Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time To add an X Axis Value to the graph place a measurement into the numeric monitoring area labeled X Axis Value Only one measurement can be used for the x axis since it represents the independent axis Press the Add X Value button Navigate through the Tables pane of the Add Selection screen then select the desired field Press Paste or drag and drop your selection onto the X Axis Value area M XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values X Axis Value Add X Value Delete Points per Field 50 If you want to use another measurement for the independent axis simply press Add X Value again and add the desired measurement over the top of the existing one E XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensorl 28 13 Sayed a R a EC 1 ig 28 125 28 12 4 28 415 4 28 11 4 28 105 28 1 4 28 095 S 28 09 I 28 085 28 08 ater 28 075 4 4 oar f 28 065 Mp X Axis Value 28 06 a 23 055 7 M_ i 28 05 EE I TempSensor3 28 045 Add X Value AT 28 035 Points perField 100 E ee he 26 02 4 ee CMS Sa Ce 08 01 SRE 7
196. ces set up in RTDAQ You can choose to show all messages or filter them to show only certain devices or dataloggers RTDAQ can also store these messages to log files on the PC s hard drive and will eventually overwrite these files to keep them from growing forever You can control whether these logs are used as well as the number and size of each log file type with the Options Log File Settings menu and dialog RTDAQ s communications engine creates four different types of message logs Transaction messages are the highest level and show every action undertaken by RTDAQ For example if you re monitoring a datalogger every second RTDAQ will show clock check messages each second Many of the messages displayed on this log are understandable and may provide some insight to the processes going on behind the scenes when you monitor or collect data The other three logs are more technical in nature but can be very useful to Campbell Scientific support engineers Communications messages show when devices are activated the settings passed to those devices and their responses This log may include status warning and fault messages The Object State messages record the state of software objects behind the scenes in RTDAQ The most detailed log is the Low Level Log A separate log is stored for each root level device each COM port IP port or TAPI port These logs record every byte sent or received through that port Interpreting all of t
197. ch time one filled screen display will represent Since the x axis is a time axis the Graph Width scales the x axis to represent the amount of time you indicate You can set a minimum graph width of 1 millisecond Even though 1 millisecond is the minimum width for the graph finer resolution if needed can be obtained by zooming the graph window 7 4 6 Data Retrieval Methods used by the Graph Screen Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields FFTview_FTs 1 _ FFTView_FTS 2 FFTView_FTS 3 a Coe Graph Width 00 h 00 m 10s 000 ms Collect Mode Graph All Data Fill Graph Width Newest Records Drawing Mode Strip Chart Shift Z O Shift Data NOTE NOTE Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Choose whether to Graph All Data Fill Graph Width or graph only the Newest Records If Graph All Data is selected all data records will be collected and displayed in the graph Multiple screens of uninterrupted data can be shown but the display may fall behind real time in faster applications Eventually after several screens of uninterrupted data there may be a break in data This happens when the buffer used to collect data is filled Graphing will then start over at real time Choosing Fill Graph Width will calculate the number of points needed to fill the current Graph Width collect that many points draw the screen and then return to collect the next set of records Time consecutive points will be drawn
198. ciated datalogger If RTDAQ is not connected to a datalogger the values will not update and an exclamation point will appear in the upper right corner of the component to indicate the incomplete data connection After a component s properties have been set select OK to enable the changes and close the Properties window Once the link to the data value has been applied if there is data available from RTDAQ for the component the value on the display will update To make changes in display component settings the Properties window can be opened by double clicking the component If you make changes to a component s properties but then decide to reject those changes press the Cancel button to return the properties to the last applied state If Cancel is selected when a component is first placed in the work area and OK has not been pressed the display component will be removed from the screen 8 3 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software 8 4 Available Components The following is an overview of the display components available The online help has detailed information about each of the components and their properties bh Pointer returns the cursor to a normal selection tool 5 s Status Bar depicts the selected data value as a single vertical bar 0 Numeric depicts the selected data value as a numeric value 3 1 Alarm provides visual and or audible notification that a data value has exceeded a defined limit
199. cientific warrants that the installation media on which the software is recorded and the documentation provided with it are free from physical defects in materials and workmanship under normal use The warranty does not cover any installation media that has been damaged lost or abused You are urged to make a backup copy as set forth above to protect your investment Damaged or lost media is the sole responsibility of the licensee and will not be replaced by Campbell Scientific Campbell Scientific warrants that the software itself will perform substantially in accordance with the specifications set forth in the instruction manual when properly installed and used in a manner consistent with the published recommendations including recommended system requirements Campbell Scientific does not warrant that the software will meet licensee s requirements for use or that the software or documentation are error free or that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted Campbell Scientific will either replace or correct any software that does not perform substantially according to the specifications set forth in the instruction manual with a corrected copy of the software or corrective code In the case of significant error in the installation media or documentation Campbell Scientific will correct errors without charge by providing new media addenda or substitute pages If Campbell Scientific is unable to replace defective media or document
200. connect ssseseeeeseeeeesrseeerersersesirrrerersersrsreee 4 9 4 6 3 2 Update Table Definitions eee eeceseeeeeeecneeeeeneeees 4 10 4 6 3 3 Status Table s iniisp enose ienei er eai 4 10 4 6 3 4 File Contr le er ease aeara e K EEE iSS 4 12 4 6 3 5 Calibration Wizard cee ceeeecseeeeceseeeceseceeeseceeeeeneeners 4 15 4 6 3 6 Terminal Emulator cceeceesccseseceecneseecesseeeeseeeeeseenees 4 15 4 6 4 Network Menu ceeceececeeeceeececeseeeeneeceseeeeneeceeeeeneeceeeeseneeens 4 16 4 6 4 1 Add Delete Edit Rename Datalogger eee 4 16 4 6 4 2 Backup Restore Network cece cseecseeereeeeeeeeeeeees 4 16 4 6 4 3 Computer s Global PakBus Address 0 0 cece 4 17 46 3 Tools Menu e ueneno Ue EE ce dendens ce cone tadpasboes Sosuanda opened 4 17 4 6 5 1 Auxiliary Applications 0 cee ceeecseeecetecreeecnereeeeeeees 4 17 465 2 Options 33 tev Sich eink dhe ee 4 18 4 6 5 3 Log Toolea peisan ee hates deena desshs 4 18 46 54 Pak Bus Graph ennonn e wise teers SS 4 20 4 7 The RTDAQ Toolbars tscuesctsces dul peeientetietien atl eieeborts ae 4 22 5 Program Creation and Editing 0 5 1 Sal CRB ASIC Editor anaren innra a 5 1 5 2 Inserting Instructions eee eesecseeeeceseeeceseceeesecseesecneeeecaeeeessesaeeeeenees 5 2 5 2 1 Parameter Dialog BOX oo eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesecnseeaeeaeenes 5 2 5 2 2 Right Click Functionality eeesesecseeeceecneeeeceseeeesseceeeseenees 5 4
201. creen allows for manual data collection The mode for the data collection is specified as well as whether the collected data should be stored in a new output file or appended to an existing one The format of the output file is also selected To collect a range of data from a specified timeframe you can use the Starting Date Time and Ending Date Time options Choices for including timestamps and record numbers in the stored data are also included A choice of tables to be collected for output is given Tables can be selected individually or as a group The station name identifier can be chosen to be included in the header of the data file if desired Names and paths for the output files can be selected as desired Finally the collection is initiated using the Start Collection button For more information about this screen refer to the associated online help topic 4 8 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 6 Pull down Menus 4 6 1 File Menu Access to almost all of the buttons and tabs on RTDAQ s screens is also available via pull down menus Many of these functions are described in detail in other sections of this manual The File menu is used to save and retrieve global setting configurations and close the RTDAQ program The View menu allows selection of languages other than English The Datalogger menu is used for datalogger control functions connections and wizards The Network menu is used for adding editing and deleting logge
202. ctory if you installed RTDAQ using the default directory structure You can however provide a different file name if desired 3 2 2 2 Restoring the Network from a Backup File To restore a network from a backup file choose Network Backup Restore Network Select the bkp file that contains the network configuration you want to restore and press Restore Note that this process DOES NOT append to the existing network the existing network will be overwritten when the restore is performed 3 2 3 Loss of Computer Power The RTDAQ communications server writes to several files in the SYS directory during normal operations The most critical files are the data cache table files and the network configuration files The data cache files contain all of the data that has been collected from the dataloggers by the RTDAQ server These files are kept open or active as long as data is being stored to the file The configuration files contain information about each device in the datalogger network including device settings and other parameters These files are written to frequently to make sure that they reflect the current state and configuration of each device The configuration files are only opened as needed If computer system power is lost while the RTDAQ server is writing data to the active files the files can become corrupted making the files inaccessible to the server While loss of power won t always cause a file problem having
203. d LgrNet restore failed Data restore Manual poll transaction started Client logon name Manual poll transaction complete Manual poll aborted Selective Collect area name manual poll begun Message Parameters Message Meaning The server is being shut down area has been removed On server startup the network description file csilgrnet dnd could not be read On server startup the data broker data storage area could not be created The listed client is starting a manual poll operation according to the scheduled collection settings A manual poll is initiated from the Collect Now button on the Connect screen The manual poll operation has received the data from the datalogger The manual poll operation was stopped or failed to complete due to communications failure or a timeout A user specified poll has been started for one of the datalogger collect areas Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message If a new server started message is seen without the shut down message before it this is an indication that the server or the PC crashed without exiting The network setup and configuration will have to be restored from a backup or re entered Try to determine what corrupted or removed the network description file This is a computer problem The files are either not present or are corrupted See notes for message 83 Check communications with the datalogger
204. d eet seit opens 6 14 6 5 4 Rainflow Histogram cc ceeecseeceseeeeseceeeeecneseeceseeeeesecaeeseens 6 15 6 5 4 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed 0 eee eeeeeeeteeeeteceeeene 6 16 6 542 OPOS acct cil E e arae e TE a EEE Sie eee 6 17 6 5 4 3 Rainflow Histogram Toolbar eeesessecseeeeeteeeeeeeees 6 17 o i a E E E ET 6 18 6 5 5 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed 000 cee eeeeesteeeeeeeereeeeee 6 19 6 5 5 2 OPlOns 2 hssca 8 essese 8 hank ee E ae e R ENE EEUE 6 20 6 5 5 3 FET Toolbar sisi tei ides ieee aidan 6 21 6 6 Right click Menus iscsi ioraa s ii ari ia ie eE 6 21 6 0 1 Data View ER ET 6 21 6 6 2 Grap S r cated vogicess Sopncas e E ected tess aeons eeraepedeay sh 6 23 6 6 3 Traces inesivo cesses cacstscs coset scs teckivbin EEPE CEEP N EE CECI S CESKE POVIE EEPE VESTNES 6 23 RTDAQ Table of Contents 6 7 Printing Options ivi asec wove iteciedies i des aici ide ei roa 6 24 6 751 Print Setups sch ie ar Oat ki eine oes 6 24 6 7 2 Printing Text in don sib alacinala Sia aida eis 6 24 6 7 3 Printing Graphs e eearri aeea ao esea Eiaa Entet 6 24 6 8 View Pro Online Help ch e eale en aa eNe 6 24 6 9 Assigning Data Files to View eeesseesessesisesssssiereesesrsrerrersssesrereerers 6 25 7 Monitoring Data in Real time cee 7 1 7 1 Using the Monitor Data Screen oo eee eeesceseeeceseceeeeecereeceaeeeeeaeeaseees 7 1 7 1 1 Connect to Target Datalogger ao ee eee eeeeeecesecesecneeeneeeneeeee 7 1 7
205. ded for the CR800 CR850 CR1000 CR3000 CR5000 and CR9000X RTDAQ runs on the Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista platforms RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help ow 33 DO FBR 00O Clock Program Program Monitor Data Collect Data a Clocks Datalogger Information Datalogger Name CR1000 Datalogger Type CR1000 Datalogger Direct Connect Connection Eg COM Port COM3 Pause Clock Update Datalogger Settings Baud Rate 115200 PakBus Address 2 Datalogger Time Zone Offset Security Code 0 et PohousOm Extra Response Time Os Max Time Online Od Oh Om Datalogger Program Current Program Disconnected RTDAQ contains numerous improvements over the previous PC9000 product line It features a new user interface including a look and feel similar to other Campbell Scientific datalogger software such as LoggerNet and PC400 Its underlying architecture utilizes the same communication server used by LoggerNet the LoggerNet Server This technology enables connection to PakBus dataloggers including the CR1000 and CR3000 as well as tight integration with other Campbell Scientific products and utilities such as RTMC and PakBus Graph Datalogger communications technologies supported include direct connect or RS 232 via local serial cable short haul modems or other transparent links telephone TAPI TCP IP VHF UHF radi
206. dify option Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time The Modify function is primarily used for modifying variable values in the Public or Status tables Record numbers timestamps and stored data cannot be modified 7 1 5 Setting the Monitor Data Screen Options NOTE The Options button allows you to set up the number of decimal places used to show values in the display control the display options for boolean values and timestamps justify data cells set up alarms when data goes above or below a certain value and control the number of rows and columns shown on the data grid You may also activate this configuration screen by right clicking on the field display area and choosing Options Delete Select All Delete All View Modify Highlight a cell in the main data display area to set the options for just that one cell You may set the options for multiple cells by holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the set of cells to edit and then pressing the Options button You may set options for all cells at once by right clicking anywhere on the data display area choosing Select All and then pressing the Options button To unselect all cells click in the empty space below the Start Stop button If no cells are selected when the Options button is pressed only the Setup tab of the Field Monitor Options screen will be displayed After customizing your Field Monitor Options you may save that configuration for easy retr
207. ditional tables as necessary To store a measurement to final storage simply click on a measurement label on the left choose the data processing you want for that measurement by clicking one of the enabled buttons in the middle and Short Cut adds the necessary instructions to save that data In the example below average air temperature a sample of relative humidity wind vector outputs and average barometric pressure were selected for a 60 minute interval Short Cut enables the most logical outputs for each measurement If you require an output that is not enabled you can right click on the measurement to get a pop up menu containing all output options You can also select a block of measurements left click drag or left click and shift left click to do the same output on all of them Note however that only output options common to all of the selected measurements will be enabled 5 36 NOTE Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds Eile Program Tools Help Progress e a Sensors asuremer Average 1 New Open El Default Batty 2 Sensors 3 Outputs Sensors 2asureme Processin itput Lab Units 4 Finish Enc Be CS105 BP_mmHg Sample BP_mmHg mmHg AITE HMP35C AirTC Average AirTC_AV Deg C RH AM16 32 1 107 3 T107_C 1 2 107 3 T107_C 3 107 3 T107_C z 4 107 3 T107_C lt 107 3 T107_C E 6 107 3 T107_C E 7 1
208. does not write data to an Output File on disk rather it will display the processed values on the screen if the Screen Display box is checked If Screen Display is not enabled no data will be displayed on the Split RUN screen CAUTION The Output file name cannot be the same as the Input file name Split will display an error message if this condition occurs Several output options may be specified to alter the default output to the file Some are located on the main OUTPUT FILE screen and some are made available by pressing the Other button Split SPLITMAN PAR File Edit Labels Run Printer Help Output Data File File Format Report Browse hourly prn Comma X I File Ore P Printer Append File M HTML Default Column Width e V Screen Display Report and Column Headings Report Heading Hourly Data CC E ener Fea ptt onal ona ote ar Filename MSTSPLIT DA MSTSPLIT DA MSTSPLIT DA MSTSPLIT DA MSTSPLIT DA Year ATM Day ATM Hour_Minute Battery Battolt AjirTemp Volts Min Average gt Time Series Heading Insert Delete Add FIGURE 10 3 12 Output File Template 10 3 3 7 1 Description of Output Option Commands File Format There are five File Format options to choose from No File Field Comma Printable and Custom If No File is chosen then only the PRN file is saved to disk The Field Comma and Printable options produce files formatted as Field Formatted Comma Separated and Printable ASCII
209. dopted many of these conventions in RTDAQ This manual describes a collection of screens dialogs and functions to interoperate with Campbell Scientific s dataloggers As with most Windows based software there is usually more than one way to access each function We encourage you to look around and experiment with different options to find which methods work best for you To keep this manual as concise and readable as possible we will not always list all of the methods for getting to every function Typically each function will have two methods of access and some will have as many as four Section 1 Introduction The most common methods for accessing functionality are Menus Text menus are displayed at the top of most windows Menu items are accessed either by a left mouse click or using a hot key combination e g Alt F opens the File menu When the menu is opened you can click on an item to select it or use arrow keys to highlight it and press the Enter key or just type the underlined letter By convention menu items that bring up dialog boxes or new windows requiring interaction will be followed by an ellipsis Other items execute functions directly or can be switched on or off Some menu items show a check mark if a function is enabled and no check mark if disabled Items with Program Focus On each screen one button text area or other control is selected at a time to have the focus The Focus is us
210. e Shortcut View Pro is closed by selecting File Exit from the menu or pressing the red X in the upper right hand corner When View Pro is closed all open graphs and data files will also be closed Many of View Pro s features can be accessed from the toolbar The main View Pro toolbar includes the following icons 2 Open Brings up a dialog box from which you can choose a data file to open Ee Copy Copies selected text to the clipboard Text is selected by dragging the mouse pointer across the desired selection Multiple columns in a data file can be selected by dragging the mouse pointer across the column headings Cascade Rearranges all open non minimized data file windows so that the title bar of each window is visible Windows cascade down and to the right starting from the upper left corner 6 1 Section 6 View Pro 6 2 Hale Tile Vertically Rearranges all open non minimized data file windows as non overlapping vertical tiles This makes them all visible at the same time Tile Horizontally Rearranges all open non minimized data file windows as non overlapping horizontal tiles This makes them all visible at the same time Refresh Current File Refreshes an open data file This is useful if you are viewing a file and additional data has been stored since the file was first opened Print Preview Displays how the currently selected data file will appear when it is printed Print Brings
211. e To File O Save To File Browse l Reset Table Browse l Reset Table l Browse Reset Table You may create up to four Table Monitor windows in RTDAQ After Table Monitor screens have been created they can be brought to the front by using the drop down list which becomes available on the Table Monitor button You will also use this drop down list to create Table Monitor screens after at least one already exists since pushing the Table Monitor button at that point will bring the focus to an existing table instead of creating a new one r Table Monitor 7 Graph Create New Table Monitor 1 Table Monitor 2 Table Monitor 3 Table Monitor 4 Rin HANS AY 7 3 2 Displaying Tables on the Table Monitor Use the Select Table drop down box to select the desired tables to be displayed A list of tables available in the program currently running on the datalogger to which you are connected is shown You may select up to three tables to be displayed each in their own screen column If you want only one or two tables to be displayed you may reduce the value in the Columns spin box which will also reduce the width of the screen Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time i Table Monitor 1 Columns 3 a Select Table Select Table Foa g Table Size 227930 Table Size Fields Values a Fields 10905 TimeStamp 5 2 2008 10 32 23 Ak FFTView_FTs 1
212. e declared before they can be used in the program Variables declared as Public can be viewed in display software Variables declared using Dim cannot be viewed Variables assigned to a fixed value are used as constants For example in a CRBasic program there may be multiple temperature or other sensors that are wired to sequential channels Rather than insert multiple instructions and several variables a variable array with one name and many elements may be used A thermocouple temperature might be called TCTemp With an array of 20 elements the names of the individual temperatures are TCTemp 1 TCTemp 2 TCTemp 3 TCTemp 20 The array notation allows compact code to perform operations on all the variables For example to convert ten temperatures in a variable array from C to F For I 1 to 10 TCTemp 1 TCTemp I 1 8 32 Next I Aliases can also be created that will allow an element of an array or another data result to be referred to by a different name To continue the example above TCTemp 3 could be renamed using the following syntax Alias TCTemp 3 AirTemp In the display software the more descriptive alias AirTemp would be used for the cell name 5 16 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 4 3 Mathematical Expressions Mathematical expressions can be entered algebraically into program code to perform processing on measurements to be used for logical evaluation or to be used in place of some paramete
213. e fields also have text in the Comments column which provides a short description of the option that has been selected for the parameter 5 14 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 4 CRBasic Programming CRBasic is a programming language that has some similarities to a structured BASIC There are special instructions for making measurements and for creating tables of output data The results of all measurements are assigned variables given names Mathematical operations are written out much as they would be algebraically This section provides a summary of a program its syntax structure and sequence Refer to the datalogger users manual or the on line help for detailed information on program instructions 5 4 1 Programming Sequence The structure of a datalogger program requires that variables data tables and subroutines be declared before they can be used The best way to do this is to put all the variable declarations and output table definitions at the beginning followed by the subroutines and then the program Below is the typical layout of a program Note that the online help has example code for each instruction to demonstrate the use of the instruction in a program Declarations Make a list of what to measure and calculate Declare constants Within this list include the fixed constants used Declare Public variables Indicate the values that the user is able to view while the program is running Dimension variables
214. e ie iene ENTRER 7 71 7 10 7 Zooming in on the Histogram ceeeecsseeeseeceeeeecneeeeeeaees 7 72 7 10 8 Save and Print Options ce eeesecseeecseeeeceseeeesseceeesecneeeeeaees 7 72 7 10 9 Setting the Options for the Rainflow Screen eee 7 74 7 10 9 1 Scaling the AX S ec eeeesseesesecseeseeeseeeeeeeseneceseeeens 7 74 7 10 9 2 Visual Display OptionS seseeseseeeeeseeesessreereresrsrsrrreeees 7 75 7 10 9 3 Trace Options 0 0 ce ceeecsesesteceeeecneeeeceeeeeceaeeesnereeesaees 7 76 7 10 9 4 Using Saved Configurations esesesseeeereeeersrereerereeeees 7 77 7 10 10 Accepting or Abandoning Changes to the Rainflow Options7 78 7 11 Saving and Loading Configurations 00 0 0 cee eeesceeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 79 7 11 1 Saving and Loading Configuration Files for Real Time Data Screens wistigtivncc i ioe She at Ghee Bee ee 7 79 7 11 2 Using Configurations in the Field Monitor cesses 7 80 7 11 3 Using Configurations in the Table Monitors ce ceeeeeeee 7 81 7 11 4 Saving and Loading Global Configuration Files 7 81 vi RTDAQ Table of Contents 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software 8 1 8 1 Development Mode sssi aer rien aerer E REA E 8 1 8 1 1 The RTMC Workspace issic inia pessi 8 3 8 1 2 Single Datalogger RTMC Projects 0 0 ce eeeseeeceeeeeeecneeeenees 8 3 8 1 3 Display Components cc eeceeeeceeseceseceeeseceeeecaeeeeeaecaeeaeenees 8 3 8 1 4 Functions Avai
215. e tab Input File Options These switches are entered after the input file name e g Splitr Test par r Input dat L Output prn nnn L Bnnn F Begins processing nnn bytes into the file If nnn mmm is used then processing begins at nnn bytes into the file and stops at mmm bytes into the file This is the same as setting a specific Start and Stop offset which is found under the Offsets Options button of the Input File tab Begins processing the file at the byte value where processing last stopped If L mmm is used then processing begins where it left off and stops at mmm bytes into the file This is the same as enabling Last Count which is found under the Offsets Options button of the Input File tab Specifies the file type as Burst data nnn indicates the size of the arrays This is the same as selecting Burst Format for the File Info field on the Input File tab Specifies the file type as Final Storage binary data This is the same as selecting Final Storage Format for the File Info field on the Input File tab 10 61 Section 10 Utilities M Changes the value for midnight to 2400 instead of 0000 This is the same as selecting Midnight is 2400 Hours check box found under the Offsets Options button of the Input File tab Batch File Example c Program Files campbellsci SplitW splitr exe c Campbellsci SplitW switch test par inputla dat Output prn E H W 4 1200 gt 1 6 where PAR file switch t
216. e to File check box individually for each table This can be used to capture events of interest while they are being monitored WARNING Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time i Table Monitor 1 Columns 3 Select Table Select Table FTO E Table Size 227930 Table Size Fields Values Fields RecNum 22039 poovovvvvoveevevovvevevovevovevsvvororvovveversevnes Timestamp 9 2 2008 10 37 08 Ah FFTView FTs 1 0 01305954 FFTView_FTs 2 0 0004255083 FFTView FTs 3 00002467927 FFTView FTs 4 0 0001600847 FFTView_FTs 5 0 0004470574 FFTView_FTs 6 0 000759927 FFTView FTs 7 0 0007895423 FFTView_FTs 8 _0 0005103603 FFTView_FTs 3 0 0003331677 FFT View FTs 10 0 0002721162 FFTView_FTs 11 00004763962 FFTView FTs 12 0 0009406335 C Save To File C Save To File lt mu EA se Hs P A Od OO AOE C Campbellsci ATDAG Choose the parent folder for the desired data file by pressing the Browse button A folder within the chosen folder will be created using the Station Name of the datalogger for which data is being displayed The data file will be named based on the name of the table and a timestamp representing the time when the data is first written to the file The Save To File check box is automatically cleared each time the Stop button is pressed You can also reset the table being displayed by pressing the Reset Table button This
217. e updated as fast as new records are received from the datalogger This often results in a real time response For this to function properly the proper output instructions must be defined in the CRBasic program running on the datalogger to which RTDAQ is connected These output instructions include FFT available for all RTDAQ dataloggers and FFTSample used only on the CR9000X with at least one CR9052 Filter Module installed RTDAQ does not create FFT spectra from time series measurements It only displays FFT spectra that have been calculated and stored by the datalogger 7 8 1 Brief Overview of Fourier Analysis Fourier analysis takes a signal from the time domain and transforms it into the frequency domain The fundamental principle used with Fourier analysis is that any time domain signal that is sampled can be represented with a group of sinusoidal functions of varying amplitudes and phases which are then linearly combined to represent or approximate that original time domain signal A typical display of this frequency representation would be to show the amplitudes of the sines and cosines at various frequencies such as the height of a bar representing the amplitude An algorithm for performing these calculations known as the Fast Fourier Transform FFT algorithm has come into popular use during the last few decades due to its efficiency and favorable computational speed An FFT spectrum is used for analyzing the different frequency c
218. e values in the input boxes of the Custom Limits section to use a scale with user configurable maximum and minimum values Choose the Logarithmic check box to use a logarithmic scale for the current axis 7 60 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time NOTE When using logarithmic scaling the minimum value may not be zero or less than zero 7 9 8 2 Data Display Options Select the Data Display tab adjust the FFT Histogram plotting options Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Data Flow Time Display iaht Plotting Options Line Only Numeric Data Display Points and Line illisecor Points Only The Plotting Options section allows you to specify how the data values will be drawn on the screen Choose the Line Only option to display only lines on the display which connect between the data points obtained from the datalogger Choose the Points and Line option to display both points and lines on the display Choose the Points Only option to display only the value points obtained from the datalogger 7 61 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 62 7 9 8 3 Visual Display Options Select the Visual Display tab to modify chart colors and configure the titles on the spectrum or histogram display Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Chart Colors Titles Back Wall Color is C Show Graph Title Font Left Grid C
219. ecnsececessseeecnssseeeens 9 3 O30 ZerOM PN aa seai a Eens e a were Adela 9 3 9 3 2 Offset Calibration inoan a a e bes 9 4 9 3 3 Two Point Multiplier and Offset Calibration cece 9 4 9 3 4 Two Point Multiplier Only Calibration eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 9 5 9 4 Performing a Manual Calibration 0 cic eeceeecseeeeeeceseeeceaeeeeeeeeneeees 9 5 9 4 1 How to Use the Mode Variable for Calibration Status and COMET OD ses eich eee tes EE Shee eset Ss dow ge Sec ae A Save EEEE 9 5 9 4 2 Using the Mode Variable for Manual Single Point Calibration 9 6 9 4 3 Using the Mode Variable for Manual Two Point Calibration 9 7 9 5 Generating Calibration Programs ccescsesscsecneeescneeeeceaeeeeeseeneeees 9 8 9 6 Using the Calibration Wizard with Running Programs e0 9 8 9 6 1 Calibration Wizard Basic Operation ce ceeeeeseeeeseereeeeeeeees 9 8 9 6 2 Using the Wizard to Perform Two Point Multiplier and Offset Calibrations e eai araar aenea aaao aa EAEE EEE EERE 9 8 9 6 3 Using the Wizard to Perform Zeroing Calibrations 9 12 9 6 4 Using the Wizard to Perform Offset Calibrations 00 9 14 9 7 Strain and Shunt Calibration ee eeesesecseeseceseeecsseceeeseceseeeeeeees 9 15 10 Utilities 2 0 0 0 cece ec ecceeceseeseeeeeseeeeeaees 10 1 10 1 Card Cony Ertervinccieeceasesackiouiestiecusticetensteiaseacsiesl adeeeade einen eben 10 1 10 1 1 Input Output File Settings ee eeeeeesseeeeeec
220. ect File is used to find Birch fsl When one of the Output Arrays is highlighted the Field Names of the data in that array are displayed Figure 10 3 4 In this example an array based data file is processed and the Use Data Labels feature uses an FSL file When processing a table based datalogger file change the file type to Table based data file to use for labels and select the table based DAT file Split will use the header information from this file for its labels 10 15 Section 10 Utilities Output Arrays Field Names BattVolt_MIN Bg BattVolt_Hr_Min_h Encl_RH_MAX Encl_RH_Hr_Min_ 24 Select File 99 pa AirTem J M IN AirTemp_Hr_Min_ Done Output Interval 60 000 Min Field Number 14 FIGURE 10 3 4 DATA FILE LABELS Screen In this example we want the hourly data note the Output Interval at the bottom of the Data File Label window so click array 60 To paste the desired values from this array into the Select box select the field names while holding down the lt ctrl gt key All of the values could be selected by clicking the first one and holding the mouse button down and dragging to the end Once the values you want have been selected click Paste Figure 10 3 5 Fr Spit version 2 0 beta sabt O ax File Edit Labels Run Printer Help Ios Fiets up i Deta ie Labels BIRCHLFSL Input Data Fil Output Arrays Field Names Browse C Campbellsci Loggert 124 Select File BattVolt_Hr_M
221. ectra can be viewed Section 1 Introduction M FFT Histogram 1 DER Select Table FFTOut Select Data FFTCpeV w_FTs v Area 3D View Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins O View Ranges Options Clear Start 0 3125 78125 1250 1796875 2500 3046 875 3750 4296875 sood Frequency e Histograms calculated by the datalogger can be shown as they are made available by program calculations and storage m FFT Histogram 1 Select Table HstNoise Select Data Noisy al_Hst Graph Type Histogram 3D View X Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins View Ranges Options Clear Stop 05 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115 125 135 145 Frequency e Display of rainflow style histograms is also supported using the Rainflow viewer This display works with programs utilizing the Rainflow output instruction in the CRBasic datalogger program Section 1 Introduction m RainFlow 1 SEUSS TABLE2 v Select Bin BBIk32_RFH v Zoom lt Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins O Show Range Orthagonal a Options Clear e i z 4 6 30 6690 126 162 210 258 294 342 390 426 474 522 558 Stop a Amplitude Bin Values s 9 at TF 6 54 at 3 2 Mean Bins o 1 1 4 Collect Data Once a program is storing data in the datalogger you can collect a copy of that data to a file on the PC The Collect Data tab shows a list of ta
222. ed Use the RTDAQ Program Generator when you are familiar with the interface based on experience using the PC9000 software or when you require detailed control over generated program parameters 5 6 2 Program Startup To create a datalogger program using the RTDAQ CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator press the Program Generator button from the main RTDAQ toolbar RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X BE Fie View Datalogger Network Tools Help on 33 OD ARA 00o Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data Datalogger Information Clocks CR1000 Datalogger Name CR9000x Datal atalogger Type CR9000x atalogge ae a aa ba F _ You may also select Tools CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator to start the application This program can also be started by double clicking on the ProgGen exe file directly in the C Program Files Campbellsci iRTDAQ folder When the program starts it opens a new program generator project and displays it to the user for immediate modification or use The type of generator project may be a CR5000 project or a CR9000X project If the CR5000 is the selected datalogger within the main RTDAQ program then a new CR5000 generator project will be opened If the CR9000X is the selected datalogger within RTDAQ then a CR9000X generator project will be opened If a Section 5 Program Creation and Editing datalogger other than the CR5000 or CR9000X is selected then the generator project type
223. els This allows a single measurement instruction to measure a series of individually calibrated sensors applying the correct calibration to each sensor If the multiplier and offset are not arrays the same multiplier and offset are used for each repetition VoltSE Dest Reps Range SEChan Delay Integ Mult Offset Calibration factors Mult 1 0 123 Offset 1 0 23 Mult 2 0 115 Offset 2 0 234 Mult 3 0 114 Offset 3 0 224 VoltSE Pressure 3 mV 1000 6 1 1 100 Mult Offset Note that one exception to this is when the Multiplier or Offset points to an index into the array then the instruction will not advance to the next Multiplier or Offset but use the same for each repetition For instance in the above example if Mult 2 and Offset 2 were used the instruction would use 0 115 and 0 234 for the Multiplier and Offset respectively for each repetition To force the instruction to advance through the Multiplier and Offset arrays while still specifying an index into the array use the syntax Mult 2 and Offset 2 5 4 13 Program Access to Data Tables Data stored in a table can be accessed from within the program The format used is Tablename Fieldname fieldname index records back Where Tablename is the name of the table in which the desired value is stored Fieldname is the name of the field in the table The fieldname is always an array even if it consists of only one variable the fieldname index must alw
224. end 1 1 1 if the last record of an event occurred the last time the table was called 0 if the data table did not store a record or if it is in the middle of an event TableName EventCount the number of data storage events that have occurred in an event driven DataTable TableName Tablefull 1 to indicate a fill and stop table is full or a ring mode table has begun overwriting its oldest data 0 if the data table is not full begun overwriting oldest data TableName TableSize the size allocation in number of records of the selected DataTable The values of Tablename output 1 1 and Tablename eventend 1 1 are only updated when the tables are called Although RTDAQ does not support the older mixed array group of Campbell Scientific dataloggers such as the CR10X CR23X and CR510 the Short Cut application included with RTDAQ is the same one included for use with LoggerNet and other Campbell Scientific support software Because of this the documentation included here contains references to mixed array dataloggers For most RTDAQ implementations these references can be ignored The Short Cut program generator creates programs for Campbell Scientific dataloggers in four easy to follow steps Using a wizard like interface you select the datalogger choose how often and which sensors you wish to measure and select intervals or trigger conditions on which to store data and what processing to perform on the raw measureme
225. enu is also available by right clicking any blank area of the workspace Screen Properties brings up the dialog to choose the background image and color for the current screen Delete Screen removes the current screen from the project If there are components on the screen they will also be removed Rename Screen brings up a dialog to change the name of the current screen This is the name that appears on the screen tab in run time mode Paste places a copy of the RTMC clipboard content on the active screen Insert New brings up a submenu allowing you select one of the components to insert on the screen When the component is added to the screen the Properties window for the new component will come up 8 7 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software 8 8 8 1 4 6 Component Menu NOTE The Component menu is used to set the component properties placement and alignment The Component menu is also available by right clicking any of the components in the workspace Properties brings up the Properties window for the selected component Delete Selection removes the selected component from the workspace Lock Aspect Ratio allows you to drag the object to a new size without distorting the look of the component If the height of a component is changed the width will automatically be changed as well Rename Component lets you change the name of the component in the list tree Cut deletes the selected component and places a co
226. equest failed User Response to Message Setup check that communications are enabled in Setup for all the devices in the path Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Getting the datalogger table definitions will erase any data in the data cache Message Text Logger table definitions have changed Datalogger message Records received A datalogger transaction has timed out Terminal emulation transaction started Terminal emulation transaction complete Terminal emulation transaction Set variable started Set variable complete Message Parameters Severity S for Status W for Warning F for Fault Message text Table name Beginning record number Ending record number Time out period in milliseconds Message Meaning The server has detected a change in the table definitions in the datalogger This is a message that has been generated by the datalogger or in some cases the RF base on behalf of the datalogger Datalogger records have been received and stored in the data cache The server has waited longer than the allotted time for the expected response to a transaction Terminal emulation message has been sent to the datalogger Terminal emulation response message has been received from the datalogger The expected terminal emulation response from the datalogger was not
227. er system User Response to Message Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Collect areas can be table for table mode dataloggers final storage areas ports and flags or input locations Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 If this is not the first poll for the collect area this message indicates that data that had been stored in the datalogger was lost before it could be collected Check the computer operating system integrity Verify that the RTDAQ system configuration files exist and the directory has not been corrupted Message Text Add record failed Collect area skipped warning Collect area skipped error BMPI packet sent Message Parameters Table name Beginning record number End record number A reason for the failure Collect area name Collect area name The packet message type code 0 Packet Delivery Fault Notification 1 Status Warning Fault Notification 2 Network Description Transaction 3 Clock Check Set Transaction 4 Program Down load Transaction 5 Program Up load Transaction 7 Data Advise Command Transaction 8 Data Advise Notification Packet 9 Hole Collection Command Transaction 10 Control Command Set Variable Transaction 11 User I O Transaction Terminal Mode 12 Memory Image Down lo
228. eration When a program with one or more Fie dCal instructions is running on a datalogger and RTDAQ is connected to that datalogger you can select Datalogger Calibration Wizard from the RTDAQ menu to start the Wizard A list of measurements referenced from one or more FieldCal instructions used within the program is then displayed to the user The user selects a measurement for calibration and moves forward by entering known values if necessary and triggering calibration steps 9 6 2 Using the Wizard to Perform Two Point Multiplier and Offset Calibrations NOTE To perform a two point calibration using the Wizard run a program in your datalogger utilizing a two point multiplier offset in the FieldCal instruction Connect to your datalogger and choose Calibration Wizard from the Datalogger menu The steps for performing a two point slope only multiplier only calibration in the Wizard are nearly identical to those for a two point multiplier and offset calibration Only a two point multiplier and offset calibration example will be shown here Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X Network Tools Help Disconnect File View MBES ae ai Update Table Definitions Status Table File Control Calibration Wizard Terminal Emulator ata Collect Data Ea ae sa itor Y Graph Fast Graph CR800S eres
229. eresesreerereeses 6 16 6 5 7 Rainflow Histogram Setup Dialog BOX eeceesceseeeeteereeeeenes 6 17 6 5 8 Fast Fourier Transform esesessesesesseseseseeseressesesececnenseseneeereesenees 6 19 6 5 9 FFT Setup Dialog BOX S reestiies apoca seriea enei ani aeaa 6 20 6 6 1 Selection D nnira eroinei reii e i 6 22 10 3 1 Data File sccaiisac eect ee EO ae 10 13 10 372 FSL Filets ssi a a a A e casei 10 14 10 3 3 Input File Template iinne ionene 10 15 10 3 4 DATA FILE LABELS Screen o0 cei cceeeseeescneeeeceseeeeeseeeeeeeene 10 16 10 3 5 Pasting Values into Split seseseeeeeseeeeeeesesrsesrrerereresrsrsrrerereeses 10 16 10 3 6 Pasting Labels Into Split eeseeeseseseeesessseeessesrsresresrrressrsrrereere 10 17 10 3 7 Edited Headings ics reco tto anaro eea i ee 10 18 10 3 8 Split Run Showing Hourly Data seseeeeeeeeeeeseseersrrrrereeeersrreee 10 19 10 3 9 Offsets Options rs r ei eee a ape i eea 10 21 10 3 10 Example of a Specific Byte Count ssseeeeeeeseeeeeesrrerereerersesree 10 22 10 3 11 Example of a Stop Offset sseeseeeeeseeeeseereereesrsrrerrrrererserserreee 10 22 10 3 12 Output File Template eeecsesecneeeeceseeeessecaeeeeeereeenaees 10 51 10 3 13 Other Output File Options cece eeeeeeeceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 10 53 Tables 5 4 1 Formats for Output Data cee eeeccesecreesecneeeecneeeeceaeeeeeseeneeeeen 5 21 5 4 2 Formats for Entering Numbers in CRBasiIc cceeeseee
230. ert it to ASCII select Burst in the File Info box Once Burst is selected the Number of Values in Each Burst window in the Offset Menu will become accessible Enter the number of elements in each Burst This number does not include the array ID number or calibration data e Reading Data in Final Storage Binary Format If the data is in binary format and Start and Stop Offsets are used Final Storage Binary Format must be selected in the File Info field This tells Split that the file must be decoded as Final Storage before counting the bytes If Offsets are not used Auto Detect may be chosen and the file will be processed correctly 10 3 3 2 Start Condition NOTE NOTE A starting point may be specified to begin processing data If the Start Condition field is left blank Split will start processing data at the beginning of the data file The starting point can be any element within the array or a combination of elements within an array The font for Start Condition Stop Condition Copy and Select can be changed from the Options menu The syntax can be expressed as e val where e the position number of the element within the array val the value of that element For example the data in Table 10 3 1 contains seven elements per Output Array representing hourly data Assume that this data file contains one month of hourly data To start processing data at 1500 hours on the first day the Start Condition is expressed
231. es the ability to change that computer level address 4 6 5 Tools Menu 4 6 5 1 Auxiliary Applications Use the items on the Tools menu to launch the auxiliary programs including the RTMC applications View Pro Split CardConvert Short Cut CRBasic Editor and the CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator ProgGen Some users prefer using the keyboard instead of the mouse The Alt T keystroke is provided to facilitate keyboard access These applications are described in more detail later in this manual as described below 4 17 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 18 4 6 5 2 Options 4 6 5 3 LogTool RTMC Development RTMC Pro RTMC Runtime See Chapter 8 Using RTMC in RTDAQ ViewPro See Section 6 Viewing Historical Data with ViewPro Split See Section 10 Using Split CardConvert See Section 10 Using CardConvert ShortCut See Chapter 5 Short Cut CRBasic Editor See Section 5 Program Creation with the CRBasic Editor ProgGen See Section 5 Program Creation with the RTDAQ Program Generator The following two options can be set to control the general operation of RTDAQ Automatically Check Datalogger Status This option allows you to determine when the datalogger status table is automatically checked The options include After Connection After Program Send and or On Interval The status values checked include the following PakBus Address WatchDog Errors Skipped Scans Skipped Slow Scans Skipped Records Variable Out of
232. eseeeeeeees 5 22 5 4 3 Synonyms for True and False eeseseseecseeeecneeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeens 5 23 5 4 4 Rules for Names nasrin i e eni ai eiea iioi 5 24 9 2 1 The FieldCal Instruction Family 0 0 ce eeeecceseecesseceeeeecneeeeeeenees 9 2 10 3 1 Comma Separated Field Formatted Printable ASCII and Table Oriented ASCII Input File Format Types cc ceceeeeeeseeee 10 20 10 3 2 Example of Event Driven Test Data Set eee ceeeeeneeeeeeeee 10 30 10 3 3 Processed Data File Using Option Cu ee eeeeeesecreeeecneeeeeeeees 10 31 10 3 4 Input File Entries to Process the First Data Point for each Test 10 32 10 3 5 Effects of Out of Range Values for Given Output Options 10 33 10 3 6 Split Operators and Math Functions 10 35 10 3 7 Time Series Functions 0 0 0 ees eecesecseeeecneeeeceseeeeeseceeeseeneeeeeeaees 10 37 10 3 8 Split SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ee ceseecseeeecneeeeceseeeesseeneeeeens 10 42 RTDAQ Table of Contents Section 1 Introduction RTDAQ Real time Data Acquisition is a software application targeted to industrial and other high speed data collection implementations which utilize Campbell Scientific s dataloggers RTDAQ replaces PC9000 as the company s flagship product offering in the industrial marketplace This software supports configuration programming communications and data collection for the majority of dataloggers utilizing the CRBasic datalogger programming language Support is inclu
233. ess 1 New Open 2 Sensors 3 Outputs 4 Finish Wiring Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds DER Available Sensors am16 32 Sensors Generic Measurements E Differential voltage E Full Bridge E Single Ended voltage E vibrating Wire Meteorological Selected Sensors Measurements Default Batty C5105 cs210 BP_mmHg Enc_RH HMP3S5C AirTC N Soil Moisture 223 Soil Moisture Senso E 253 Soil Moisture Senso E CS615 Water Content R E CS616 Water Content R Temperature E 107 Temperature Probe 3 E 107 Temperature Probe 4 El 1na Tamneratiira Drnhe 2 gt AM16 32 not wired User Entered AirTF Wiring Diagram Wiring Text lt CR1000 AM16 32 DSS evice Edit Remove Vaisala HMP35C Temperature and Relative Humidity Sensor Units for Air Temperature Deg C Deg F K Units for Relative Humidity 96 You can then add sensors to that device just as you would to the main datalogger When doing so Short Cut may ask how many sensors to measure Multiple Sensors How many 107 Temperature Probe 3 wire sensors do you want to add There is room for 48 adjacent sensors It will limit the number you can add to the available terminals on the device and it will add the number of measurements you request with unique measurement names to the list on the right side of the screen Note that once you add a sensor to a multiplexer it
234. est par Input file inputla dat Output file output prn Other outputs Output HTML Start condition on or after 1200 Stop condition end of file Copy condition none Elements 1 through 6 10 3 6 4 Processing Multiple Parameter Files with One Command Line More than one PAR file can be executed with a single Splitr command line Each PAR file and its associated parameters are separated from the next PAR file by a semicolon with one space on each side For example SPLITR LOGAN R TEST DAT TEST PRN SINKS R TEST1 DAT TEST2 DAT 1 189 executes the LOGAN PAR file on TEST DAT and outputs the results to TEST PRN then executes the SINKS PAR file on TEST1 DAT and outputs the results to TEST2 DAT Execution of SINKS PAR starts when the first element in TEST1 DAT is 189 10 4 Log Files and the LogTool Application 10 4 1 Event Logging 10 62 As RTDAQ performs its work it can create records of various kinds of events and store them in ASCII log files These logs can be very useful for troubleshooting problems and monitoring the operation of the datalogger network You can monitor these logs using a built in tool called LogTool accessible from the Tools LogTool menu item or open these log files in a simple text editor Most users will not need to understand these logs but if you request technical assistance a Campbell Scientific application engineer may ask you to send them one or more of the logs Section 10 Util
235. eter to bring up help for that parameter Right click a block of text that is highlighted to bring up a short cut menu with the following options e Comment Uncomment Block Only one of these options will be available depending upon the status of the highlighted text If the text has been marked as a comment you can choose to uncomment it If the text is not commented you can chose to make it into a comment Commented text has a single quote at the beginning of the line Comments are ignored by the datalogger s compiler e Decrease Increase Indent You can increase or decrease the indention of the selected text The spacing is increased or decreased by one e Cut Copy Paste Delete Standard editing functions can be accessed through this menu 5 3 Toolbar Section 5 Program Creation and Editing The toolbar of the CRBasic Editor provides easy access to frequently used operations 4 CRBasic Editor C CR5000 Proprams flags as hoolean CR i forthe CRIO00 Sear Compile Template Instruction Goto Window Tools Help PSA HAAA as Declare Variables and Aliases in program Public PTemp TCTemp 2 Setme 2 Public Flag 14 As Boolean Public Text As String 25 Alias Flag 1 test HIF Alias Flag 2 Test2 Define output tables DataTable Test True 1 S DataInterval 0 5 Sec 10 iad Sample 2 TCTemp 1 FP2 gt gt meTemp FP2 False False pene tee gt ee
236. ettings of the datalogger 1 Connect the RS 232 port on the datalogger NOT the CS KO port to a serial port on your computer 2 Remove power from the datalogger 3 Make sure that the appropriate serial port is selected in the left panel and click the Start button below 4 In the resulting file open dialogue box select the file that should be Sending Fragment at offset 296970 Serial Port M Baud Rate ULLLLLLLLL When the operating system has been sent to the device a message dialog will appear similar to the one shown below OS Send Complete The operating system file C CS Installs CR1000 Std 15 obj has been sent Its signature is 44345 0xAD39 All of the device settings including the PakBus address have been reset to their factory defaults The files on the CPU have also been deleted The information in the dialog helps to corroborate the signature of the operating system sent 10 2 4 Terminal Tab The Terminal tab will be available when the application is connected to any device type that can be communicated within a remote terminal mode The Terminal tab offers a terminal emulator that can be useful in accessing settings or status information that are not exposed in other windows For example the status table in a CR1000 can also be accessed via a 3 command in terminal 10 9 Section 10 Utilities mode This status information can provide important data for troubleshootin
237. evels of access e g only allow data retrieval or also allow monitoring of values or also allow sending a new program or setting the clock by entering multiple levels Datalogger security is not meant to be extremely tight Rather it is designed to prevent honest people from making mistakes Notwithstanding its intention one mistake you can make is to set security and then forget the values If you send a program with security set you will then need to add that security setting to LoggerNet s Setup window for that datalogger If you don t you may find that you can no longer communicate with the datalogger Should this happen and you forget the security code and have lost the Short Cut program file you may have to visit the datalogger site and cycle power on the datalogger to be able to communicate with it Most dataloggers that offer security will communicate over their CS I O port directly with a keyboard display or PC in the first few seconds of powering up See the datalogger manual for a full description of the security features Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 3 3 Datalogger ID Mixed array dataloggers keep a memory location available for a datalogger ID value This is typically an integer that you can read from within the program and store into final storage to keep track of the identity of the datalogger that created the data Valid Datalogger IDs are through 12 and 14 through 254 Use the Datalogger ID instructio
238. ewing datalogger data in near real time After the Monitor Data tab is selected these options show as buttons which open separate windows when pressed 1 3 Section 1 Introduction RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File Yiew Datalogger Network Tools Help Kun 3 OD ABBAA Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data x 7 m Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph xY Plot FFT Histo CR1000 Field Monitor iy e The status of ports flags or any boolean variables can be monitored and controlled within the Ports and Flags window e The Table Monitor allows quick numeric viewing of entire output tables e With both the Graph and Fast Graph graphical data traces from a datalogger can be monitored in a window width as small as 1 millisecond with resolution support for individual points up to 100 KHz l Fast Graph 1 Selected Fields MeasZA 1 Add Delete Graph Width 00h 00 m 03s 200 ms Collect Mode Graph All Data O Newest Record 1 Drawing Mode Strip Chart Shift Data Options Clear Shift FilandStop Stat 9 28 17 AM 9 28 17 AM 9 28 18 AM 9 28 19 AM e The XY Plot allows up to four values to be plotted against another measured value other than the timestamp e With the Fast Fourier Transform viewer both single valued amplitude or power spectrum and dual valued real imaginary or amplitude phase FFT sp
239. expressions from the number that determines the interval Sample on maximum and sample on minimum require two elements or expressions also separated by a semicolon 10 3 3 7 Output Files 10 50 To create an Output File click the OUTPUT FILE tab The file is created on the default drive or directory unless the file name is preceded with an alternative drive or directory Use the Browse button to change directories Split will assign this file an extension of PRN if an extension is not specified by the user Whenever an Output file name is entered regardless of extension an Output file is created only when the RUN GO menu option is selected If the file name you have selected already exists you can use the If File Exists Then drop down list box to determine what action Split will take By default each time a PAR file is run the existing output files PRN RPT and HTM are overwritten Overwrite option When Append is selected the PRN file will not be overwritten the new data will be added to the end of the existing file However the RPT and HTM files will be overwritten If Create New is selected Split will create all new files using the original file name and appending an _0 _1 and so on to each subsequent run Section 10 Utilities In Append mode if an HTM or RPT file is needed with all the data you will need to run the PRN created by Split through the program a second time If the Output File name is left blank Split
240. f range limits are used in the Select condition when Split is run any data which are outside of the specified range will be highlighted according to the options chosen for the output file Table 10 3 5 summarizes what each option produces on the screen and in the output file if out of range data are encountered This type of range testing is a quick way to identify data problems Screen Display bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen PRN File blanks inserted for bad values blanks inserted for bad values abc inserted in place of bad values comment inserted in place of bad values RPT File or Printer Output N A bad values preceded by asterisk bad values preceded by asterisk 10 33 Section 10 Utilities Output Option RPT File or Printer Output Screen Display PRN File Report None only lines with bad data are displayed only lines with N A Display only bad data bad values displayed in red and bad data output option enabled
241. fail to run the compiled binary BIN program LoggerNet and Short Cut are installed with precompilers for all of the released versions of the CR200 205 operating systems If at some time in the future you acquire a newer CR200 205 or choose to install a later operating system you must make sure you also have the compiler executable that matches These compiler executables are typically installed in library directory By default this directory would be installed as C Campbellsci Lib CR200Compilers If you receive an operating system update you should copy the compiler associated with it to this directory If for some reason you put the compiler in a different directory this menu item provides a way to choose that compiler executable 5 41 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 3 6 CR9000X Configuration If you wish to add modules to a CR9000X this option provides that opportunity It provides the same dialog box as when you are creating a new program see Section 5 5 2 1 Note however that when editing a program modules can be added but not removed 5 5 3 7 Sensor Support The Sensor Support option is used to select which group of sensor files will be displayed when creating a program Campbell Scientific Inc CSI or Campbell Scientific Ltd CSL The standard set of Short Cut sensor files was created by CSI however CSL has created some additional files that are customized for their client base When one opt
242. ffered data using a right button drag operation to move backward or forward within the time frame of the captured buffer The Time Display section allows you to control how time is displayed below the graph for the x axis You can show the date and time for each point or just the time Alternately you can suppress the time display completely The Numeric Data Display section controls whether or not the x axis shows milliseconds in its timestamp values With the Data Precision setting you can control how many decimal places are shown numerically for the trace values in the Selected Fields section of the main graph screen Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 4 9 3 Visual Display Options Select the Visual Display tab to modify chart colors and configure the titles on the graph Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Chart Colors Titles Back Wall Color a C Show Graph Title ZS Left Grid Color LJ C Show Left Axis Title Right Grid Color E ka F Show Right Axis Title E The Chart Colors section allows you to set the color for the back wall of the graph set the color of the Left Grid scale or set the color of the Right Grid Use the Titles section to set up titles to show along the graphed data displayed on the screen You may elect to show a title for the entire graph specifying the text to display and the font used to display it You can also set up a title
243. fied device e F Fault Indicates that the identified operation has failed and that the server has stopped retrying Description text providing more details about the event Communications Status Log Example 6 9 2004 04 59 40 PM CR23XPB S BMP5 message received type 0x89 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM PakBusPort_2 S sending message src 4093 dest 3 proto BMP5 type 0x09 tran 73 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM PakBusPort_2 S received message src 3 dest 4093 proto BMP5 type 0x89 tran 73 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM CR23XPB S BMP5 message received type 0x89 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM PakBusPort_2 S sending message src 4093 dest 3 proto BMP5 type 0x09 tran 74 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM PakBusPort_2 S received message src 3 dest 4093 proto BMP5 type 0x89 tran 74 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM CR23XPB S BMP5 message received type 0x89 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM PakBusPort_2 S sending message src 4093 dest 3 proto BMP5 type 0x09 tran 75 6 9 2004 04 59 42 PM PakBusPort_2 S received message src 3 dest 4093 proto BMP5 type 0x89 tran 75 10 76 Message Text Serial packet X exchanged Classic Cmd BMPI packet received RPC packet exchanged Datalogger did not respond to end command Invalid low level signature Provider opened Device dialed Provider closed Unable to Locate Serial synch byte Message Meaning The low level
244. files backed up as described above will allow you to recover more effectively if a problem occurs If a file does get corrupted all of the server s working files need to be restored from a backup file to maintain synchronization with the server state Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen a This section provides an overview of RTDAQ including a detailed description of the communications tabs pull down menus and toolbar An overview of RTDAQ s troubleshooting tools is also provided 4 1 Overview 4 1 1 Program Startup and Main Screen Functionality To start RTDAQ go to the Start menu of the computer and select the RTDAQ icon under Start Programs RTDAQ You can also use the shortcut on the desktop if you elected to create one during the installation process RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Wi corea R E r D A Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data i Datalogger Information cRio00 Datalogger Name CR1000 Datalogger Type CR1000 Datalogger Direct Connect Connection Re COM Port COM3 CR800S eries Pause Clock Update Datalogger Settings Clocks Baud Rate 115200 Pa Aee 2 Datalogger Time Zone Offset Security Code 0 Ohous Om 2 00S Bann Extra Response Time Os BREEN Max Time Online Od Oh Om Datalogger Program Current Program Disconnected Setting up and configuring RTDAQ to communicate with datalogge
245. for the name of the sensors you have If your sensor is not shown you may be able to measure it with a generic measurement Contact your Campbell Scientific application engineer for more assistance if needed You add sensors to your program by double clicking them or selecting them and clicking the arrow in the middle of the screen Most sensors will require you to at least review the default settings for that measurement including the measurement name units etc An example of choosing the CS105 Barometric Pressure Sensor is below 5 31 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 32 Measurement units Measurement name Notes specific to this sensor CS105 Barometric Pressure Sensor Version 3 4 Sea Level Elevation Elevation Correction Units O Feet Meters Measure sensor Hourly O Every Scan C5105 Barometric Pressure Sensor Units for Pressure kPa mbar hPa mmHg Torr inHg psi atm If you choose to measure this sensor hourly option not available for CR5000 rather then every scan your scan interval must be evenly divisible into an hour Note that this sensor not only offers a custom name field and units but also allows you to correct for sea level a common practice in measuring atmospheric pressure In the middle of the screen look over the notes or refer to the Help for this sensor for this sensor may require other sensors or have limitations When you choose OK S
246. function produces an output of June 1 00 00 hours The date can be stopped from rolling forward by using the No Date Advance check box The output will then be similar to Array ID Year Julian Day Hour Minute Date Function Data Data 2002 151 2200 05 31 02 22 00 1 701 193 6 2002 151 2300 05 31 02 23 00 1 476 31 99 2002 151 2400 05 31 02 00 00 1 123 106 2 Caution should be used when applying the date function and enabling or disabling No Date Advance since it is possible to produce an incorrect date For instance using the above example if you were to enter the following into your select line 3 edate hh mm 4 3 2 with the No Date Advance enabled you would get the output 151 22 00 1 701 193 6 151 23 00 1 476 31 99 151 00 00 1 123 106 2 If you were to enter edate mm dd yy 4 3 2 4 6 7 with the No Date Advance disabled you would get the output 05 31 02 2200 1 701 193 6 05 31 02 2300 1 476 31 99 06 01 02 2400 1 123 106 2 10 55 Section 10 Utilities No Dashes When the No Dashes check box is selected the dashed line that typically appears under the column headings will not be displayed This option affects all output types PRN RPT HTM and printed page No Summary Heading When processing data using time series functions see No Summary above select this option to prevent the Time Series Heading and Column Headings from being printed at the bottom of the report The left over summary data will still be p
247. g purposes Device Configuration Utility 1 10 File Language Help Device Type Serial Port M Baud Rate CR1000 gt 3 Size of Status 3592 OSVersion OSDate OSS5ignature SerialNumber RevBoard StationName PakBusdddress ProgName StartTime RunSignature ProgSignature Battery PanelTemp WatchdogErrors LithiumBattery Lowil2VCount Low5 Count CompileResults StartUpCode ProgErrors MOLE Deployment Logger Control Data Monitor Send O5 Settings Editor Terminal CR1000 Stda 15 080115 44345 1378 008 007 1378 1 2008 02 01 15 55 54 990000 0 0 12 89538 24 16021 0 3 44689 0 0 No Program o 1 Pause Start Export Send File The default for the Terminal tab is to only show characters that are returned from the device However if the Echo Input check box is enabled the screen will also display the characters actually typed by the user The All Caps check box controls whether the keyboard input will be forced to upper case before the characters are sent to the device It will be disabled for some device types that require upper case input 10 10 Section 10 Utilities 10 2 5 The Unknown Device Type 10 3 Split NOTE When the Unknown Device type is selected a panel will be shown in the tab control similar to that shown below Device Configuration Utility 1 10 DAR Eile Language Help Device Type Unkn
248. g the second point calibration process Note that the mode variable is set to 6 by the datalogger when the calibration process completes successfully 9 7 Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 9 5 Generating Calibration Programs The RTDAQ Program Generator can be used to create CR5000 or CR9000X programs with zeroing or two point multiplier and offset calibration Set up zeroing calibration by selecting a Zero Flag 1 8 for a measurement To set up a two point multiplier offset calibration select the Cal on site check box within a measurement detail box Offset calibration and two point multiplier only calibration are not supported in the RTDAQ Program Generator Basic field calibration options are also available when generating common generic sensor programs with Short Cut For more information on using the Program Generator and Short Cut refer to Section 5 9 6 Using the Calibration Wizard with Running 9 8 Programs The RTDAQ Calibration Wizard provides an easy to use interface which steps the user through the calibration process described above By using simple screens to gather information the proper changes to the mode variable and known measurements are performed automatically by the Wizard The user only needs to set the sensors to the known value s and provide a few required inputs to the Wizard This greatly simplifies the user s interaction with the sensors and datalogger program 9 6 1 Calibration Wizard Basic Op
249. gain choose LABELS USE FINAL STORAGE LABELS and select array 60 and all the field names This time move the cursor to Line 1 of the first column of labels on the OUTPUT FILE tab and press Paste Figure 10 3 6 The labels from the final storage file will be pasted into each of the columns Split will automatically break a label name into multiple rows at the _ in a label name Data File Labels BIRCH FSL Output Arrays 24 Select Fie BattVolt_Hr_Min_h 99 Be Encl_RH_MAX P Encl __RH_Hr_Min_ Paste LogrTemp_MAx Help Done Output Interval 60 000 Min Field Number 6 FIGURE 10 3 6 Pasting Labels Into Split Maximum column heading width is one less than the number entered in the Default Column Width field However entering a number in the Width row for the column will set the column width for an individual column Any FSL labels that are too long for Split column headings will be shown in red They should be edited before running Split To edit one of the labels press the lt Enter gt key or use a mouse to copy cut and paste A Report Heading can also be entered Figure 10 3 7 using the same editing technique 10 17 Section 10 Utilities Column Element Field Filename E ine 1 ine 2 Li ine 3 Decimal 4 10 18 Report Heading Report and Column Headings Hourly Data so C NEEMA NOTE irchCreek_1 d BirchCreek_1 q BirchCreek_1 q BirchCreek_1 Bat
250. ge Output File from the CardConvert menu and browse for or type in a new path and or filename You can apply a directory path change to all files by selecting Options Apply Directory to All You do not have to convert all files that are found in the selected directory Select one or more files for conversion by selecting or clearing the check box beside the individual file name If a box is checked the file will be converted if a box is cleared the file will not be converted To quickly select or clear all check boxes choose Options Check All or Clear Check All from the CardConvert menu The list of files displayed for a particular drive or directory can be updated by selecting Options Rebuild File Lists from the menu Any new files that have been stored since you last selected the drive or since the last rebuild will be added to the list Tip Right click within the file list to display a shortcut menu containing the items on the Options menu 10 1 2 Destination File Options The Destination File Options determine whether the data will be stored on the PC in ASCII or binary format how filemarks will be processed and what should happen when existing files with the same name are found 10 1 2 1 File Format 10 2 The File Format is used to specify the format in which the data file should be saved Select the desired option from the list box ASCII Table Data TOAS Data is stored in an ASCII comma separated format Heade
251. ger from the menu The EZ Setup Wizard will appear allowing you to select and configure your new datalogger 4 3 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen EZSetup Wizard CR9000X_2 CR9000X Progress Introduction Introduction pesos The EZSetup wizard will guide you Communication Setup through the process of setting up your datalogger Follow the instructions given and use the Datalogger Settings 4 5 Previous and Next buttons below to y J navigate through the wizard Setup Summary 1 i Click Next to continue Communication Test Datalogger Clock Send Program Wizard Complete Cancel Wizard Help Previous and Next buttons are provided for easy movement through the Wizard Progress is shown by the blue arrow next to each step displayed on the left of the screen Help is available from the Help button as well as the text displayed on the right side of the screen 4 2 2 Communication Setup In the Communication Setup step you select the datalogger type and give it a name that will also become the default file name for data files collected from that datalogger You may set up connections for the following loggers CR9000X CR5000 CR1000 CR3000 and the CR800 Series which includes both the CR800 and CR850 The next step allows you to choose from the communications media that are available for the datalogger RTDAQ will display the serial ports COM ports known to your Windows operating system R
252. ght click on a field in the Selected Fields section of the Graph and choose Trace Options a screen will appear like this Trace Options Display Marks Color Select Axis Line width Wo ie an A Line Style Symbol Style Solid Line Circle v 7 26 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 4 9 4 2 Using Marks on the Graph You can select the Marks tab if you want markers to show on the graph and control how they are shown Marks can contain information about a specific point such as its value on the current y axis or the timestamp that applies to that point Check the Show Marks check box to use marks on the graph Select the Round Frame check box if the corners of the mark should be round instead of pointed square Choose the Transparent check box if you wish the background of each mark to be transparent the same color as the graph background Set the Draw Every spin box with a value greater than 1 if you wish for only some of the points to display an associated mark A setting of 1 will display a mark on every point You can also choose the color and fill style of the box in which the markings text is shown with the Color and Style selections Use the Style drop down box to determine what information from each axis will be displayed Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Display Marks C Show Marks Draw Every C Round Frame CI T
253. gram details including error information if any battery voltage levels and card memory if one is present Right click within this window to display a menu for printing the summary or saving this information in a file 4 6 3 3 2 Table Fill Times The Table Fill Times tab lists the tables in the datalogger along with the maximum number of records the table can hold the estimated amount of time that it will take the table to fill and the estimated date and time that the table will fill based on the time the datalogger program was downloaded and the table size This fill information helps the user determine the collection schedule that should be performed on the datalogger Data should be collected no less frequently than a user can afford to lose it A data table can be reset from this window by pressing the Reset Tables button Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen NOTE Resetting a table will erase the data in the datalogger and in the data cache 4 6 3 3 3 Status Table Tab The Status Table tab lists all of the status table fields in the datalogger along with their values By default all of the fields in the status table are displayed To select only certain status data to be viewed press the Select Fields button This will display a list of the status fields available in the datalogger Select one or more of the fields and then press OK The current values will be displayed in the table A right click on the table displays a context menu
254. h or statements Additionally each or statement can contain up to three and conditions As with the and statements if the maximum number of valid statements is exceeded an error message will be displayed These rules for logical statements also apply to the Stop and Copy Conditions An example of a simple logical and statement follows 2 189 and3 1200 Element two the Julian day must equal 189 and element three the time in hours minutes must equal 1200 If the following and statement was used 2 189 and3 1200 and4 92 and5 67 an error would be returned because the maximum number of allowable and statements has been exceeded A range can be specified for val by putting between the lower and upper limit For example 2 189 and7 200 275 In this example two conditions must be satisfied to start processing data First the day of year must be 189 and second element 7 must be between 200 to 275 degrees inclusive Section 10 Utilities 10 3 3 2 1_ Time Synchronization The time synchronize function is useful when data are missing from files or several files of data need to be merged together The files are synchronized according to time This function synchronizes according to day hrmn hour minute and or seconds The syntax used to identify the time elements for array data is e day e hrmn e seconds Referring to Table 10 3 1 to identify the day of year for a mi
255. hare the same basic file format Each record in a log file ends with a carriage return and line feed A single record will consist of two or more fields where each field is surrounded by quotation marks and separated by commas The two fields that will be present in all records are Timestamp The server time when the record was generated It will have the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS mmm where YYYY is the 4 digit year MM is the month number DD is the day of the month HH is the hour in the day 24 hour format MM is the minutes into the hour SS is the seconds into the minute and mmm is the milliseconds into the second Device Name The name of the device associated with the message If the message is associated with the RTDAQ communications server this will be an empty string 10 4 1 2 2 Transaction Log Format 10 64 Each record in the transaction log includes at least two fields in addition to the timestamp and device name Message Type Code Identifies the type of event that has occurred This is a number that corresponds to the description immediately following If this log is being read by a software program a number is very easy to use for comparison when looking for specific message types Message Type Description Text that describes the message type code The following table is a list of the different messages that can appear in the transaction log some of the optional parameters and wh
256. he RF base indicating that a BMPI message didn t make it to the data logger As part of data collection the server has detected a change in the datalogger s table definitions Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message This is an indication that the configuration file has been corrupted Check the network map and the computer file system This may be due to a problem with directory permissions or a corrupted directory Codes 1 and 3 are rare If ever seen contact an application engineer at Campbell Scientific Code 2 indicates that the RF base has lost the network map and doesn t know how to route the message The server automatically resends the network map Code 4 is an indication that the RF base was not able to communicate with the RF modem attached to the datalogger These will happen occasionally as part of normal operations Frequent occurrences indicate that the radio antenna connectors and RF link be reviewed A change in table definitions indicates that the datalogger program may have changed This will suspend data collection and warnings will be shown in the Status Monitor Data Collection can only be restored by updating table definitions Before updating table 10 69 Section 10 Utilities Message Text A device setting value has changed A LgrNet setting value has changed Client defined message Socket listen failed Message Parameters Setting
257. he scale to be automatically chosen each time the screen is drawn Choose the Custom Limits option to set the values in the input boxes of the Custom Limits section to obtain a scaling with the user specified maximum and minimum values Choose the Logarithmic check box to use a logarithmic scale for the current axis NOTE When using logarithmic scaling the minimum value may not be zero or less than zero 7 22 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time To set up the right y axis select that tab from the Scaling screen Configure the right y axis just as described for the y axis above NOTE When you display items from two different tables you may need two different y axes in order to interpret the data properly 7 4 9 2 Data Display Options Select the Data Display tab to adjust flow direction plotting options numeric display time and buffering options Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Save Data Flow Time Display Right to Left Show Date and Time Left to Right Display Time Only Hide the Timestamp Plotting Options Line Only Numeric Data Display Poised Lite C Show Milliseconds Points Only Data Precision 2 Buffer Options C Buffer Data Number of Pages to Buffer The Data Flow section allows you to control whether the data on the graph populates the screen from right to left or from left to right The Plotting Options section allows you to specify how the points
258. he screen and continue forward Press the Fill and Stop button instead of the Start button if you would like the Graph window to show values only for the current Graph Width setting and then stop The data remains on the display for further investigation by the user To remove an item from the graph highlight that item in the Selected Fields area and press the Delete button You may also right click on the item to be deleted and select Delete from the menu 7 4 5 Zooming and Scaling the Graph Window You can zoom in on the graphical area of the RealTime Graph Click and drag the mouse to define a rectangle that becomes the zoomed to display area after you release the mouse button When you are zoomed in on the graph the Undo Zoom button appears in the upper right corner of the display Pressing this button will remove the zooming and return the graph to its original display configuration zoom level Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 18 NOTE E Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields FFTView FTs 1 I 0 01 FFTView_FTs 2 0 00 FFTView_FTs 3 0 00 T i T If you have stopped a graph and then zoom in on a region you can right click on the mouse button to drag the screen and thus scroll to other locations of the graph at the current zoom level The Undo Zoom button will restore the original screen location after this kind of scroll You can adjust the Graph Width to select how mu
259. hese logs requires knowledge of both Campbell Scientific protocols as well as other lower level protocols and requires a detailed understanding of what is 4 19 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen supposed to be happening Most users will only need to access these logs when requested to do so by Campbell Scientific support personnel For more information about the content of these logs see Section 10 4 6 5 4 PakBus Graph PakBus Graph is a utility that graphically depicts the connections in a PakBus datalogger network It provides a look at RTDAQ s PakBus routing table In addition the utility can be used to change the settings of a PakBus device The window for PakBus graph is divided into three sections the list of PakBus devices a graphical depiction of the PakBus network and the log messages for PakBus communications The list of devices and the log can be toggled off by clearing the Show List View and Show Log options respectively Software servers are identified in PakBus Graph by the color green Other devices remain colorless unless they have been selected with the mouse cursor When selected they are colored cyan The default PakBus address for RTDAQ is 4090 Other PakBus devices will be shown by name and address if known PakBus Graph PakBusPort File Yiew PakBus Network Help PakBus Network PakBusPort v Show List View Show Log Show Hop Metrics Ll Sort by name 3 CR3000 a Log Messages ae 4090
260. hese options can also be set from the dialog box that is brought up when the Print button is pressed or from the Print Preview screen 6 7 2 Printing Text To print numerical data press the Print button or select File Print from the menu A dialog box will appear allowing you to choose the printer print range number of copies etc After setting the properties press OK to print the data To preview your data before printing press the Print Preview button or select File Print Preview from the menu From Print Preview you can browse among the pages that will be printed and change the paper orientation if desired You can zoom in on a particular area of the previewed page by left clicking the page You can zoom out by left clicking with the Shift button pressed You can pan across a page by right clicking and dragging the page To return to normal view choose the Page Width or the Full Page icon Simply press the Print button on the toolbar to print one or more pages See the online help for details of the Print Preview options 6 7 3 Printing Graphs With a graph window opened click the Print button to preview the printed page and set various printing options Then select the Print button to print the graph You can also right click the graph to bring up a menu from which you can select Print 6 8 View Pro Online Help 6 24 View Pro has an online help system that can be accessed by choosing Help View Pro from
261. hill Chill m s deg C deg F 14 756 2 6172 438 06 13 148 510 3 666 14 156 3 6967 489 58 10 813 51 463 13 806 3 4643 491 34 10 733 51 319 13 639 3 3972 493 4 10 64 51 151 13 65 4 6533 529 57 9 0005 48 201 12 961 4 0185 530 58 8 9547 48 118 13 306 4 2554 528 27 9 0596 48 307 14 511 2 9448 456 04 12 333 54 199 110 3 439 2 4397 414 97 14 194 57 55 16 161 2 066 383 21 110 3 633 60 14 16 3 2 6489 402 08 14 778 58 601 110 3 894 3 0463 4210 3 2 13 731 56 715 16 117 3 7325 439 59 13 078 510 3 541 16 072 4 8812 468 26 11 779 53 202 16 833 3 7682 421 85 13 882 56 988 17 639 3 9694 4010 3 59 14 619 58 314 18 972 3 5626 361 39 16 622 61 92 19 628 3 0208 331 76 17 965 64 337 19 217 3 1648 3410 3 62 17 337 63 207 18 067 3 9157 393 08 110 3 186 59 335 110 3 467 10 3 2791 493 51 10 635 51 142 13 439 6 9821 584 71 6 5016 43 703 13 044 7 6526 607 86 10 3 4526 41 815 12 9 10 3 3014 566 29 7 3368 410 3 206 Reference Wind Chill Errors Edwin Kessler Bulletin of the American Meteorology Society Vol 74 No 9 September 1993 pp 1743 1744 10 3 3 6 8 Summary of Select Line Syntax Rules wou A fixed numeric value must include a decimal point or be in scientific notation There are some exceptions to this as noted below Scientific notation has the format mantissa E power of ten e g 3E5 3 x 10 Element numbers are entered without a decimal point Commas separate Select line parameters e g 2 3 3 4 3 2 6 Two decimal poin
262. hort Cut adds the necessary instructions with appropriate multipliers and offsets At any time you may choose a measurement label on the right side of the screen and edit it or remove it In addition to actual sensors Short Cut provides functionality to perform various calculations and effect some simple control Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw File Program Tools Help Progress 1 New Open gt 2 Sensors 3 Outputs 4 Finish Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds Wind Speed amp Direction Miscellaneous Sensors Temperature a Water Calculations amp Control Calculations Sensors Measurements Default Batt E 24 Hour Running Total E Dew Point E Dew Point and Wet Bulb E Heat Index E Offset Calculation E User Entered Wind Chill E Wind Run Control E Alarm w Silence Alarm Flac Fl eaninn nci 746 calhilar oY gt Wiring Wiring Diagram Wiring Text CT a oc This module allows the datalogger to act as a simple controller An example is controlling a portable automated water sampler Choose ON above upper and set the Upper Limit to the desired trigger level When the water level rises above this level a control port will come on and enable a sampler to begin running its storm mode Some of these calculations may require additional sensors or sensor measurements stored in particular u
263. ibration Set the sensor s to the zero position Field Name Current Value 2295 85 1 1 6 RTMC Development Runtime and Pro Development Seamless integration with the RTMC and RTMC Pro product line allows creation of data monitoring and control screens for individual dataloggers Custom screens are created using the RTMC Development program or the RTMC Pro Development program Section 1 Introduction 1 1 7 View Pro amp RIMC Development New Project Eile Edit Yiew Project Screen Component Window Help lem Bane Pe BE BOF BMW Som STK AO 100 0 141989 11 00PM 1 1 19901 a new_project ti Screen fi Status Bar VA Chart Switch Thermometer 402 20 Workspace Size 648 488 Execution of these screens is done with the RTMC Run time program Both programs can be started using buttons from the main RTDAQ interface RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File view Datalogger Network Tools Help Yo S37 OO AR ESRA 0000 J Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data EA gt i ca ae mle cmoo Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Field Monitor The Standard RTMC Development and RTMC Run time applications are included with RTDAQ RTMC Pro must be purchased and installed separately from RTDAQ but will operate within the RTDAQ environment after installation RTDAQ includes View Pro the professional
264. ield oo eee esesceeeeeteereeeeenees 7 34 7 6 2 3 Right Click Functionality 0 00 eceeseceseeeeeeeceereeeenees 7 34 7 6 3 Using the Control Buttons 0 ec eeeeesecneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeens 7 36 RTDAQ Table of Contents 7 6 4 Using the Graphical Display Area of the XY Plot 7 40 7 6 5 Zooming with the XY Plot eee seecseesecseeeeesecseeeecseeeeeaees 7 41 7 6 6 Using the Special Options of the XY Plot eee eeesecseeeeee 7 42 7 6 6 1 Saline Tabie a eaea eaa EAEEREN 7 43 7 6 6 2 Data Display Tabria hipiai 7 44 7 6 6 3 Visual Display Tab uu eeceeseesecseeeecneeeeceaeeeeesecneeeeens 7 45 T 0 6 4 Traced Tabie enerne era n EErEE EE RS 7 45 16 65 Save TaD aan E E E R E E RSR 7 47 7 6 7 Applying Changes to the XY Plot Screen n 7 47 TT Histogram Monitoring senen a a a E ieee 7 48 7371 isto grant Overvie W eninin e a ei 7 48 7 7 2 Displaying Histograms csseecesecsecceseceeeeecneesecaeeeesaeceeeeeens 7 48 7 8 Fast Fourier Transform Spectra 0 0 cc ccescsssscseeeceseeeeeseceeeeeeneseeeeaees 7 50 7 8 1 Brief Overview of Fourier Analysis ceeseeceseereetecreeeeeee 7 50 7 8 2 FFT vs FET Sample iissa eisereen iak esses resser eases 7 51 7 8 3 Opening FFT Viewer Windows cceeeeesccesecreeeecneeeeeneeeeeens 7 51 7 9 Configuration of FFT and Histogram Windows sccssseeseeseeeeeee 7 52 7 9 1 Moving and Resizing the FFT Histo Window cece 7 53 7 9 2 Displaying FFT Spectra or Histograms
265. ieval at a later time from the Setup tab Field Monitor Options aa Display Alarms Setup Data Display Decimal Places 2 Boolean True Text true Boolean False Text false Display Date on Timestamp s C Show Milliseconds Data Cell Justification Field Name Left Data Value Right 7 5 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 6 7 1 5 1 Display Tab In the Display tab of the Field Monitor Options screen you can set the number of decimal places for displaying data in the grid After particular cells of the grid are selected then the number of decimal places for that selection will be adjusted With this screen you can set the strings to be displayed on the data display when values are equal to boolean true or boolean false You can also decide whether to display the date on a timestamp You can set justification to left center or right for the field names and the data values in the grid 7 1 5 2 Alarms Tab In the Alarms tab you can set up alarm conditions Check the Enable Alarms check box to make the alarm configuration active Field Monitor Options Display Alarms Setup C Enable Alarms High Alarm Low Alarm Select Color Trigger Value DNC C Enable Sound L Alarm Interval OOmOls lt Choose the High Alarm tab to set up an alarm when selected values in the grid become greater than a specified value Enter the high threshold value in the Trigger Value box
266. ile Max x n Min x3n RunTotal x n Sd x n returns the maximum value of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Max 5 17 12 max WS for day Max 5 12 10 41 max WS for 12 hours 17 12 max WS for 12 hours returns the minimum value of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Min 7 4 23 min std dev of WS for day Min 3 8 510 3 33 min temp for 8 hours 59 79 min temp for 8 hours 510 3 22 min temp for 8 hours returns a running total of element x for every line in the data set If an n value is specified a running total will be output every n value Example RunTotal 5 10 3 85 14 12 21 87 29 47 39 88 48 87 166 76 182 38 199 50 211 36 211 36 Running total of hourly average wind speed provides up to the hour wind run for that day Because an n value was not specified the Final Summary output which is daily wind is the same as the total output returns the standard deviation of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Sd 3 3 6593 std dev temp for day Sd 3 8 1 011 Sd temp for 8 hours 1 1182 Sd temp for 8 hours 4 965 Sd temp for 8 hours Smpl x n Section 10 Utilities returns a sample of element x every n value Examples Smpl 4 8 23 98 RH every 8 hours 24 31 RH every 8 hours 37 13 RH every 8 hours SmpIMax x y n looks for a maximum value in element x and samples SmpIMin
267. ile is opened the columns are autosized to fit the data Column sizes can be changed by dragging a column divider bar to the desired location If column sizes have been changed they can be returned to the default sizes by selecting View Autosize Columns from the menu 6 4 Section 6 View Pro 6 4 2 Header Information By default only column names are shown for each column in the data file Selecting View Show Full Header will show full header information for each column in the data file including units and field names if available in the DAT file This is a toggle menu item There will be a check mark next to the item when it is active Deactivate it by selecting it again 6 4 3 File Information Selecting View View File Information from the menu will display information on the currently selected data file including file name and file format and information about the datalogger and program that generated the data file such as station name table name datalogger model datalogger OS version program name and program signature 6 4 4 Background Color 6 4 5 Font The background color used for the currently selected data panel can be changed by selecting View Background Color from the menu The font used for the data panel can be changed with the font selection dialog box Select View Font from the menu to change the font used for the printer and data panel Normal font options such as color bold underline and ita
268. in the window to view the program Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark to the line where the cursor resides If a bookmark already exists it will remove the bookmark Next Bookmark Moves down to the next bookmark in the program Previous Bookmark Moves backward to the previous bookmark in the program Browse Bookmarks Displays a list of all bookmarks in the program When a bookmark is selected the cursor moves to that line in the program Clear Bookmarks Erases all bookmarks from the program GoTo Moves the cursor to a particular section of the program Choose the section type from the list box that appears 5 3 1 Compile NOTE Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Compile is a function provided by the CRBasic Editor to help the programmer catch problems with the datalogger program Compile is available from the toolbar and the Compile menu When the Compile function is used the CRBasic Editor checks the program for syntax errors and other inconsistencies The results of the check will be displayed in a message window at the bottom of the main window If an error can be traced to a specific line in the program the line number will be listed before the error You can double click an error preceded by a line number and that line will be highlighted in the program editing window To move the highlight to the next error in the program press the Next Error button or choose Next Error from the Compile menu
269. in the left C5150 me panel and click the Start button below 4 In the resulting file open dialogue box select the file that should be Serial Port com Baud Rate 115200 v Start Print Instructions The text at right describes any interface devices or cabling required to connect the PC to the device Screens for other devices vary only in the text on the right side This screen differs from other screens that are available in DevConfig in that it can be accessed from either a connected and disconnected state When you click the Start button DevConfig offers a file open dialog box to prompt you for the operating system file usually a obj file You may be required to cycle power to the device or press a special program button When the device issues the appropriate prompts DevConfig starts to send the operating system 10 8 Section 10 Utilities Device Configuration Utility 1 10 File Language Help Device Type Send 05 CR1000 OS Download Instructions This page is used to download an operating system to the CR1000 using the datalogger s boot code As a result of this process the datalogger will reset all of its memory including programs data and settings Alternatively the operating system can be sent to the datalogger by connecting to the datalogger and using the Logger Control tab This alternative method is more likely although not guaranteed to preserve the programming and s
270. in_b eme a Strie Start Condition 7 F Encl_RH_MAX Encl_RH_Hr_Min LogrTemp_MAx a a Copy i 60 Done Select Output Interval 60 000 Min Field Number 14 2 3 45 61213 15 AirTemp_Hr_Min_ gt List of Arrays described in label file Select to show fieldnames FIGURE 10 3 5 Pasting Values into Split 10 16 Section 10 Utilities Note that the cursor in the INPUT FILE S screen must be in valid paste area Copy or Select If the cursor is in the File name box or in Start Stop condition you will get the error message Cannot Paste There The Paste operation copied the numbers of each of the fields into the Select box Notice also that it pasted the Array ID into the copy condition 1 60 tells Split that in order to copy a line of data the first value in that line must be 60 Split uses the Array ID to discriminate between the hourly and daily data Now specify the Output File name Without one specified Split will run and display results but no output file will be created Click the OUTPUT FILE tab Type in hourly for the name of the output file By default Split will use the file extension PRN creating the output file hourly prn Depending upon the option chosen in the If File Exists then list box an existing PRN file may be overwritten appended to or saved under a new name The Labels option from the toolbar can also assist in labeling the output values Once a
271. indow has two subtabs Display and Marks The Display tab is used to set the color used for the bins on the Rainflow display Use the Line Width setting to select the width of the line used to outline the bars showing bin values Use the Line Style drop down to choose what kind of line will be drawn for the borders of the bars You can select the Marks tab if you want to show markers on the Rainflow display and control how they are shown Marks can contain information about a specific bin such as its value on the current y axis or the bin value that applies to that point Check the Show Marks check box to use marks on the display Select the Round Frame check box if the corners of the mark should be round instead of pointed square Choose the Transparent check box if you wish the background of each mark to be transparent the same color as the display background Set the Draw Every spin box with a value greater than 1 if you wish for only some of the points to display an associated mark A setting of 1 will display a mark on every point You can also choose the color and fill style of the box in which the markings text is shown with the Color and Style selections Use the Style drop down box to determine what information from each axis will be displayed Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Scaling Visual Display Trace Save Display Marks Draw Every T E C Round Frame CI Transparent Co
272. ins titles etc This dialog box can also be brought up by pressing the Options button Show Table Brings the main View Pro window in front of other windows making the data file s visible l Show Hide Gradient A toggle button that turns on and off the gradient background of the FFT It may be useful to hide the gradient when printing the FFT ia Modify Selection Brings up the FFT Setup dialog box from which you can choose the data to be viewed EY Undo Zoom Returns the FFT to its original state after zooming Si 6 6 Right click Menus Right clicking in View Pro will bring up a short cut menu The options on this menu will vary depending on whether you right click on a data panel graph or trace as described below 6 6 1 Data View Right clicking in a data panel will bring up a menu with the following options Define Selection Brings up a dialog box that allows you to define the records included and the color of the current data selection 6 21 Section 6 View Pro 6 22 Selection Definition Set Selection Date Time Options Set Selection Color Record Number Options rx ti fi Initial Record 0 Ending Time 11 3 2005 6 00 00 EndingRecord 1313 Time Span 54d 17h 00m 00s 000ms Record Span 1312 Apply Selection Color fists amp FIGURE 6 6 1 Selection Definition The records included can be defined by initial and ending time time span initial and ending rec
273. inserting it into another CRBasic program Insert File Inserts a library file CRB into the current program at the location of the cursor 5 3 7 CRBasic Editor Tools Menu This menu item allows you to use special tools associated with the operation of the editor 5 3 7 1 Edit Instruction Categories Edit Instruction Categories allows the user to create one or more custom list of instructions If a category of instructions is selected from the Instructions Panel the entire list of instructions in the Editor will be filtered to show only those instructions in the selected category Note The default categories cannot be edited or deleted To create a new list first select the Add New Category button and provide a name for the user created category Next ensure the category name is selected and click the Edit Category button to bring up the Select Instructions dialog shown below Instructions that should be included in the new list are indicated by a check in the box to the left of the instruction name This feature allows the user to display a filtered instruction list containing only those instructions most often used Press OK to save the list 5 13 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Select Instructions Category Name J Data Tables Output Processing Datalogger Status Control File 1 0 Intemet Protocols Math Functions Calculations 4 V ABS A ACOS AddPrecise AngleDegrees ASCII vI ASIN
274. ion is selected the sensor files developed specifically for the other are filtered out This dialog box is displayed the very first time you create a program for a specific datalogger type it will not be displayed thereafter With each subsequent program you create the group of sensor files that you chose when the datalogger was initialized in SCWin will be used However you can change this setting at any time If you make a change the setting will remain in effect for all programs for that datalogger type whether they are new programs or edited programs until it is changed again 5 5 3 8 AC Noise Rejection 5 5 3 9 Font Some dataloggers have parameters available in their measurement instructions to provide some rejection of noise due to AC electrical signals These parameters will be used by Short Cut if possible but the frequency of this noise varies In most of North America the AC frequency is 60 Hz However in many countries the frequency is 50 Hz If you know the frequency of this AC noise you can select one or the other frequency This setting remains in effect for other programs generated by Short Cut until you change it This setting is accessed from the Options menu item of the Tools menu Use this setting to change the appearance of the font used by Short Cut Most windows other than the wiring descriptions which require a non proportional font to make sure wiring diagrams are aligned will use this font 5 5 3 10 Set Wo
275. ish select the Save tab and press the Save lt window type gt Configuration button You will be able to select a folder and name for the configuration file Use the file extension as recommended by RTDAQ in this screen for easy loading at a later time After those configurations have been saved you may change your options for other purposes However if you ever wish to return to that set of options later you can open the Options screen select the Save tab and press the Load lt window type gt Configuration button You can browse to the saved configuration file that was prepared previously and open it The settings within that file will be loaded into the current screen Multiple configurations that apply to the same kind of screen may be saved 7 11 2 Using Configurations in the Field Monitor When using the Field Monitor the Save and Load Configuration buttons are found on the Setup tab of the Field Monitor Options screen Field Monitor Options ny Setup Grid Configuration Number of Rows Number of Columns Restore Default Configuration Save Field Monitor Configuration Load Field Monitor Configuration Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 11 3 Using Configurations in the Table Monitors When using the Table Monitor you can access the Save and Load functionality by right clicking on the grid display Table Monitor 1 Columns Select Table Select Table FFTOut Stop z Table Size 227
276. isplay those ports will be displayed in the first column and the remaining cells will be available to display flags and other boolean values in the program Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Program variables that are declared with a boolean data type can also be placed on this display An Add button is available which when pressed lists all of the tables in the datalogger When a table is highlighted on the left side of the window any variables that are declared as boolean in the program will be displayed on the right side of the window To return the Ports and Flags display to its original state press the Defaults button This will reset all labels to their original names update the number of flags based on the currently running program and remove any boolean values placed on the screen NOTE With the CR800 series CR1000 and CR3000 dataloggers a control port must first be configured for output in the datalogger program before it can be toggled on or off Consequently if you select a port and it doesn t appear to change your program may not have the port configured for output refer to your datalogger operator s manual Ports on the CR5000 and CR9000X cannot be controlled directly with the Ports and Flags window For these dataloggers special Flag settings tied to the ports must be set up in the datalogger program to achieve the desired control NOTE A boolean variable is a variable that can have one of two states high low
277. isplay will be updated as quickly as new data is received from the datalogger For this to window to function there must be a Histogram output instruction defined within the CRBasic program which is running in the datalogger to which RTDAQ is connected NOTE RTDAQ does not create histograms from time series measurements It only displays histograms that have been calculated and stored by the datalogger 7 7 1 Histogram Overview A histogram is a graphical representation of a frequency distribution that uses bins that have unique ranges The value associated with each bin is proportional to how often a particular measurement s value is measured within that bin s range To view real time histograms from your datalogger in RTDAQ first ensure that a proper histogram program is running in the datalogger you wish to monitor This includes the use of the Histogram output instruction in one of the tables of the CRBasic program 7 7 2 Displaying Histograms Connect to the desired logger in RTDAQ by clicking on the datalogger s icon and pressing Connect Now choose the Monitor Data tab to make the real time displays available and choose the FFT Histo button 7 48 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Kum S33 OD SRB Og Se ora Daa Collect Data EA a m m md Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph m Plot EFN sto Rainflow
278. ists and a three letter mnemonic for the processing instruction that outputs the data Alternatively the FieldNames instruction can be used to override the default names The data table header may also have a row that lists units for the output values The units must be declared for the datalogger to fill this row out e g Units RefTemp degC The units are strictly for the user s documentation the datalogger makes no checks on their accuracy 5 19 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 20 NOTE The above table is the result of the data table description in the example program DataTable Temp 1 2000 DataInterval 0 10 msec 10 Average 1 RefTemp fp2 0 Average 6 TC 1 fp2 0 EndTable All data table descriptions begin with DataTable and end with EndTable Within the description are instructions that tell what to output and the conditions under which output occurs DataTable Name Trigger Size DataTable Temp 1 2000 The DataTable instruction has three parameters a user specified name for the table a trigger condition and the size to make the table in RAM The trigger condition may be a variable expression or constant The trigger is true if it is not equal to 0 Data are output if the trigger is true and there are no other conditions to be met No output occurs if the trigger is false 0 The size is the number of records to store in the table You can specify a fixed number or enter 1 to have the da
279. it manually The Trigger on Stop Condition is enabled by clicking Other on the Output Tab and checking the box next to the Trigger on Stop Condition field When the Trigger on Stop Condition is enabled the function affects all files being processed that have a Stop Condition specified If multiple files are being processed but it is desired that the function affect one or more but not all of the files the F option is used in the Stop Condition field of the files that you want processed using the function The syntax for the F option is F e val A typical application for the Trigger on Stop Condition is to reduce days of hourly data into daily summaries A logical element to use for the Stop Condition is time hrmn Assuming the third element of the hourly Output Array is hrmn and midnight is output as 0 the Stop Condition is entered as 3 0 or F 3 0 if the F option is used The Time Series processing is performed over a day defined by midnight to midnight If only hourly Output Arrays were contained in the Input File the Copy line could be left blank If other Output Arrays are present which need not be included in the Time Series processing a logical Copy condition would be the Output Array ID of the hourly output The Trigger on Stop Condition functions the same for multiple Input files as it does for a single Input File If the option is enabled on several Input Files and the Stop Conditions do not occur at the same point i
280. it or View or other software to provide column headers for the data file The Summary tab displays the information in the DEF file as described above The Advanced tab for CRBasic dataloggers displays the CRBasic program that was generated It includes a CRBasic Editor button which opens the program for editing in the CRBasic Editor Note that any changes made to the generated program in the CRBasic Editor will not be reflected in Short Cut or future programs generated by Short Cut Note that while Short Cut can generate a program file for the datalogger you must use datalogger communication software to transmit that program to the datalogger This is true even when pressing the Send Program button from Short Cut s Finish screen Short Cut relies on the datalogger communication software to transmit the program For more information about using the Send option refer to Section 5 3 2 Compile Save and Send earlier in this chapter 5 5 3 Short Cut Settings The Program and Tools menus on the Short Cut menu offers several settings that may prove useful 5 5 3 1 Scan Interval If you wish to change the scan interval after you ve created the program this option provides that opportunity It presents the same pop up window as when you first choose a datalogger 5 5 3 2 Program Security Some dataloggers allow you to set security by entering one or more numbers into their security fields You can allow different l
281. it will default to this size but you can drag the RTMC Run Time screen boundaries to a new size and the components will resize When Fixed Size is selected the size is set by typing in the number of pixels for the height and the width Alternately you can drag the boundaries of the white workspace in the development window to the desired size When a fixed size project is run the components will not resize if the run time screen boundaries are changed Enable Connection Management tells RTDAQ to try to maintain an active communications link with the datalogger for which data is being displayed by RTMC This might be beneficial if you are trying to display data in RTMC with a fast update rate over a communications link that takes time to establish such as a phone modem Configure Auto Tabbing lets you enable or disable the automatic switching between project tabs when an RTMC form is run and set the rate at which a new tab will be displayed When RTMC is in AutoTab mode it will display a tab for a set amount of time and then display the next tab Add New Screen adds a new screen to the project Each screen appears as a tabbed page on the display When the project is run the user can click the tab to bring each screen to the front Screen Order allows you to change the order that the screens will appear left to right in the project 8 1 4 5 Screen Menu The Screen menu options work with the tabbed screens in the project The Screen m
282. ities 10 4 1 1 Log Categories The RTDAQ server stores events in four different kinds of logs as follows Transaction Status TranX log This log file documents the state of the various transactions that occur between the RTDAQ communications server and devices in the datalogger network This is the most readable of the logs and contains event messages that are meaningful to most users Examples of these events are e Datalogger clock check set e Datalogger program downloads e Data collection The format and type of records in this log are strictly defined to make it possible for a software program to parse the log records Communications Status CommsX log This log file documents the quality of communications in the datalogger network Object State StateX log This log file documents the state of an object This is primarily for troubleshooting by software developers and the messages are relatively unstructured in form Low Level I O IOXSerial Port_1 log A low level log file is associated with each root device in the datalogger network to record incoming and outgoing communications While the entire network can be monitored from a single messaging session of the transaction communications status or object state logs monitoring of the low level log is performed on a session with the root device for that log You can monitor the logs with a special application called LogTool accessed from the Tools LogTool menu
283. its associated with each field in the record Units are optional and are specified in the datalogger program if they are included If no units are provided in the program then an empty string placeholder is placed in this line for that specific field Appendix A Campbell Scientific File Formats Header line five describes the processing performed in the datalogger to produce the value for each field in the record for example sample average min max etc If there is no known processing for a field that field will be assigned an empty processing string There will be one value on this line for each field name given on header line three Header line six defines the data types for each field in the record and supports the following values IEEE4 FP2 ULONG LONG SecNano and ASCII len TOB2 frame headers are eight bytes long and hold the timestamp for the first record in the frame TOB3 frame headers are twelve bytes long and contain the same timestamp information but also add a four byte unsigned integer that represents the beginning record number for that frame The frame data begins immediately following the frame header and consists of zero or more data records Each record contains one data point for each of the field names identified in header line three The data type and implied size of these data points are identified by the data types list given by header line six The frame footer makes up the last four bytes of the frame
284. l bring up a list of the current bookmarks Selecting a bookmark from the list will automatically move the data panel to that record The shortcut Ctrl n where n is the number of the bookmark can also be used to move the data file to the desired bookmark Delete Bookmark If the data panel contains one or more bookmarks hovering over the Delete Bookmark menu item will bring up a list of the current bookmarks Selecting a bookmark from the list will delete the bookmark Delete All Bookmarks Deletes all bookmarks from the data panel Right clicking on a graph will bring up a menu from which you can choose Export to save the graph in a choice of formats Copy to Clipboard to place the graph on the clipboard Print to print the graph or Options to bring up the graph s Options dialog box Right clicking on a trace name in the list on the right side of a Line Graph Histogram Rainflow Histogram or FFT brings up a menu from which you can choose Edit Selection to bring up the trace options dialog box Delete Selection to delete the selection from the graph or Selection Summary to see information about the trace the data file and the datalogger and program that generated the data file 6 23 Section 6 View Pro 6 7 Printing Options 6 7 1 Print Setup Select File Print Setup from the View Pro toolbar to set print options such as printer paper size and source orientation duplex mode pages per sheet etc Note that many of t
285. l expression after the defined data value Using the above example if the data value is defined as CR5000 TempData Temp1 datalogger table variable you would enter CR5000 TempData Temp1 1 8 32 to convert the temperature reading from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit Data values are referenced as in the above example by datalogger name as it appears in the main RTDAQ screen followed by the table name or array ID followed by the data label Spaces must be used before and after the predefined constants and functions Operators do not require spaces The following operators may be used when creating an expression Operator Description Prioritizes parts of an expression within the larger expression Multiply by Divide by n Raised to the power of Add Subtract Equal lt gt Not equal 8 9 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software Operator Description gt Greater than lt Less than gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than or equal to 8 1 5 2 Predefined Constants The following constants may be used when creating an expression Constant Description E 2 718282 PI 3 141593 True 1 False 0 8 1 5 3 Functions The following table shows functions available when creating an expression as well as the use and placement of the values on which a function operates The parentheses are not required unless there are two or more parameter values e g ATN2 y x Function AB
286. lable from the RTMC Menu cccceeeeeeee 8 5 SIAL Pile Men nenen a a a a aa 8 5 ea E KARN A DAAN Eaa TO PAATE EEA E snes tid E S 8 5 821423 View MENU css oenen aea ea anni 8 6 8 1 4 4 Project Menu serki e aea r a RERE 8 6 8 1 4 5 Screen MEU oe e e e eE E E as 8 7 8 1 4 6 Component Menu sssesssesesserseresrsererrseeerrsrerrsrerrreresrreres 8 8 8 1 4 7 Help Menus css sescsscssescsyenescsesestncheseecteasestabiasapsebeseabestes 8 9 8 1 5 EXprESSIONS oriire E A E EES 8 9 8 15 1 Operatii narn e a E E R E 8 9 8 1 5 2 Predefined Constants ccccccccccccesssscecessceceesseeeeesaees 8 10 8 13 39 F nctHons er a TE E E e 8 10 8 1 5 4 Order of Precedence cecccccesscccesssececessseceesssceesenseees 8 11 8 2 RTMC Run Time a ra a E EESE 8 12 9 Calibration and Zeroing eee 9 1 9 1 Calibration Essentials 0 00esensoeseosseseeseessereessesesssrressseessererssssessseresss 9 1 9 1 1 Definition of Calibration ccc ccccccccssccceessececesscecensseeceeaeees 9 1 9 1 2 Basic Calibration Process ccccccccssccecsssceeessececesseeceensseeeeeaaees 9 1 9 2 Writing Calibration Programs with the CRBasic Editor 0 eee 9 2 9 2 1 The FieldCal Instruction 00 0 0 cece cccccecsesssececececeesssneceeeceeeeneas 9 2 9 2 2 Calibration File Details 00 0 0 cece ceccccccesscecesssececesceeeensseeeeeaeees 9 3 9 3 Four Kinds of Calibration cccccccccsccccesssececssecec
287. lbar can be used 8 1 2 Single Datalogger RTMC Projects RTDAQ connects to only one datalogger at any one time Unlike RTMC in LoggerNet RTMC projects in RTDAQ may only reference one datalogger per project When creating a new project the currently connected datalogger will be used as the station for that project If no datalogger is connected the user will be prompted to select one Only one station can be used for specifying table and column data to be displayed The project will be saved with data references to only one datalogger You may edit projects created with RTMC in LoggerNet that reference multiple dataloggers In such instances only the data from the connected datalogger will be updated All other components relying on data from other dataloggers will show the exclamation point marker indicating that no data is available 8 1 3 Display Components NOTE Display components are the objects that are used to display data To adda component to the workspace click an item on the Components Toolbar and then click anywhere in the workspace The component s Properties window is automatically displayed when the object is first placed in the work area The Properties window is used to set colors scale values text etc and to assign the data value to be displayed by the component When a display component is linked to a data value the value will be updated on the display at the table output rate if RTDAQ is connected to the asso
288. le Collection Command Transaction 10 Control Command Set Variable Transaction 11 User I O Transaction Terminal Mode 12 Memory Image Down load Transaction 13 Memory Image Up load Transaction 14 Get Table Definitions Transaction 15 RF Test Transaction 16 Communication Status Notification Message Meaning User Response to Message The specified BMP1 packet was received over the serial communications link The number indicates the type of message received Data collected from a datalogger could not be written to the data Check that there is space available on the hard disk and that write The amount of time the device was connected in milliseconds The name of the table that was reset The account name of the logged in client output file permissions allow the server to write the data output files A client kept the communication link on line longer than the specified max time on line The name of a table was changed at the request of a client On CR1000 CRS5000 and CR9000 loggers this is a reset for the table in the datalogger and on the PC Message Text Collect area setting changed PakBus route added PakBus route lost PakBus station added Client logged off Table size reduced during creation Message Parameters The name of the collection area The setting identifier for the setting that was changed The new value of the setting The accoun
289. least one valid FFT in the currently selected data file View Pro does not create FFT data from time series information It only displays FFT data contained in a DAT file FFT data in the DAT file is created by using the CRBasic FFT instruction in a CRBasic program Data Table Record 971 3D View Number of Plots Axis Mode O Show Ranges View Bins N w oth 7 5 sd 54 5 54 44 54 a 54 24 5 Section 6 View Pro FIGURE 6 5 8 Fast Fourier Transform 6 5 5 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed When an FFT screen is opened the Fast Fourier Transform Setup dialog box will open which allows you to setup the FFT The first option is a drop down list that shows the fields in the currently selected data file which contain FFT data Select the data that you would like to view The second option allows you to choose which record of the FFT you would like to view Type in a number directly or use the arrow keys to the right of the box to change the value 6 19 Section 6 View Pro 6 20 6 5 5 2 Options 4 Fast Fourier Transform Setup TE Select the FFT and record number FFT Select myYalue_FFT FFT Recordi Timestamp o 2006 10 04 14 40 30 4 Selection Record Number 0 2006 10 04 14 40 30 4 From Column 2 To Column 514 FFT Number of points 1024 FFT Number of bins 513 FFT Sample Interval 0 200 FFT Option Amplitude Spectrum File Name C DataFiles CR9000 _FFTA
290. lename instruction in order for the output processing to take That is each time a new measurement is made the data table is called When the table is called the output processing instructions within the table process the current inputs If the trigger conditions for the data Section 5 Program Creation and Editing table are true the processed values are output to the data table In the example below several averages are output Average Reps Source DataType DisableVar Average 1 RefTemp fp2 0 Average 6 TC 1 fp2 0 Average is an output processing instruction that will output the average of a variable over the output interval The parameters are repetitions the number of elements in an array to calculate averages for the Source variable or array to average the data format to store the result in Table 5 4 1 and a disable variable that allows excluding readings from the average if conditions are not met A reading will not be included in the average if the disable variable is not equal to 0 the example has 0 entered for the disable variable so all readings are included in the average TABLE 5 4 1 Formats for Output Data Code Data Format Size Range Resolution FP2 Campbell Scientific floating point 2 bytes 7999 13 bits about 4 digits TEEE4 IEEE four byte floating point 4 bytes 1 8 E 38 to 1 7 E 38 24 bits about 7 digits LONG 4 byte Signed Integer 4 bytes 2 147 483 648 to 1 bit 1 2 147 48
291. lic are also available 6 4 6 Window Arrangement When multiple data files are opened they are arranged so that the title bar of each window is visible and they cascade down and to the right starting from the upper left corner Pressing the Cascade button or choosing Window Cascade from the View Pro menu will return the data windows to this default arrangement at any time Windows can be tiled horizontally as non overlapping horizontal tiles by pressing the Tile Horizontally button or choosing Window Tile Horizontally from the menu They can be tiled vertically as non overlapping vertical tiles by pressing the Tile Vertically button or choosing Window Tile Vertically from the menu A data window can be moved manually by clicking on the title bar and dragging it to the desired location The data view window can be kept in front of any opened graphs by selecting View Keep Data on Top from the menu 6 5 Section 6 View Pro 6 5 Graphs 6 6 Once a data file is opened data values can be displayed in several different graphical forms including a Line Graph Histogram XY Plot Rainflow Histogram or FFT Each of these are launched from a button on the View Pro toolbar Graph buttons are enabled only if the graph type is appropriate for the opened data file For instance if there is no data appropriate for an FFT the FFT button will be disabled on the View Pro toolbar Multiple instances of each type of graph can be launched
292. list 6 7 Section 6 View Pro 6 8 Multiple columns can be added by holding the Ctrl key and dragging the mouse pointer over the column headings A partial column can be added by dragging the mouse pointer over the desired values Multiple partial columns can be added by holding the Ctrl key and dragging the mouse pointer over the desired values Note that to open a Line Graph there must be at least one selection to be graphed before the Line Graph button is pressed A data value can be deleted from a graph by selecting it in the list of values being graphed on the left side of the graph window and then pressing the Delete button by right clicking on this name and choosing Delete Selection by left clicking on the column heading in the data panel or by right clicking on the column in the data panel and choosing Clear Selection 6 5 1 2 Graph Width 6 5 1 3 Scrolling The Graph Width box is used to set the width of a Line Graph either as a function of time in days hours minutes seconds and milliseconds or by the number of records being displayed If one of these two field is changed the other field will automatically change accordingly when the Apply button is pressed You can scroll through the graph by using the scroll bar at the bottom of the graph window Scrolling the graph will scroll the data on the data panel as well Conversely scrolling through a data panel will also scroll the currently selected graph Graph
293. m file after setting up associations in the Tools Associate Files screen you may get a disconnect message or similar notification when sending a program with the Save and Send feature to a CR9000X datalogger This is unique to the CR9000X datalogger and does not indicate any problem with the sending of the program You can simply reconnect to the datalogger and continue your work To avoid these messages always start the CRBasic Editor from the RTDAQ toolbar or Tools menu 5 3 3 Templates NOTE The use of templates can be a powerful way to quickly create a set of similar datalogger programs All or part of a program can be saved so that it can be used when creating new programs These files are called templates The Template menu provides access to create and use templates Save as Template Saves the comments and instructions in the active file as a template To save part of a program as a template copy the selected part to a new program file and then Save as Template Save as Default Template Saves the comments and instructions in the active file as a template that will be used each time File New is selected for that type of datalogger Delete When selected a list of all dataloggers is displayed Select a datalogger to open a dialog box containing a list of saved templates A template can then be highlighted and deleted from disk Datalogger Types When a datalogger type is selected a list of all templates is displayed
294. map can then be pasted into other programs Select the Options function to change the Graphing Options For more information about viewing and changing the Graphing Options see the section entitled Using The Special Options of the XY Plot later in this chapter Use the Print Preview option to preview and possibly print the current graph to a selected printer Use the Print option to print the current display state of the graphical area without any preview Selecting the Clear option will clear the display It is the same as pressing the Clear button see description of the Clear button above Selecting the Syne Data option performs the same function the Syne Data button does see description of the Syne Data button above Selecting the Start Stop option will start or stop the display of points on the XY Plot see descriptions for the Start and Stop buttons above 7 40 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time XY Plotter 1 An example of an XY Plot screen with its controls hidden Choose the Hide Controls option to temporarily remove all interface elements buttons and display controls used to configure the XY Plot window This removes the Y Axis Values X Axis Value of Points Per Field setting and the Options Clear Sync Data and Start Stop buttons This will give more room on the screen for viewing the graphical display area While the controls are hidden some of them may still be accessed by using a right click as descri
295. may limit what kind of sensors can be added thereafter as each sensor on the multiplexer must share the same wiring between the multiplexer and the datalogger After adding all the desired sensors click Next 5 35 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 2 3 Step 3 Setup Output Tables After selecting the sensors to be measured you can choose what data to store from the outputs step Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds File Program Tools Help Progress Fi i Sensors asuremer so Minutes Mi 2 Sensors i 3 Outputs estos Br mrnte Sensors ZasuremeProcessindutput Lab Units T cs210 Enc_RH 4 Finish HMP35C AirTC a Wiring StdDev Sie AM16 32 rt Wiring Diagram Wiring Text 1 107 3 T107_C 1 2 107 3 T107_C e 3 107 3 T107_C 4 107 3 T107_c 5 107 3 T107_C E 6 107 3 T107_C 7 107 3 T107_cG 8 107 3 T107_C E 9 107 3 T107 C t Y Add Table Delete Table outputs Help lt previous Finish On the left Short Cut will show the sensors you ve added to be measured with the measurement labels you ve used On the right is a multi tabbed grid that shows the output tables Most users store data as summaries over time hourly and daily are common intervals for meteorological stations but you can choose the table names Array ID for Edlog mixed array dataloggers and intervals needed You can even add ad
296. me and model name currently highlighted for selection or connection The Menu Bar Toolbar Clock Program tab Monitor Data tab and Collect Data tab are described in more detail later in this chapter The Network Map shows which loggers have been configured for connection within the system You can connect to a datalogger by double clicking on its icon or by selecting it and pressing the Connect button on the Toolbar RTDAQ connects to only one datalogger at any one time The Status Bar is used to show the current connection status and connection time if connected for the selected datalogger RTDAQ provides additional tools for working with your dataloggers and data RTMC support is provided for viewing live data in a customized display Split View Pro and CardConvert are used to examine and process data files Short Cut and the CR5000 CR9000X Program Generator ProgGen can be used to generate datalogger programs and the CRBasic Editor is provided for more advanced datalogger program editing These tools are accessed via the buttons on the main screen or the pull down menu selections under the Tools menu More information about these tools is provided later in this manual Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 1 2 Datalogger Connectivity Help and Program Exit RTDAQ supports the major CRBasic dataloggers including the CR800 CR850 CR1000 CR3000 CR5000 and CR9000X RTDAQ supports one medium of communications for any given datalogger
297. ment as with all parameters in the Select line Once the variables have been declared they can be used later in the Select line i e x 4 5 6 3 0 y 6 3 2 3 6 7 7 x 6 Y Variables can be defined in the first four Input File s Select lines only but may be used in subsequent Input File s Select lines Illegal operations e g logarithm of a negative number will cause Split to store blanks for the Output It is possible to get a run time error error 0 1 if the floating point math exceeds the limits of the PC 10 3 3 6 3 Numerical Limitations 10 34 The greatest number that can be output is determined by the field width Table 10 3 3 Column Widths option If the width is eleven or greater the maximum number is 99 999 999 for widths from eight through ten the maximum is 99 999 for widths less than eight the maximum is 9999 If a column is not large enough for a value it will be stored as a 9 999 99 999 or 99 999 999 based on the column width In some instances such as when a column is not Section 10 Utilities large enough for the date function you will see the text bad data on the Split Runtime window 10 3 3 6 4 Mathematical Functions Details and Examples TABLE 10 3 6 Split Operators and Math Functions OPERATORS OPERATOR PRECEDENCE ORDER 3 high 1 low A raise to the power 3 x Mod y Modulo divide of x by y 2 multiplication division 2 addition subtraction 1 EXAMP
298. mmary check box that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab H U E T Bnnn Section 10 Utilities Removes the dashed lines from the heading of the RPT file This is the same as choosing the No Dashes check box that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Removes the record number from TOB files that are processed with Split This is the same as choosing the No Record Numbers from TOB Files check box that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Begins processing the file or stops processing the file on or after the Start or Stop condition when starting or stopping based on time the default is to start only if the exact start condition is found This is the same as choosing the Start Stop On After Time option that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Example Splitr test par input dat Output prn E 4 1450 4 1456 where 1450 and 1456 are the start and stop times respectively Colons are required to indicate a time value Suppresses the time series heading and column heading information when processing time series data This is the same as choosing the No Summary Heading check box that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Breaks a long array into multiple lines where nnn is the number of values to place on each line This is the same as choosing the Break Arrays check box that is found under the Other button of the Output Fil
299. mp dat FIGURE 6 5 9 FFT Setup Dialog Box This dialog box can also be opened from a toolbar button An FFT can be deleted from a graph by selecting it in the list of values being graphed on the left side of the graph window and then pressing the Delete button by right clicking on this name and choosing Delete Selection or by right clicking on the record in the data panel and choosing Clear Selection From the main FFT screen you can set the FFT type to Area Histogram Line or Bar You can use the arrow buttons to the right of Record to scroll through records of the FFT You can also determine whether the FFT is viewed in 2D or 3D Selecting the 3D View check box will enable 3D View Clearing the check box will cause the FFT to be viewed in 2D When in 3D View the Number of Plots field will determine how many records are viewed in the FFT In 3D View scroll bars appear on the bottom and right of the screen which allow the FFT to be rotated Section 6 View Pro 6 5 5 3 FFT Toolbar The FFT includes the following toolbar icons Copy to Clipboard Places the FFT graphic on the Windows clipboard It can then be pasted into other applications mi Print Prints the FFT Print options can be set before printing begins Export Allows the FFT to be exported in a choice of text or graphical formats 0 FFT Options Opens a dialog box from which you can set properties for the FFT including scaling colors marg
300. ms Setup Grid Configuration Number of Rows Number of Columns Cancel Press the Save Field Monitor Configuration button to save the current option settings for the Monitor Data window Press the Load Field Monitor Configuration button to restore an option configuration state that has been previously saved 7 1 6 Specialized Real time Monitoring Screens When in the Monitor Data screen other real time monitoring screens are available RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File view Datalogger Network Tools Help RK diconen i 3 n S a cCR1000 Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time These monitoring screens include the Ports amp Flags window Table Monitor windows Graph windows Real time Graph Fast Graph windows XY Plot windows FFT Histogram viewer windows and Rainflow histogram windows You can open or select from multiple instances of these real time screens by selecting the screen type from a drop down list below the button You can bring an open screen to the front or restore maximize it by clicking the button again For more information about each specialized data monitoring screen see information given in later sections of this chapter 7 2 Ports and Flags 7 8 When the Ports amp Flags button is selected a window appears for monitoring datalogger ports program flags and thei
301. munications link has been established and will attempt to get a prompt from that datalogger If the device is a root device such as a serial or COM port RTDAQ simply opens that port at the specified baud rate Terminal Emulator has several uses If you open a COM port you can use it to set up devices that present their own menus such as RF400 radios or NL100s See the manuals for those devices to obtain information on how to navigate the menus and what settings to choose Another potential use is to communicate with smart devices attached to the datalogger Some dataloggers allow a pass through mode whereby you can communicate through them to an attached SDI 12 sensor to set its address or other parameters See the manuals for the datalogger and sensor for the relevant commands Troubleshooting communications devices is another use for Terminal Emulator When calling for support on these devices an applications engineer may ask you to use this method to manually dial through phone or RF modems for example You can close a connection to start another one by clicking the Close Terminal button You can close the Terminal Emulator itself by clicking the X button in the upper right corner of the screen 4 6 4 Network Menu 4 6 4 1 Add Delete Edit Rename Datalogger The Add Datalogger Delete Datalogger and Edit Datalogger Setup options perform the same functions as the buttons on the main toolbar The Rename Datalogger item can be
302. myValue_FFT 22 75 myValue_FFT 8 62 07 myValue_FFT 9 40 08 Options Stop 4 4 1 Field Monitor This screen contains the Field Monitor which displays values from datalogger tables including stored tables and the public table Press the Add button to bring up a screen for selecting data table fields to be monitored in this screen After the Start button has been pressed RTDAQ will display the last record stored to that table and will automatically update these records as they are stored in the datalogger s memory Note that RTDAQ does not automatically store this data to a data file on the PC If you want a permanent record of the data you must collect it manually from the Collect Data tab You may find that your labels or the number of digits displayed are too long to fit in the space provided Using the mouse you may put your cursor over the border between the columns for the labels and values and drag it left or right to make it easier to read The column width is not preserved when RTDAQ is closed and restarted The table name variable name and data value also will be displayed momentarily as a popup hint if you hover your cursor over a value for a few seconds 4 4 2 Editing Variable Values In some cases you may wish to edit public variables For example you may choose to change sensor offsets or control variables affecting datalogger program execution To change public variable values double click on
303. n 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software as SetPoint depicts the selected data value as a numeric value A data 25 value can also be set to a new value by double clicking the component and entering a new value in the resulting dialog box s f Gauge displays the selected data value on a gauge Table Display displays the data from a datalogger table in a row and column format A Value Forwarder reads a value in a datalogger and writes to another K value in that datalogger or a different datalogger The value that is written can be the value read a 0 or 1 or a specified constant ino Thermometer displays the data value on the image of a thermometer Compass provide an eight point compass on which to display data 8 1 4 Functions Available from the RTMC Menus 8 1 4 1 File Menu 8 1 4 2 Edit Menu All of the RTMC operations are available from the menus at the top of the RTMC Development window Many of the options are also available as buttons on the toolbar or by right clicking the components or other parts of the window New Project starts a new RTMC project The currently opened project will be closed If there are changes that have not been saved the user will be prompted to save changes Open brings up the File Open dialog to open a previously saved project Save will save the changes in the current project to the RTMC project file If this is the first time the project has been saved a Save As dialog will open to
304. n a file The one you use depends on the type of file being opened Use File Open to open a data file File Open as Text to open other types of files or File Open as Hex to view a binary or text file in hexadecimal format A file that has been recently opened can be quickly opened again by selecting it from the File Recent Files list The file will be opened in the same format as it was originally opened data text or hex No matter what option is used to open a file it is closed by selecting File Close from the menu or pressing the red X in the upper right hand corner of the data file window 6 3 1 Opening a Data File To open a data file click the File Open i icon or select File Open from the menu TOACII TOA5 TOB1 TOB2 and TOB3 data files can be opened with View Pro When a file is first opened it is displayed in the data panel in a tabular format 6 3 2 Opening Other Types of Files To open a file that is not a data file DLD CSI PTI FSL LOG CRX select File Open As Text from the menu Files opened in this mode cannot be graphed A file opened in this mode can be viewed only in its original format i e as text This mode is most often used to open files other than data files or to quickly open data files but without any of View Pro s graphing capabilities In text mode data can be copied to the Windows clipboard and pasted into other applications This is done by highlighting the te
305. n be sent to a file or printer There are three report options File Printer HTML One or more can be selected A report sent to a file has the extension of RPT If the report is sent to a printer the printer must be on line In all cases a PRN output file is created A basic HTML file can be created containing the formatted report data The HTML file can be used as a display of the formatted data output in a web browser To remove page breaks in the HTML file enable the No FF option Section 10 Utilities Other The Other button provides access to the dialog box shown below Bad data Replace bad data with F Only display lines with bad data Processing T Trigger on Stop condition I Start Stop On After Time Special M Match files Transpose file l NoFF Break arrays M No Summary No Date Advance M NoDashes No Summary Heading Ok Cancel Help FIGURE 10 3 13 Other Output File Options It allows the following settings to be modified Replace bad data with The text in the field to the right of this option is entered into the PRN output file data set if data are blank bad or out of range See Table 10 3 9 for definition of blank or bad data Whatever text string the user enters in the field will be entered if a blank or question mark is in the data or if data are out of range This option is useful when the Output file is imported into a spreadsheet program such
306. n each file when a file s Stop Condition is met its time series data are output and blanks are output for data selected from the other Input Files Say for example that you were interested in the average value of the first data point element 2 for each test in the data set listed in Table 10 3 2 The Input File template would look like that shown in Table 10 3 4 10 31 Section 10 Utilities TABLE 10 3 4 Input File Entries to Process the First Data Point for each Test First Input File DATA_1 DAT 1 Stop Condition F 1 200 Select AVG 2 10 3 3 4 Copy The Copy Condition tells Split which arrays should be used for the output data After the Start Condition is satisfied and before the Stop Condition is met the Copy condition must be satisfied before any data will be processed according to Select line instructions Section 10 3 3 1 4 If the Copy condition is left blank all arrays are processed between the Start and Stop values Syntax for the Copy condition is similar to the Start and Stop values mentioned above Logical and and or statements see Section 10 3 3 2 can be used when specifying the Copy condition For example referring to Table 10 3 1 if only those hours during day 189 when the temperature was above 90 and the soil temperature was below 62 is desired or during day 189 when the average wind speed was below 21 while the wind direction was between 255 to 265 is desired the Copy condition would
307. n in Short Cut found under Miscellaneous Sensors to use the ID in the datalogger program 5 5 3 4 Power up Settings Some dataloggers offer the option to retain interim measurements or calculations or the states of flags or ports when they power up from a low battery or loss of power condition This may be useful when calculations are used to control devices You may for example want to ensure that pumps or controls are off when a datalogger powers up so as to make the control decision based on a fresh measurement See the datalogger manual for a full description of this feature 5 5 3 5 Select CR200 Compiler Use this setting to select the directory and executable name that will be used to pre compile the CR200 205 program to check for errors Most Campbell Scientific dataloggers are sent an ASCII program file which they then compile into machine code The CR200 205 does not have enough memory and processing capability to do this compilation so it s necessary to compile the program file into the binary version used by the datalogger itself This compilation is done by Short Cut to check for errors in the program before sending it It s done again by LoggerNet when sending the program to the datalogger Compilation is performed using a special executable that mimics the functions and capability in the datalogger s operating system Therefore the compiler executable must match the datalogger s operating system or the datalogger may
308. n on a number Performs a logical disjunction on two numbers Raises constant x to the power of y Generates a random number Used to find the sign value of a number 1 0 or 1 Returns the sine of an angle Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number Returns the square root of a number Returns the tangent of an angle Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number Performs a logical exclusion on two numbers When processing mathematical expressions the order of precedence is e Anything inside parentheses e Exponentiation e Negation unary e Multiplication division e Modulo remainder MOD e Addition subtraction When consecutive operators have the same priority the expression evaluates from left to right This means that an expression such as a b c is evaluated as a b c Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software 8 2 RTMC Run Time L 8 12 Screen Screen2_ The RTMC Run Time application allows you to run the real time graphic display screen that was created in the developer mode Click the Run Time icon on the RTDAQ Toolbar to start RTMC Run Time and open an RTMC project You will see your project similar to the window shown below You must be connected to a datalogger for the button to be active on the Toolbar You should only open projects that were developed for the datalogger to which you are connected or no data will be available to populate the controls in the project
309. ndo the zoom This can also be accomplished by pressing the Undo Zoom button on the toolbar For a Rainflow Histogram or for a Histogram or FFT in 3D View you can also zoom in and out by using the Page Down and Page Up buttons on your keyboard Rotation For a Rainflow Histogram or for a Histogram or FFT in 3D View you can rotate the graph by using the scroll bars at the bottom and right of the graph Section 6 View Pro Keeping Graph on Top The currently selected graph can be kept in front of the data view window by selecting View Keep Graph on Top from the menu or pressing this button on the main View Pro toolbar 6 5 1 Line Graph From the Line Graph screen you can graph data values on the y axis against their timestamps on the x axis Pebhezkaeaae Logan_OneHour dat 6 w e A AAO C A co th Graph Widtl Time 30 d 00h 00 m 00 s 000 r L Apply 2005 09 10 2005 09 17 2005 09 24 2005 10 01 2005 10 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 IK amp aa 5 o T o c 9 po a tat La Ei D T 2 S FIGURE 6 5 1 Line Graph 6 5 1 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed Data value s are added to a graph by clicking the column heading s in the data panel with a single mouse click The selection will be highlighted and will automatically be added to the currently selected graph The currently selected graph is indicated on the main View Pro toolbar and can be changed from the drop down
310. ndow To use the Graph window of RTDAQ ensure that you are connected to a datalogger then select the Monitor Data tab Click on the button labeled Graph RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CRIDOOX File View Datalogger Network Tools Help E diecomect oll a hi Clock Program Collect Data O eee ee 1 Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph Fast Graph XY Plot FFT Histo Rainflow CR1000 ay Field Monitor CR800Series ne a Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Now you will see the Real Time Graph window Real Time Graph 1 Selected Fields add Delete Graph Width 00 h 00m 10s 000 ms Collect Mode Graph All Data O Fill Graph Width Newest Records Al Drawing Mode Strip Chart Shift O Shift Data s Options Clear Eill and Stop Start 42 00 00 AM You may create multiple Graph windows in RTDAQ After Graph screens have been created they can be brought to the front by using the drop down list that becomes available on the Graph button You will also use this drop down list to create Graph screens after at least one already exists since pushing the Graph button at that point will bring the focus to an existing graph instead of creating a new one Create New a Real Time Graph 1 F Real Time Graph 2 F imp FFTView F 7 4 2 Adding Items for Display on the Graph Use the Add button to select the desired
311. near Fit and Two point Multiplier Only Calibration These calibration types are described below Zeroing is the act of placing a sensor into a state where the output condition is known to be zero and changing the measurement s offset variable so that the sensor output reads as zero By measuring the output of the sensor in this specialized condition the zero condition the offset variable will be changed to ensure that the known zero condition results in a measurement value of zero Note that this process only changes the offset variable that is shared between the measurement instruction and the FieldCal instruction The multiplier is unaffected A simple example of zeroing would be taking off all items from a scale designed to measure the mass of objects With nothing on the scale this is the condition in which the scale should give a zero reading for its output The calibration is triggered and the offset is adjusted to ensure the scale gives a zero reading for that condition To perform a zeroing calibration use an argument of 0 the number zero for the calibration type in the FieldCal instruction of your CRBasic program The Calibration Wizard can be used to calculate and apply the proper offset while the program is running in the datalogger or code can be configured within the CRBasic program to trigger the zeroing event based on flags or other user defined conditions that occur while the program runs The simplest way to set
312. neeeeeneeeeeeaees 10 1 vii RTDAQ Table of Contents 10 1 2 Destination File Options cee ceesecseeeceseeeeeseceeeeeeeseseeens 10 2 10 1 2 1 File Format i scent iac apatite bladed 10 2 10 1 2 2 File Processing csssssesesceceseserenseseresenerenceneroseneees 10 3 101 2 3 Fle Naming cietie eeo erara kea esea ESE 10 4 10 1 2 4 TOA5 TOB1 Format 0 ccc eeeeeeceseeeceeceeeeecneeeeeeeeeeens 10 4 10 1 3 Converting the File cee ceescsseecesecneeeecneesecsaeeeesaesneeeeens 10 5 10 1 4 Repairing Converting Corrupted Files ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 10 5 10 1 5 Viewing a Converted File eee ceccsssecseesecneeeeceseeeeeseeeeeeeens 10 6 10 2 Device Configuration Utility 0 eee eeeeeecneeeecneeeeceaeeeeeseeneeeeens 10 6 10 2 Ts OVERVIEW scececs n nai r E e E bases 10 6 10 2 2 Main DevConfig Screen cece eecssesecssecseeeecnereeceseeeeeseeaeeeeens 10 7 10 2 3 Downloading an Operating System 10 8 10 2 4 Terminal Tab nene aeon nna a nici e 10 9 10 2 5 The Unknown Device Type 0 0 00 cscsseccsseecesecreesecnerereneeeees 10 11 10 3 Splitecsss6s tei vensteeds A nisi eaetGtbesenieeiibieds 10 11 10 3 1 Functional Overview ce eeseecssecssesecseeesceeeeecsaeeeeesecaeeseenees 10 12 10 3 2 Getting Startdan e hte chaps deste atone 10 13 10 3 3 Split Parameter File Entries tec ecsesesseesecseeeecneeeeeeeeeees 10 19 10 3 3 1 Input Files 35 4 cciesinstiunosieidiiy canines 10 19 10
313. ng program will serve as a programming example in this section to illustrate the concepts and program structure This is a program for a CR5000 datalogger Note that other dataloggers may have slightly different parameters for some instructions 5 18 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Const RevDiff 1 Const Del 0 Const Integ 250 Declare constants Const Mult 1 Const Offset 0 Public RefTemp Declare public variables Declarations Public TC 6 dimension array and Units ReffTemp degC declare units Units TC DegC DataTable Temp 1 2000 DataInterval 0 100 mSec 10 Average 1 RefTemp FP2 0 Define Data Table Average 6 TC FP2 0 EndTable BeginProg Scan 10 mSec 3 0 PanelTemp RefTemp 250 I Measure TCDiff TC0 6 mV20C 1 TypeT RefTemp RevDiff Del Integ Mult Offset Scan loop CallTable Temp Call Data Table NextScan EndProg 5 4 7 Data Tables Data storage follows a fixed structure in the datalogger in order to optimize the time and space required Data are stored in tables such as OAS TIMESTAMP S 1995 02 16 15 15 04 61 1995 02 16 15 15 04 62 1995 02 16 15 15 04 63 1995 02 16 15 15 04 64 The user s program determines the values that are output and their sequence The datalogger automatically assigns names to each field in the data table In the above table TIMESTAMP RECORD RefTemp_Avg and TC_Avg 1 are fieldnames The fieldnames are a combination of the variable name or alias if one ex
314. ng when you click the Finish button on the Home screen Section 5 Program Creation and Editing After making your selections note that the title bar shows the datalogger type and scan interval Once you have saved the file the filename will replace untitled scw 5 5 2 2 Step 2 Choose Sensors to Monitor In step 2 you tell Short Cut which sensors you ll be measuring Short Cut organizes sensors into application groups Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds File Program Tools Help Progress TT g cR1000 Sensors Measurements 1 New Open O Sensors SE ear 2 Sensors Generic Measurements arag a a O LEGHE cal Sputputs O Barometric Pressure 4 Finish O Precipitation O Relative Humidity amp Temperat 9 Soil Moisture Solar Radiation Wiring Diagram Wind Speed amp Direction Wiring Text Miscellaneous Sensors Temperature aO Water Calculations amp Control Calculations Control Wiring Double click a folder icon to see the sensors in that category Add a sensor by highlighting it and press lt return gt the arrow button or double click on the sensor Some major groups have subgroups Double clicking the Meteorological group folder shows several subgroups of meteorological sensors with the Barometric Pressure subgroup expanded to show the available sensors Refer to the documentation for your sensors
315. nits See the help for each calculation to determine the necessary inputs Note that there is also a User Entered calculation available in the Calculations folder With it you can enter your own custom calculation In the example below a new measurement AirTF is being created by performing calculations on an existing measurement AirTC Expressions Measurements Operators and Functions Batt multiply BP_mmHg divide Enc_RH add AirTC subtract RH A raise to the power of MOD modulo divide Enter Math Expressions AirTF AirTC 1 8 32 absolute value the fraction portion FR the integer portion INT ABS FRAC INT see help for a complete list of ful Check Expressions Examples of valid expressions Co Zee Vee Ex Root SQRT ABS data Refer to the online help for complete information on creating User Calculation 5 33 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 34 Short Cut provides you with a wiring diagram by clicking on Wiring Diagram on the left side of the Sensors window In the example below Short Cut was told to measure a CS105 Barometric Pressure sensor an HMP45C Air Temperature and Relative Humidity sensor and a 05103 Wind Speed and Direction sensor Each sensor was allocated the necessary terminals Short Cut will not let you add more sensors than there are terminals on that datalogger or device You can print this diagram or the textual equivalent by cho
316. nts for final storage Short Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Cut also generates a wiring diagram for connecting your sensors to the datalogger Short Cut was designed to help the beginning datalogger programmer create datalogger programs quickly and easily Short Cut effectively insulates the user from having to know the nuances of datalogger programming and the Edlog versus CRBasic programming languages It supports the most commonly sold sensors from Campbell Scientific as well as generic measurements such as differential voltage bridge and pulse commonly used calculation and control functions such as heat index calculation alarm conditions and simple controls and multiplexer analog channel expansion devices Short Cut cannot be used to edit existing Edlog CRBasic or Short Cut for DOS programs Program editing and more complex datalogger programming functions should be accomplished using our Edlog or CRBasic Editor programming tools Short Cut was designed with extensive built in help Help can be accessed at any time by pressing the F1 key There are also Help buttons on most screens You can also open the Help by selecting Short Cut from Short Cut s Help menu Help for each sensor can be accessed by searching the Help Index or pressing the Help button from the sensor form After generating the program you can send it to the datalogger from the Results tab of Short Cut s Finish screen or from the Clock Program tab
317. o determine who is trying to connect If security is enabled this message will appear for someone trying to connect with the wrong user name or password If the user has not set up custom modem configurations this file will not exist Check the connections of the communication path to the datalogger make sure the datalogger is connected and has power check the security setting in the datalogger and in 10 65 Section 10 Utilities 0 CY Creo KS Message Parameters Message Meaning disabled for this device 7 The transaction was aborted by client request 8 The device is busy with another transaction started complete Data polling failed Data collection by polling failed due to communication failure or a timeout Ke query start Directed data query continue 05 Directed data query complete query failed Getting logger table definitions The user requested data has been received by the server W N W ww The server is getting the table definitions from the datalogger The server has received the datalogger table definitions The request to get table definitions has failed Received logger table definitions Failed to get logger table definitions the directed query could not fit in one block and the next part is being requested 10 66 polling started polling completed A user initiated query has been started The requested data in The directed query r
318. o the values stored in the Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing cal file use the SampleFieldCal table output instruction with the NewFieldCal system variable as the trigger For more information about how to use these instructions refer to the FieldCal instruction topic of your datalogger manual or use the online help topic for FieldCal within the CRBasic Editor 9 2 2 Calibration File Details It is important to understand the purpose and function of the calibration file created by a CRBasic program when using the FieldCal instruction The calibration file has the same name as the program that creates and uses it except that it ends with a cal extension For example myProg CRI would generate a calibration file called myProg CAL The calibration file is located on the same datalogger storage device as the program that creates it e g CPU CRD USR The calibration file is created when the program runs and doesn t find an existing calibration file that it can use and it is updated upon each successful calibration The calibration file contains information about the latest calibrations performed during program execution and information that the RTDAQ Calibration Wizard needs to step users through the calibration process 9 3 Four Kinds of Calibration 9 3 1 Zeroing The FieldCal instruction family can perform four basic kinds of calibrations Zeroing Calibration Offset Calibration Two point Multiplier Offset Calibration Li
319. ocessed into a 24 hour summary for this function to produce the output expected Section 10 Utilities NOTE When Date and Edate are used within other functions they must be used with the older format Date doy y and Edate doy y instead of using the extended date functions For example AVG 1 Date 3 2 When used with table based data files the format would be AVG 1 Date 1 1 When producing a monthly summary and outputting the month along with the data you might want to set up the value for the month as month 1 to correctly reflect the month that the data actually represents 10 3 3 6 7 Split Functions Example The following is a parameter file that operates on the Mt Logan data with several of the Split features being utilized This first screen shows the input file and the select criteria that were programmed This example does calculations based on temperature and wind speed to determine the wind chill Split Win Splitman PAR paalz File Edit Labels Run Printer Help Input File s Output File Input Data Fil ile Inf Browse C Campbellsci LoggerNet MSTSPLIT Auto Detect Offsets Options Start Conditio Stop Conditio t 3 32 1 8 v 5 0 447 h sqrt 100 v 10 45 33 t Te 33 h 22 066 smpllts J smpl v 1 smpl h 1 smpl T e 1 J smpl T 1 1 8 32 MSTSPLIT dat 1 10 47 Section 10 Utilities The following screen shows the output file setup including the column headings and
320. of RTDAQ s main screen 5 5 2 Creating a Program Using Short Cut On opening Short Cut presents a wizard that walks you through the steps of creating a datalogger program Short Cut File Program Tools Help Progress 1 New Open Sensors 3 Outputs 1 gt q M i Wiring f ml Wiring Diagram q a m 4 Finish Wiring Text Open Program m New Open Help lt Previous Next gt 5 27 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 2 1 Step 1 Create a New File or Open Existing File To begin creating a new program press the New button Short Cut File Progress 91 New Open Sensors 3 Outputs 4 Finish Wiring Viring Diagram Wiring Text Eo CR800 Series B CR9000x A dialog box is displayed containing a list of Campbell Scientific dataloggers CR9000X Configuration Available CR9000x Modules CR9000 x CR9050 5 Analog Input Slot Module CR9051 5Y Analog Input CR90520C Filter Module BOTA ROWSTSUPAIY CR90521EPE Filter Module CR9055 50V Analog Input CR9058 60 Isolated Analog Inp CR9060 Excitation Module CR9070 Counter Module CR9071 Counter Module 9032 CPU 9041 A D Amplifier CR9050 5V Analog Input CR9060 Excitation Module CR9070 Counter Module ODN Ol an ALON Be BPR HR My FP Oo g B If you are creating a program for a CR9000X Short Cut will then bring up the CR9000X Configuration dial
321. og box From this dialog box you indicate which CR9000X modules are inserted into which CR9000X slots To add a module select the module by clicking on it in the Available CR9000X Modules list select the Slot by clicking on the slot number then press the arrow key 5 28 NOTE Section 5 Program Creation and Editing To remove a module select the slot containing it and then press the Remove Module button At any time you may choose OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box or choose Cancel to exit out of the process Whenever you are working with a CR9000X program this dialog box can be brought up by choosing Program Configure CR9000X from the Short Cut menu However the Remove Module button is only available when a new program is being created Once the OK button on the dialog box has been pressed modules can be added but they cannot be removed For all datalogger types Short Cut will next ask for a Scan Interval or period for each measurement cycle Scan Interval Scan Interval aa Seconds When choosing a scan interval remember that faster scan intervals will use more power For most applications a 10 to 60 second scan interval is sufficient If faster scan intervals are required for your application make sure there is sufficient time for the execution of all instructions in the program refer to the section in the datalogger manual on Execution Intervals for additional information The next dialog
322. og box for the differential voltage instruction VoltDiff Comment Variables Cancel Measure second time Low referenced to High 16 667 ms integration Section 5 Program Creation and Editing The Prev Previous and Next buttons can be used to move to the next or previous instruction with the parameter entry box opened Short Cuts for Editing the Parameters Right clicking or pressing F2 on a parameter that uses a variable as an input type will display a list of variables that have been defined in the program A sample list is shown below AIRCOOL AIRHEAT FAN OFFSET D vorti P RH P TEMP The variable list is sorted by variable type and then alphabetically by name In the list above the first green A denotes that the variable AIRCOOL is set up as an Alias Constants are listed with a blue C Dimensioned variables are listed with a red D and Public variables are listed with a black P At any time you can press F10 to bring up the list of variables regardless of the input type for the selected parameter Also defined variables can be selected from the Variables drop down list box at the upper right of the Parameter dialog box Pressing F9 at any time will also bring up a list of variables However when a variable is chosen from the list brought up by F9 it will simply be inserted at the cursor without overwriting anything Right clicking or pressing F2 on a parameter that has a finite number of valid
323. olor m Show Left Axis Title Amplitude Right Grid Color fe C Color Each Bin The Chart Colors options allow you to set the color for the back wall of the FFT Histogram display set the color of the left grid scale or put the display into the Color Each Bin mode When the Color Each Bin check box is selected each bin or alternately each line drawn between bin values and the newest bin value itself are given a different color on the display so that they can be distinguished from each other Use the Titles section to set up titles to show alongside the values of the FFT Histogram display You may elect to show a title for the entire FFT spectrum or histogram specifying the text to display and the font used to display it You can also set up a title to be displayed by the y axis For more information about using the Visual Display options refer to the online help which can be accessed by opening the Options screen and pressing the Help button Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 9 8 4 Individual Trace Options 7 9 8 4 1 Display Tab 7 9 8 4 2 Marks Tab Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Display Marks Select Axis Line Width Cal 1 Line Style R Symbol Style Solid Line The Trace tab on the Graphing Options window has two subtabs Display and Marks The Display tab is used to set the color used for the bins or lines on the FFT Histogr
324. om the main Rainflow Histogram screen you can use the arrow buttons to the right of Record to scroll through records of the Rainflow Histogram 6 5 4 3 Rainflow Histogram Toolbar The Rainflow Histogram includes the following toolbar icons Copy to Clipboard Places the Rainflow Histogram graphic on the Windows clipboard It can then be pasted into other applications Print Prints the Rainflow Histogram Print options can be set before printing begins Export Allows the Rainflow Histogram to be exported in a choice of text or graphical formats a 6 17 Section 6 View Pro 6 18 6 5 5 FFT NOTE Graph Options Opens a dialog box from which you can set properties for the Rainflow Histogram including scaling colors margins titles etc This dialog box can also be brought up by pressing the Options button R7 Show Table Brings the main View Pro window in front of other windows making the data file s visible El Show Hide Gradient A toggle button that turns on and off the gradient background of the Rainflow Histogram It may be useful hide the gradient when printing the Rainflow Histogram E Modify Selection Brings up the Rainflow Histogram Setup dialog box from which you can choose the data to be viewed gl Undo Zoom Returns the Rainflow Histogram to its original state after zooming i From the FFT screen you can view FFT data The FFT button on the toolbar will be enabled if there is at
325. omponents that comprise a measured signal Often by identifying the strongest frequency components filtering strategies or other kinds of digital signal processing techniques can be devised for interpreting or manipulating measured data When discrete signals are provided as inputs to the algorithm the output is also a discrete set of values each one having reference to a frequency interval These are known as bins FFT spectra can be represented in scalar form i e single valued one bin value per frequency range such as Amplitude or Power outputs or in vector form i e dual valued outputs two values per frequency range such as Real Imaginary or Amplitude Phase output pairs Campbell Scientific dataloggers can take a selected number of sampled points in the time domain and calculate the FFT spectrum for that set of points and store that spectrum into a table record The number of sampled points in the time domain must be an even power of 2 such as 32 64 128 and so on up to 65536 Usually the number of bins or bin pairs in the output of the calculation is about half of the number of time domain input points N 2 1 For example an FFT spectrum calculated from 2048 time series points can have as many as 1025 frequency output points or pairs Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 8 2 FFT vs FFTSample Any measured value can be stored into a table as an FFT spectrum using the FFT output instruction When used this way the t
326. on of the RTMC Development product known as RTMC Pro RTMC Pro must be purchased separately from RTDAQ but it installs and operates seamlessly from within the RTDAQ environment After installation an RTMC Pro Developer button will appear on the RTDAQ Toolbar next to the standard RTMC Developer button cj Since only the standard version of RTMC Developer comes in the RTDAQ package that is the software that is discussed in this manual Refer to the RTMC Pro manual for more details about how to use RTMC Pro within RTDAQ The RTMC Development window as shown below has three sections Project Component List The panel on the left shows the hierarchy of the display components and how they are associated with each other Every component of the display screen is shown in this list and it provides a shortcut to get to any graphical component 8 1 Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software Project Workspace The middle panel is the display screen workspace The graphic components are placed in the workspace as they should appear on the final display Components Toolbar The toolbar on the top contains the display screen components that can be placed in the workspace Selecting a component and clicking in the workspace places the component and brings up the Properties window for that component RTMC was designed to be easy and straightforward to use You should experiment with different combinations and options to get the display
327. on process completes 9 4 3 Using the Mode Variable for Manual Two Point Calibration These steps demonstrate how to perform manual two point calibrations Multiplier Offset or Multiplier Only 1 10 11 Ensure the status value of the mode variable is 0 or 6 before you start a Anumber greater than 0 that is not 6 indicates that a calibration is in progress or that the last calibration did not complete properly b A number less than 0 indicates that the calibration process encountered an error Resolve the error before proceeding with the calibration then set the mode value to zero for a fresh start Place the sensor into the first known point condition Indicate the known value of the first point by changing the known value variable to that value Set the mode variable to 1 to initiate the first part of the calibration process Note that the datalogger automatically sets the mode variable to 2 during the first point calibration process Note that the mode variable is automatically set to 3 when the first point is completed The datalogger is waiting for the user to place the system into the second point condition Place the sensor into the second known point condition Indicate the known value of the second point by changing the known value variable to that value Set the mode variable to 4 to initiate the second part of the calibration Note that the datalogger sets the mode variable to 5 durin
328. on to be saved Press Load Graph Configuration to load settings that have been previously saved Browse to the file containing your saved settings and press Open Those settings will be applied immediately to the FFT Histogram screen 7 9 9 Accepting or Abandoning Changes to the FFT Histogram Options Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Y Axis X Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits Automatic Max Value Custom Limits Min Value C Logarithmic After setting the various options for the FFT Histogram display press the Apply button to immediately put those changes into effect The options screen will remain open and the settings will be applied Press the OK button if you would like to apply the settings and exit the Options screen Press Cancel if you would like to abandon any changes made to the settings since the screen was opened Press Help to access the online help topic for this screen 7 65 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 10 Rainflow Histogram Monitoring RTDAQ can display rainflow histograms that have been created by the datalogger The display will be updated as quickly as data is received from the datalogger For this to function properly there must be a Rainflow output instruction defined in the CRBasic program that is running on the datalogger to which RTDAQ is connected NOTE RTDAQ does not create rainflow histograms from time series measurements It only
329. onitoring Data in Real time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Y Axis Right Y Axis X Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits Automatic Max Value 49 75 Min Value C Logarithmic 50 25 Custom Limits 7 6 6 1 Scaling Tab Use the Scaling tab to control how the X and Y axes are scaled for the display of data in the graphical area You may select the Y Axis tab to configure the y axis used by default on the left side of the XY Plot s graphical area You may select the Right Y Axis tab to configure the y axis used on the right side of the XY Plot s graphical area if it is used You may select the X Axis tab to configure the x axis used in the graphical area Each of the three scales has independent settings but all are configured in a similar manner Use the Scaling Option box to select whether Automatic or Custom scaling will be used for the selected axis When automatic scaling is used the maximum and minimum values of the currently displayed set of data points help to determine what the maximum and minimum limits of the display are A display scaling may have its scale adjusted automatically whenever a point is graphed if necessary When Custom Limits are selected for the scaling the user provides the maximum and minimum values to be used for scaling the axis If a point falls outside of this specified range it will not be drawn in the graphical area of the XY Plot
330. ord or record span If any of the date time or record number options are changed the other options will automatically adjust to reflect the change Note that changes to the records included will not be reflected in the data panel until the Apply button is pressed Add Selection to Selected Graph Adds the data that is currently selected to the currently selected graph Clear All Selections Clears all selections in the currently selected data panel Clear Selection In the currently selected data panel clears the selection with focus This is the selection that has the dashed box around it Left or right click on a selection to give it focus Autosize Columns Returns columns to the default sizes This function can also be accomplished by selecting View Autosize Columns from the menu 6 6 2 Graphs 6 6 3 Traces Section 6 View Pro Add Bookmark The user can quickly navigate to a bookmarked record by using the Goto Bookmark option Choosing the Add Bookmark option will add a bookmark to arecord When a record is bookmarked a numbered circle beginning at 0 will appear to the left of the record A bookmark can also be added to the top visible record by typing Ctrl Shift n where n is the number of the bookmark Note that bookmarks are not persistent and will be gone once the data panel or View Pro is closed Goto Bookmark If the data panel contains one or more bookmarks hovering over the Goto Bookmark menu item wil
331. ories In this version of RTDAQ each major application keeps its own working directory The working directory holds the user files created by the application as well as configuration and initialization INI files This scheme was implemented because Campbell Scientific uses the underlying tools and many of the applications the communications server library files datalogger program editors etc in a number of different products By providing a common working directory for each major application you should see consistent file organization as you move from one product to another Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures The following figure shows the typical working directories for RTDAQ if the default options were selected during installation Desktop My Documents YB My Computer S Local Disk C E Campbellsci O ProgGen RTDAQ O logs O sys rte O scwin splitw O View Pro CardConvert Contains user specific files for the operation of CardConvert CRBasicEditor Default folder for user s CRBasic datalogger programs DevConfig Default folder for Device Configuration Utility saved settings files Lib Libraries of pre compilers templates and help es used by CRBasic Editor and libraries of settings fil d ic Edi d libraries of setti supported by devices configured with the DevConfig appli cation PakBusGraph Contains user
332. ormatted files For CRBasic dataloggers you can use the CRBasic Editor to open the CR files directly Again Short Cut will not be able to open the files you ve edited with the CRBasic Editor since they are not an SCW file 5 5 5 New Sensor Files Short Cut was designed with future flexibility in mind Datalogger and sensor support is provided as individual files and not part of the SCWIN executable As new dataloggers and sensors become available new definition files will be created to add and modify the necessary features known to Short Cut To update these files you can download the latest version of Short Cut from the Campbell Scientific website http www campbellsci com downloads It is also possible to have custom sensor files created for sensors your organization uses that are not included with Short Cut Contact your Campbell Scientific applications engineer for details 5 5 6 Custom Sensor Files The creation of custom sensor files can be enabled from Short Cut s Tools Options menu item Once enabled custom sensor files can be created by right clicking on a sensor in the Available Sensors list and choosing Create Custom Sensor The resulting dialog box will allow the user to make changes to the chosen sensor file and then save it with a new name See Short Cut s Online Help for additional information on changes that can be made By default custom sensor files will be created in C CampbellSci SCWin SENSORS
333. os RF400 series spread spectrum radios and multidrop interfaces MD9 and MD485 RTDAQ represents a significant milestone in bringing ease of use improved datalogger support and configurable data monitoring to Campbell Scientific s industrial customer base Customized data monitoring is accomplished via graphical real time windows and specialized engineering displays RTDAQ is an ideal solution for users desiring high speed data collection over a single telecommunications medium but who do not rely on scheduled data collection 1 1 Section 1 Introduction 1 1 RTDAQ Overview 1 1 1 Main Screen RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help Wi comes E4 2 z B A tes BE I Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data Datalogger Information Datalogger Name CR1000 Datalogger Type CR1000 y te direct Connect Connecti TAM Port COM3 oe _ The main screen of RTDAQ provides three tabs with datalogger interaction functions Clock Program Monitor Data and Collect Data as well as a toolbar with buttons to launch frequently used utilities and auxiliary applications Cloc CR1000 RTDAQ 1 0 a Support Software CR1000 CR1000 Information ewe CR1000 m The toolbar includes utilities for working with data files View Pro Split and CardConvert as well as utilities for generating and editing datalogger programs Short Cut
334. osing the Print button Many users find it handy to leave a printed wiring diagram in the enclosure with the datalogger in case a sensor has to be replaced Short Cut CR1000 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw Scan Interval 5 0000 Seconds File Program Tools Help CR1000 Progress 4 New Onen CR1000 Wiring Diagram for untitled scw Wiring details can be found in the help file 2 Sensors 3 Outputs 4 Finish CS105 Barometric Pressure Sensor CR1000 Blue Brown 1H Yellow White Ground Clear Ground Wiring G 12V Ci Wiring Diagram Wiring Text C S210 10162 Enclosure Relative Humidity Sensor CR1000 White iL Clear G Black sv HMP35C Temperature amp Relative Humidity Sensor CR1000 Purple Ground White Ground Orange 2H Green 2L Clear Ground Short Cut can also create programs for dataloggers using a variety of interface devices including multiplexers and special interfaces for sensors Add these devices with the Add Device button and resulting pop up as below Select Device Model Device Model OK Cancel AM16 32 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Once you ve added a device such as the AM16 32 multiplexer a tab is added to the screen for that device and the sensors available for that device are shown Short Cut CR1000 AM1 6 32 C Campbellsci SCWin untitled scw File Program Tools Help Progr
335. ot been confirmed by communicating with the datalogger s You will see these dataloggers listed in the software s network map Dynamic links black lines are communication links to dataloggers that have been confirmed 4 6 5 4 3 Viewing Changing Settings in a PakBus Datalogger If you right click a device in PakBus graph you will be presented with a context menu From this menu select Edit Settings to display a list of the PakBus settings for the datalogger Some of these settings are read only but other settings can be changed Click within the cell for a setting enter a new value and then press Enter to make a change If the change is accepted the cell will appear green If the change was denied which likely means the setting is read only the cell will appear red 4 6 5 4 4 Right Click Functionality There are several options available from the context menu that is displayed when you right click a device not all devices will have all settings Edit Settings This option shows the PakBus settings of a device see above Ping Node This option will send a packet to the selected device to determine if it is reachable in the PakBus network The results of the ping will be displayed in the Log Messages Each ping message will include the size of the packet sent and the time of response from the pinged device The last message recorded will include summary information from the ping Verify Routing Table This option will reques
336. ou notice that the points being plotted have fallen behind the real time measurements you can synchronize the display back to the current measurement time by skipping over the points yet to be plotted and returning to the newest points available This is done by pressing the Sync Data button The plot will be cleared and points will begin to be displayed using the newest data arriving from the datalogger In some instances you can alleviate the lagging condition instead by using a smaller value for the Points per Field setting 7 38 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time E XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TernpSensort i 0 00 T Add Y Value X Axis Value empsensor3 I 0 02 Points per Field 100 S 7 39 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 6 4 Using the Graphical Display Area of the XY Plot You can right click on the graphical display area of the XY Plot screen to access special functions m XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values TempSensort Save As Copy Options Print Preview Print Clear Sync Data Aday Value P Delete i Start Stop Hide Controls X Axis Value TempSensor3 0 0 Add X Value Delete Points per Field 100 fl Use the Save As option to save the current graph to a windows bitmap file bmp or windows metafile wmf format Use the Copy function to copy the current graph to the Windows clipboard This copied bit
337. own CR23X TD CR3000 i R Unknown Device Type CR510 korpen Unknown does not represent any specific device type When connected a CR510 TD 7 a A CR800 Series terminal emulator can be used on the serial port and using the baud rate cR9000 specified in the left panel In addition you can press the Identify S150 Datalogger Type button below to identify the protocol and type of the MD485 A k NL100 datalogger that is attached to the specified port RF400 RF401 Beit In order to connect to or identify the device make sure it is and connected to 4 RFSOOM the appropriate serial port and press the Connect or Identify S c105 Datalogger Type buttons SDM CAN SDM SIO1 SMxM TGA1L004 Serial Port cOM1 Baud Rate 115200 Identify Datalogger Type Clicking Connect puts DevConfig into Terminal emulation mode on the Serial Port and at the Baud Rate selected When you click on Identify Datalogger Type DevConfig will attempt to identify the type of device that is connected on the specified serial port It will attempt to communicate using each of the datalogger protocols mixed array table data and PakBus in turn If it fails to get any answer to any of these attempts the baud rate will be automatically changed and the various protocols will be attempted again When DevConfig recognizes the response from the device and the device type is one of the supported types that device type will automatically be selec
338. ows you to store data based on time the state of a flag the value of a measurement or a data event Be cautious in using more than one check box for the logic for the check boxes in the advanced mode are inclusive that is they must all be true in order for any output to be stored If you were to choose to store rain only if both the time and the measurement logic were chosen then the very last measurement of rain in the last 10 seconds would have to have been greater than zero RIGHT AT 6 00 a m Otherwise both conditions wouldn t be true and the value wouldn t be stored The Output tab for dataloggers that can store data to a compact flash or PCMCIA card has a check box which when selected will also store the data table to a card if one is inserted in the datalogger In addition the Advanced Output for these dataloggers shown below allows for control of the number of records stored in the table The Table Name field is used to assign a unique name for the data table in the datalogger The Records field is used to set up the size of the data table that is the number of records that will be stored to the table before new records begin overwriting the oldest records A fixed number can be entered into this field or a 1 can be entered If a 1 is entered the table is set to auto allocate which means the datalogger will assign all available memory in the datalogger or the card to the table If multiple tables are defined in the
339. perating system version the name of running program battery voltage various error counters including watch dog and low battery conditions and an estimate of how many days it will take for data tables to begin overwriting their oldest records Detailed information on the status table for each datalogger can be found in the operator s manual for that particular datalogger Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen The Status Table display screen is shown below Datalogger Status CR3000 Table Fill Times Status Table Datalogger Information Station Name 1 OS Version CR3000 Std 00 28 OS Date 051117 OS Signature 19486 PakBus Address 3000 Security Settings 1 0 Security Settings 2 0 Security Settings 3 0 Panel Temperature 25 42 C Memory 4194304 bytes Watchdog Errors 0 Program Information Current Program CPU fileread CR3 Start Time 11 23 2005 2 23 15 PM Run Signature 8965 Program Signature 57501 Compile Results for Last Program Sent Compiled in SequentialMode Program Errors Skipped Scans 0 Skipped Slow Scans 0 Skipped Records in ReadDatl 0 Skipped Records in ReadDat2 0 Battery Information Battery Voltage 12 52 Lithium Battery 3 49 This window has three tabs Summary Table Fill Times and Status Table 4 6 3 3 1 Summary Tab The Summary tab provides an overview of important status information from the datalogger including information about the datalogger model and its firmware current pro
340. ph Print options can be set before ga printing begins Export Allows the graph to be exported in a choice of text or graphical formats Lock Scrolling Locks and unlocks the scroll bar at the oS bottom of the graph 6 9 Section 6 View Pro 6 10 Common ae Independent When unlocked moving the scroll bar on either the graph or the data file will scroll both the graph and the data file When locked the graph will not scroll However moving the scroll bar on either the graph or the data file will still scroll the data file This is a toggle button When the lock is currently enabled there will be a lock on top of the icon Graph Options Opens a dialog box from which you can set properties for the graph including colors margins titles legend etc This dialog box can also be brought up by pressing the Options button Show Table Brings the main View Pro window in front of other windows making the data file s visible Show Hide Graph Cursor A toggle button that shows and hides the graph cursor The graph cursor is a vertical line extending from the top to the bottom of the graph display When visible you can click and drag the cursor across the graph Data values at the current cursor position will be shown in the table Show Hide Gradient A toggle button that turns on and off the gradient background of the graph It may be useful hide the gradient when printing the graph Common Independen
341. plit a file into multiple files separated at the Removemarks by converting the file with the Use Removemarks option selected As with the Use Filemarks option the first file stored uses a _1 at the end of the root file name and the number is incremented by one with each new file saved Use Filemarks and Use Removemarks can be selected at the same time to create a new file from the data table any time either of the marks is encountered Use Time This option is used to store the converted data into files based on the timestamp of the data When the Use Time check box is selected the Time Settings button becomes available This button opens a dialog box that is used to set a Start Date and Time along with an Interval which are used to determine the time frame for the data that goes into each file Note that the Start Date and Time are not used to specify the actual time and date to begin 10 3 Section 10 Utilities processing the file rather they are used as a reference for the file interval Processing always starts at the beginning of the file When Use Filemarks Use Removemarks or Use Time is selected the Create New Filenames option is disabled New file names will always be created Convert Only New Data When this option is selected only data that has been collected since CardConvert s last conversion of the specified file s will be converted The first time CardConvert is used on a file all data will be converted
342. preceded by asterisk the text bad blanks inserted data highlighted in a red box at for bad values bottom right of screen Report File or Printer only lines with bad data are displayed only lines with only lines with Display only bad data bad values displayed in red and bad data output bad data output option enabled preceded by asterisk the text bad blanks inserted bad values data highlighted in a red box at for bad values preceded by bottom right of screen asterisk The Screen Display box must be checked if not no data will be displayed on the Split Run screen NOTE 10 3 3 6 2 Variables NOTE In this instance out of range data refers to data outside of the specified output range It is not to be confused with out of range data generated by the logger Variables can be assigned names in the Select line For example x 4 5 6 3 0 means that x is equal to element 6 times the number 3 times element 5 subtracted from element 4 A numeric value is distinguished from an array element by the inclusion of a decimal point Variables must be declared before they can be used in the Select line A variable name must start with an alpha character can include numbers and must not exceed eight characters Variable names can start with the same character but they must not start with another complete variable name e g the variable XY is not valid if there is also the variable X A comma must follow each variable state
343. produced by XY plots that may have analytical significance for certain applications 7 6 1 Using the XY Plot To use the XY Plot window of RTDAQ ensure that you are connected to a datalogger then select the Monitor Data tab Click on the button labeled XY Plot RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help WY discomes ar all al P Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data crom ETEen eoa R Biot dees FET R R V Field Monitor E 2 CR800Series 7 30 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time Now you will see the XY Plot window M XY Plot 1 Y Axis Values Addy Value X Axis Value I Adax value Delete Points per Field 100 Options Clear You may create multiple XY Plot windows in RTDAQ After XY Plot screens have been created they can be brought to the front by using the drop down list that becomes available on the XY Plot button You can also use this drop down list to create XY Plot screens after at least one already exists since pushing the XY Plot button at that point will bring the focus to an existing plot instead of creating a new one RIDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help YY disomea i B z nad o B n a 4 Clock Program Monitor Data Collect Data _ Ports amp Flags Table Monitor Graph
344. py on the RTMC clipboard Copy places a copy of the selected component on the RTMC clipboard Align provides some options for lining up a group of components with the first component selected Select two or more components by using the cursor to click and drag a bounding box around the desired components Components can also be selected by selecting the first component and then selecting the other components while holding down the Ctrl key With the components selected choose one of the alignment options The components will be aligned based on the first component selected The first component is identified by the dark red boundary The other selected components have a light red boundary Be careful about the alignment you choose Selecting Top Align for a group of components that are arranged vertically will cause all the components to end up on top of each other Space Evenly will evenly distribute the selected components horizontally across or vertically down the page Make Same Size allows you to set two or more objects to the same overall size width or height as the first object selected Select one or more components by using the cursor to click and drag a bounding box around the desired components The components can also be selected by selecting the first component and then selecting the other components while holding down the Ctrl key The first component is identified by the dark red boundary The other selected components have a light
345. r current states for the currently connected datalogger The state of a port or flag can be changed by clicking the LED button to the left of the field label A black unlighted LED indicates that the port or flag is low false green lighted indicates that it is high true A grey color indicates that the window is communicating with the datalogger to assess the state or set the state of the variable i e busy Custom labels can be assigned to the ports and flags by double clicking within the label field and entering new text for the label Ports and Flags PortStatus 1 SW12Volts j Comm ctive5DC11 PortStatus 2 RS232Power CommActiveCOM1 PortStatus 3 CommActiveRS232 Comm ctiveCOM2 PortStatus 4 Comm ctiveME Penis tetae Coenen PortStatus 6 CommActiveSDC PortStatus 7 Comm ctivesDCS e e le e e e le g l 6 e PortStatus 8 CommActiveSDC10 The dataloggers used with RTDAQ do not have predefined flags The first time a program is sent to the datalogger RTDAQ will look for a Public array or variable declaration with the name Flag in the CRBasic program If a Flag declaration is found the declared flags will be added to the Ports amp Flags dialog box The number of flags that will be added is limited by the number of cells available on the Ports amp Flags display CR800 CR1000 and CR3000 dataloggers have control ports whose values can be toggled from this d
346. r information for each of the data values is included along with field names and units of measure if they are available Binary Table Data TOB1 Data is stored in a binary format Though this format saves disk storage space it may need to be converted before it is usable in some other programs Array Compatible CSV Data is stored in a user defined comma separated format This option can be used to produce output files from table data dataloggers that are similar to those created by mixed array dataloggers When this option is chosen the Array CSV Options button becomes available so that you can customize the data string for the CSV file Section 10 Utilities If an array ID is desired select the Include Array ID check box and enter a value into the field The value can range from 1 to 1023 The Array ID will be the first value in the array of data Select the appropriate timestamp options for the type of timestamp to write to the file Each time element will be output as a separate data value in the array and the data values will be separated by a comma Selecting Year will output the year represented by four digits YYYY e g 2009 The Day will be represented as a Julian Day The Hour Minutes will be represented by four digits hhmm When Midnight is 2400 is selected the timestamp will reflect midnight as the current date with 2400 for the Hour Minutes Otherwise the timestamp will reflect midnight as the next day s date with
347. r over a control text box or other screen feature and the hint will appear automatically and remain visible for a few seconds These hints will often explain the purpose of a control or a suggested action For text boxes where some of the text is hidden the full text will appear in the hint Section 2 System Requirements 2 1 Hardware and Software RTDAQ is an integrated application of 32 bit programs designed to run on Intel based computers running Microsoft Windows operating systems Recommended platforms for running RTDAQ include Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista All installations require a Pentium II or better processor running at 1 6 GHz or faster and a minimum of 512 MB of RAM A minimum of 500 MB free space on the hard disk and a 1024x728 or better high color VGA Graphics Card are also required RTDAQ also requires that TCP IP support and telephony services be installed on the PC 2 1 Section 2 System Requirements 2 2 Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 1 CD ROM Installation The following instructions assume that drive D is a CD ROM drive on the computer from which the software is being installed If the drive letter is different substitute the appropriate drive letter 1 Put the installation CD in the CD ROM drive The install application should come up automatically Skip to step 3 2 If the install does not start then from the Windows system menu select Start Run Type
348. ransparent oe amp Style YValue 7 27 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 28 7 4 9 5 Using Saved Configurations Select the Save tab to load a previously saved configuration of the graph screen options or to save the current option settings as a configuration to be retrieved at a later time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Save Save Graph Configuration Load Graph Configuration After you have used the available options in the graph screen for some time you may find certain groups of settings which are useful to you again and again To facilitate the easy recall of such configurations you may save all of the current option screen selections together into a configuration file When you run RTDAQ at a later time and open the graph screen you may load those settings by simply loading the configuration file that you previously saved This allows you to set the options for the screen more easily and reliably This method also allows you to select from among multiple saved scenarios choosing the scenario that is best for the kind of data you currently wish to display Press Save Graph Configuration to save the current option settings to a file Specify a name for the file and browse to the folder in which you would like the configuration to be saved Press Load Graph Configuration to load settings that have been previously saved Browse to the file containing your saved set
349. rays function works only for array based data It is typically used when processing data from burst measurements No Summary When producing reports that include time series processing based on an interval sometimes that interval will not divide evenly into the number of lines in the data file that is being processed For example you may be processing one minute data on a five minute interval and the data file has 103 lines thus there are 3 lines of data left over at the end of the report By Section 10 Utilities default the summary average total maximum etc depending upon which time series function is being used of the left over values is printed at the bottom of the report following the Time Series Heading Enable the No Summary check box to omit the summary of the left over values and the Time Series Heading from the report No Date Advance When processing a data file from an array based datalogger if the time stamp uses midnight as 2400 with today s date the date function will convert that time stamp to 0000 hours with tomorrow s date This is because the algorithm used by the date function is based on Windows time format and it does not support a 2400 time stamp For example Array ID Year Julian Day Hour Minute Date Function Data Data 2002 151 2200 05 31 02 22 00 1 701 193 6 2002 151 2300 05 31 02 23 00 1 476 31 99 2002 151 2400 06 01 02 00 00 1 123 106 2 At Julian Day 151 May 31 2400 hours the date
350. rder number If space does not permit only some of the bin numbers will be shown Choose the View Ranges option to show the left and right frequency or value boundaries for each particular bin Once again only some of the bins may be labeled depending on how much space is available 7 57 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 58 7 9 6 Zooming in on the Spectrum or Histogram You can zoom directly in on a particular location of the graph by clicking in the graphical display area and drawing a box When you release the mouse button the area within the box will become the full display area on the FFT display Press the Undo Zoom button in the top right corner of the graph to return to the full scale display 7 9 7 Save and Print Options When you right click within the display you can access further options FETsHistogram 1 Select T able FFTOut Select Data Save As FFTView FIs ee ae ee Graph Type i i Options Line Print Preview O 3D View Print FP Hide Controls You may select the Save As item to save the current snapshot of the screen to a graphics file You may choose the Copy item to store the current snapshot of the screen graphically to the clipboard of the Windows operating system The graphical snapshot will then be ready to be pasted into other graphics aware applications You may choose the Options items to adjust the settings of the FFT Histogram display see Setting the
351. received The message to set an input location flag or port has been sent to the datalogger The datalogger has acknowledged the set of an input location flag or port Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message A change in table definitions indicates that the datalogger program may have changed Before updating table definitions make sure the needed data in the data cache has been saved to a file if desired Datalogger warning and fault messages should be investigated using the datalogger operators manual or contacting an applications engineer at Campbell Scientific Determine the reason for the timeout This is usually due to a problem with the communications path between the PC and the datalogger 10 67 Section 10 Utilities OY LY oto Wo ci Message Parameters Message Meaning User Response to Message The datalogger failed to acknowledge the set variable message The server is sending a program to the datalogger The actual program segments will appear as BMP1 message Set variable failed Program file send start Program file send status The datalogger has received the program segment Program file send complete The datalogger has compiled the program Program file The datalogger did If the program did not send failed not acknowledge the compile check the error receipt of the messages Otherwise program the program check communications did not compile or
352. red boundary Center will center the selected component s either vertically or horizontally on the page Order is used to manage the position of graphic objects on the workspace Displays are often a combination of a background graphic and data display objects in front Objects added to the workspace are by default placed on top of any existing objects These operations are used to determine the order in which objects are displayed 8 1 4 7 Help Menu Section 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Software If there are multiple screens in the project Window will allow you to change between the screens using the menu The Help menu provides access to online help for all of the features of RTMC In Contents you can find an introduction and overview of RTMC as well as detailed descriptions of all of the display properties and operations The Index allows you to look up help topics based on a key word 8 1 5 Expressions NOTE 8 1 5 1 Operators RTMC has a built in expression interpreter that allows the user to scale the data or create displays based on calculations of a data point The components that display data values can be processed using mathematical expressions For instance a temperature reading in degrees Celsius can be processed to display in degrees Fahrenheit using a mathematical expression An expression is entered for a component by first selecting the data value in the Select Data field and then entering the mathematica
353. rent FFT Histogram screen by pressing the Options button or by selecting Options from a right click menu The Graphing Options screen appears Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Trace Save Y Axis X Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits Automatic Max Value Custom Limits Min Value C Logarithmic 7 9 8 1 Scaling the Axes When data is displayed in the FFT Histogram window a scale is also displayed showing various values for frequency levels on the screen You can control the y axis scale on the left side of the graph You can control the frequency scales for the x axis below the graph Choose the Scaling tab from the Graphing Options screen to set up parameters used to space data on the x and y axes of the display Choose the Y Axis tab to customize the axis on the left side of the screen Choose the X Axis tab to customize the axis on the bottom of the screen The Scaling Options allow you to choose the method used for determining the maximum and minimum values on the current axis as well as whether to use linear scaling equal interval scaling or logarithmic scaling Maximum and minimum values can be chosen automatically depending on the data set currently displayed or the user can specify what the maximum and minimum values should be Choose the Automatic option to use a scale with the maximum and minimum values on the scale to be automatically chosen each time the screen is drawn Set th
354. rinted 10 3 3 7 2 Report Headings A report is output to a printer or file with the extension RPT Headings are not included in the standard output to disk PRN or user named extension output file However a report can be labeled with a header by entering text into the Report Heading field A report heading can have several lines but it is limited to a total of 253 characters including backslashes and carriage returns characters break the report heading into multiple lines When Time Series functions are used in the Select field without an interval they appear as a final summary at the end of the report They can be labeled by entering a title into the Time Series Heading field at the bottom of the Output File page Time Series interval summaries cannot be assigned individual titles directly but you can use special functions such as Label and Crlf to create column headings and special formatting PCDATE within the Report Heading inserts the computer s current date Month Day Year For the European format Day Month Year enter PCEDATE 10 3 3 7 3 Column Headings Up to three lines per column can be entered as column headings These headings are limited to a length of one less than the Output field width Column headings associated with Time Series outputs are repeated for Final Summaries if a title for the Final Summary is requested on the headings for report line The number of digits to report to the righ
355. rking Directory This setting is accessed from the Options menu item of the Tools menu This setting changes the directory that Short Cut offers as a default for your programs Upon installation the default is set to C CampbellSci SCWIN 5 5 3 11 Enable Creation of Custom Sensor Files 5 42 This setting is accessed from the Options menu item of the Tools menu It allows the user to create custom sensor files as described in Section 5 5 6 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 5 4 Editing Programs Created by Short Cut Short Cut is very flexible and has many features It does not however support all of the functionality in Campbell Scientific dataloggers Some users will need to develop programs with capabilities beyond that offered by Short Cut but will want to take advantage of the library of instructions and settings known to a program generator in order to get a head start For Edlog dataloggers the easiest method is to Document the DLD file from within Edlog discussed later in this Section Short Cut creates a DLD file to send to the datalogger that includes input location and final storage labels Documenting a DLD file causes Edlog to use the same labels and to show you the individual instructions being used to carry out the program You can then add and delete instructions from within Edlog to add functionality to the program Short Cut cannot import the files created by Edlog however Short Cut reads only its own SCW f
356. rogram ES Open Wire Diagram ast Sar Scan Int 1 C CSIDOCSICR9000 PROGSALL3TRY GE9 2 EditTemp GE9 OLTS Exit Sec E locki 150 THERMOCOUPLES Block2 150 VOLTAGES HIGHVOLT 490 OLATED BRIDGES 150 Rinrkd 5 48 5 6 4 7 File Exit Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Use File Exit to end the RTDAQ Program Generator application If the current program generator project has changed since the last time it was saved the user will be asked if those changes should be saved before the program shutdown occurs If the user to wants to shut down the Program Generator by shutting down the main RTDAQ program it is recommended that all Program Generator screens be closed until only the main Program Generator screen is visible This will help to avoid unexpected results in program operation when RTDAQ automatically forces the Program Generator to be closed 5 6 4 8 Edit Color Options After selecting Color Options you will see the Customize Display screen for changing the color scheme used when displaying program generator projects in the application Double click on a color to make it active for the currently selected setting Use the Set Defaults button to return to the default color scheme Press Done when the desired color selections have been made amp RIDAQ Program Generator CR9000X File Basie Help Color Options CR9000 Generator Options ID Number Number 5 6 4 9 Edit CR9000X
357. rol over what header information should be included B 1 Table Based Data File Import TOA5 From the Excel menu select File Open Browse to the TOAS file dat that you want to import Excel will recognize the file as not being in an Excel xls format and will open the Text Import Wizard The Text Import Wizard consists of three steps each having its own window Step 1 of 3 Select the Delimited option from the Original Data Type group box Using the arrow buttons to the right of the Start Import at Row field select the number of the first row of data to be imported Since your data file has headers included you should start the import at the first row of data typically row 5 Select the Next button Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 2 x The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this is correct choose Next or choose the Data Type that best describes your data Original data type Choose the file type that best describes your data Delimited Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field C Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row fi a File Origin Windows ANSI Preview of file C CampbellsciLoggerNet CR10T_FiveS5Second dat 1 TOACI1 CR10T FiveSecond 2 THSTAHP RECNBR counter SineOut IntTemp_C Bat 2002 01 17 16 31 45 19787 340 0 342 23 83 13 96 Cancel lt Back next gt Fini
358. rom the computer to the datalogger Clicking the Send button brings up a standard file selection dialog box A new file can be chosen and sent to the highlighted device Datalogger programs data files and other ASCII files can be sent to the datalogger If you select the Set Run Options on Send check box in the File Control screen you will have the opportunity to set the Run On Power up and or Run Now options as the file is being transferred from the PC s file system to the selected device see the Run Options section below Format is used to format the selected device Just like formatting a disk on a computer all of the files on the device are deleted and the device is initialized Refresh will update the list of files for the selected device Retrieve will get the selected file from the datalogger and store it on the computer A Save As dialog box comes up allowing you to specify the directory and file name for the saved file 4 13 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 14 Run Options brings up a dialog box that is used to control what program will be run in the datalogger Highlight a file and then select the Run Options button Select Run Options PubFlag5 CR1 Run Now Do not erase the card data files Erase all card data files created by PubFlag1 CR1 C Run On Power up Fax Run Now will stop the program currently running on the datalogger and then load and run the selected program During this process
359. rs As an example of Measurement Processing to convert a thermocouple measurement from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit you could use the following expression TCTempF TCTemp 1 1 8 32 Logical Evaluation expressions could be used to determine the flow of a program If TCTemp 1 gt 100 Then Call Subroutinel Else enter code for main program End If Many parameters will allow the entry of expressions In the following example the DataTable will be triggered and therefore data stored if TCTemp 1 gt 100 DataTable TempTable TCTemp 1 gt 100 5000 5 4 4 Measurement and Output Processing Instructions Measurement instructions are procedures that set up the measurement hardware to make a measurement and place the results in a variable or a variable array Output processing instructions are procedures that store the results of measurements or calculated values Output processing includes averaging saving maximum or minimum standard deviation FFT etc The instructions for making measurements and outputting data are not found in a standard basic language The instructions Campbell Scientific has created for these operations are in the form of procedures The procedure has a keyword name and a series of parameters that contain the information needed to complete the procedure For example the instruction for measuring the temperature of the CR5000 input panel is PanelTemp Dest Integ PanelTemp is the keyword n
360. rs and performing backups of the network map The Tools menu is used for accessing supplementary programs such as the ones shown on the Toolbar The Help menu is used for accessing the RTDAQ online help system 4 6 1 1 Saving and Loading Configurations 4 6 1 2 Exit For information on how to use these functions refer to the Saving and Loading Global Configuration Files section of Chapter 7 Monitoring Data in Real Time The Exit item is used to close all real time windows disconnect from the connected datalogger and close RTDAQ 4 6 2 View Menu NOTE RTDAQ can display the user interface component text for buttons dialog boxes and other user interface elements in a language other than English if a separate language package has been installed If a language package is installed on your machine the View menu will have a Languages entry and you will see the installed language as an item in the submenu When a new language is chosen RTDAQ will immediately reflect that change Only the main RTDAQ user interface is capable of displaying text for alternate languages The auxiliary applications View Pro Split ProgGen CRBasic RTMC and Short Cut do not have language support at this time Available language packages are provided by Campbell Scientific s international representatives or on the CSI web site They are not included in the standard RTDAQ installation 4 6 3 Datalogger Menu 4 6 3 1 Connect Disconnect
361. rs is done with the EZSetup Wizard This Wizard appears automatically the first time you run RTDAQ To add additional dataloggers click the Add Datalogger button on the main toolbar to bring up the EZSetup Wizard again The editing of existing dataloggers and their communications settings is also done through this Wizard through use of the Edit Datalogger button an RTDAQ offers an integrated main screen with three tabs for basic communications functions Clock Program Monitor Data and Collect Data and buttons from which to launch auxiliary applications to work with data files or create datalogger programs The RTDAQ main screen consists of a Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar Datalogger Network Map Clock Program tab Monitor Data tab Collect Data tab and Status Bar as shown here 4 1 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen Title Bar File Datalogger RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR5000 CR5000 BAR cCRI000x Network Tools Help n i Monitor Data Collect Data Clock Program Tab Datalogger Direct Connect Connection COM Port COM1 Datalogger Settings Baud Rate 115200 Extra Response Time Os Datalogger Time Zone Offset Max Time Online Od Oh Om set Liock GhousOm 2 Network Map Datalogger Program Monitor Data Tab PC C Pause Clock Update Current Program 4 2 Disconnected The Title Bar shows the RTDAQ application name and version as well as the datalogger station na
362. rt it Once again you will be able to choose whether to retain or erase the data files You can also choose a new program file to run Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 6 3 4 4 Right Click Menu Options When a device is selected CPU CRD or USR pressing the right mouse button displays a menu with the Send File and Format Device functions When a file name is selected pressing the right mouse button displays a menu with the Retrieve File Delete File Refresh List Run Options and Stop Program options 4 6 3 5 Calibration Wizard This item can be used to calibrate measurements being made by the currently connected datalogger The program in the datalogger must be written with the proper instructions to enable these calibrations For complete information on how to activate and use the Calibration Wizard see Section 9 Calibration and Zeroing 4 6 3 6 Terminal Emulator Terminal Emulator emulates a terminal connected to a datalogger or communications device Terminal Emulator comes up showing a blank screen Clicking on Select Device shows a list of devices known to RTDAQ Terminal Emulator Edit Not Active Select Device CR3000 v All Caps Mode C Pause PakBusPort 4 15 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 16 Selecting a device and baud rate and then clicking Open Terminal causes RTDAQ to attempt to connect with that device If the device is a datalogger RTDAQ will call the datalogger over whatever com
363. running DevConfig Having LoggerNet or RTDAQ open will prevent communication with a device e DevConfig can not only send operating systems to supported device types but also set datalogger clocks and send program files to dataloggers e DevConfig allows you to determine operating system types and versions which can be very useful in classic dataloggers such as the CR10X where the operating system version in the datalogger is not known Section 10 Utilities e DevConfig provides a reporting facility where a summary of the current configuration of a device can be shown on the screen and printed This configuration can also be saved to a file and used to restore the settings in the same or a replacement device e Some devices may not support the configuration protocol in DevConfig but do allow configurations to be edited through the terminal emulation screen e Help for DevConfig is shown as prompts and explanations on its main screen Help for the appropriate settings for a particular device can also be found in the user s manual for that device e Updates to DevConfig are available from Campbell Scientific s web site These may be installed over top of older versions 10 2 2 Main DevConfig Screen Device Configuration Utility 1 10 DER File Language Help CR1000 Send OS Device Type cea CR1000 cb295 cH200 com220 In order to configure the CR1000 power 12 Volts DC must be supplied to the datalogger on it
364. s Power In port Anine pin cable should also be connected CRIOX between one of your computer s RS 232 Ports and the RS 232 port on the aes datalogger When these requirements have been met select the appropriate CR200 Series serial port in the left panel and press the Connect button CR23 CR23X PB CR23X TD CR3000 x Saa NTPC CRS510 PB d ING togan unn CR510 TD anad CR800 Series nean et ee CR9000 C5150 maae musa Serial Port COoMi Baud Rate 115200 The DevConfig window is divided into two main sections the device selection panel on the left side and tabs on the right side After choosing a device on the left you will then have a list of the serial ports COM1 COM2 etc installed on your PC Yov ll be offered a choice of baud rates only if the device supports more than one baud rate in its configuration protocol The page for each device presents instructions about how to set up the device to communicate with DevConfig Different device types will offer one or more tabs on the right When the user presses the Connect button the device type serial port and baud rate selector controls become disabled and if DevConfig is able to connect to the device the button will change from Connect to Disconnect 10 7 Section 10 Utilities The tabs on the right side of the window will be replaced with tabs that represent the various operations that are available for that device in a connected state These
365. s and output continue indefinitely 5 4 9 Numerical Entries In addition to entering regular base 10 numbers there are 3 additional ways to represent numbers in a program scientific notation binary and hexadecimal Table 5 4 2 TABLE 5 4 2 Formats for Entering Numbers in CRBasic Format Example Value Standard 6 832 6 832 Scientific notation 5 67E 8 5 67X10 Binary amp B1101 13 Hexadecimal amp HFF 255 The binary format makes it easy to visualize operations where the ones and zeros translate into specific commands For example a block of ports can be set with a number the binary form of which represents the status of the ports 1 high 0 low To set ports 1 3 4 and 6 high and 2 5 7 and 8 low the number is amp B00101101 The least significant bit is on the right and represents port 1 This is much easier to visualize than entering 72 the decimal equivalent 5 4 10 Logical Expression Evaluation 5 4 10 1 What is True Several different words are used to describe a condition or the result of a test The expression X gt 5 is either true or false However when describing the state of a port or flag on or off or high or low is more intuitive In CRBasic there are a number of conditional tests or instruction parameters the result of which may be described with one of the words in Table 5 4 3 The datalogger evaluates the test or parameter as a number 0 is false not equal to 0 is true
366. s eee eee TMSTAMP RECNBR counter _ SineOut IntTemp_C BattVolt B 3 Appendix B Importing Files into Excel The quotation marks can be removed by using Microsoft Excel s Search and Replace feature From the Excel menu select Edit Replace In the Find What field type in a quotation mark Leave the Replace With field blank and select the Replace All button _ Booo Replace with Close Replace Match case Search By Rows z Replace All Find entire cells only If headers have been imported with the data the column headings will be off by one since the date and time have been imported as two separate fields The headers can be selected and moved one cell to the right to correct this B 4 Campbell Scientific Companies Campbell Scientific Inc CSI 815 West 1800 North Logan Utah 84321 UNITED STATES www campbellsci com info campbellsci com Campbell Scientific Africa Pty Ltd CSAf PO Box 2450 Somerset West 7129 SOUTH AFRICA www csafrica co za cleroux csafrica co za Campbell Scientific Australia Pty Ltd CSA PO Box 444 Thuringowa Central QLD 4812 AUSTRALIA www campbellsci com au info campbellsci com au Campbell Scientific do Brazil Ltda CSB Rua Luisa Crapsi Orsi 15 Butanta CEP 005543 000 S o Paulo SP BRAZIL www campbellsci com br suporte campbellsci com br Campbell Scientific Canada Corp CSC 11564 149th Street NW Edmonton Alberta TSM 1W7
367. s not create Histogram data from time series information It only displays Histogram data contained in a DAT file Histogram data in a DAT file is created by using the CRBasic Histogram instruction in a CRBASIC program Data Table amp Histogram SSH ees ny alue_Hst 40 Histogram v fend o s 130 view Number of rs O NWO FH OD WO FIGURE 6 5 3 Histogram Section 6 View Pro 6 12 6 5 2 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed 6 5 2 2 Options When a Histogram screen is opened the Histogram Setup dialog box will open which allows you to setup the Histogram The first option is a drop down list that shows the fields in the currently selected data file which contain Histogram data Select the data that you would like to view The second option allows you to choose which record of the Histogram you would like to view initially Type in a number directly or use the arrow keys to the right of the box to change the value Histogram Setup Select the Histogram and record number Histogram Select Pier Sarre Histogram Record Timestamp 0 les 2007 07 16 16 04 01 5 Selection Record Number 0 2007 07 16 16 04 01 5 From Column 12 To Column 51 Histogram Data Bins 40 Histogram Weight 1 00 FIGURE 6 5 4 Histogram Setup Dialog Box This dialog box can also be opened from a toolbar button A Histogram can be deleted from a graph by selecting it in the list of values being graphed on
368. s quickly as the window can obtain the data from the communications server Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 12 Checking the Show Units check box will display the engineering units for each measurement after its value if those units were defined in the CRBasic program currently running in the datalogger i e using a Units declaration for a declared variable Table Monitor 1 DR Columns LA Select Table Select Table Select Table FFTOut v Stop w Start amp v I Start Table Size 227930 Table Size Table Size Fields Values JA Fins Values Fields Values 10905 aj TimeStamp 5 2 2008 10 32 23 Ak FFTView_FTs 1 0 01106331 12299 _e 7 3 2 3 Save Load Configurations Right click on any of the table displays to save a particular configuration of the Table Monitor screen or retrieve settings for a configuration which was previously saved Table Monitor 1 Columns 3 a Select Table Select Table Sele Frou J JC Table Size 227930 Table Size Ta Fields Values a RecN Fields pa Fields Save Table Monitor Configuration Load Table Monitor Configuration FFTView_FTs 3 0 0005232354 FFT Vie 4 0 0001569482 mala OSC T ed 7 3 2 4 Saving Displayed Data to a File You can save the data being displayed instantaneously into a data file by using the Sav
369. s x n Number of blanks in element Count x n Number of data points in element Max x n Maximum Min x n Minimum RunTotal x n Running total Sd x n Standard deviation Smpl x n Sample raw value SmplMax x y n Sample y on a maximum x SmplMin x y n Sample y on a minimum x Total x n Totalize WAvg x n Unit vector mean wind direction in degrees NOTE x can be an element or a valid expression n is optional and is the number of arrays to include in the function Date and Edate can be used for the n in the Time Series functions to produce monthly output see Table 10 3 8 Special Functions this Section Time Series functions are used to perform vertical processing on selected elements such as calculating the average of an element over a specified range of data Time Series results are output in three instances 1 when a Trigger on Stop Condition F option is met 2 at the end of a data file or within a range specified by Start and Stop Conditions 3 when an interval count is met When the Trigger on Stop Condition or F option is used any time series data defined in the Select line is output each time the Stop Condition is met Refer to Section 10 3 3 3 2 for more information on the Trigger on Stop Condition Results which are output at the end of a file or a range of data are referred to as Final Summaries A typical select line that would produce a Final Summary is 1 2 3 4 Avg 4
370. sTran closing table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 05 00 03 PM PakBusPort_2 MyPakbus MyPort evaluate_session_priority changing session priority from 3 to 2 6 9 2004 05 00 03 PM arm transaction watchdog manage comm resource 7250 2909 1 10 78 Appendix A Campbell Scientific File Formats Campbell Scientific Inc uses different formats for data that is stored on external PC cards datalogger communication software and in collected PC files The data formats are by default written to the PC with a DAT extension dat The following sections will focus on the format of these PC files discuss the data formats that exist in the datalogger and on PC cards and describe methods for converting binary data formats A 1 PC File Data Formats Data from RTDAQ s dataloggers are saved to the PC as TOAS files or TOB1 binary files Uncollected data from PC cards in CR1000 CR3000 CR5000 and CR9000X dataloggers are saved as TOB2 or TOB3 binary format A 1 1 TOA5 TOAS is a text based file format with extensive information in the header This format has the following features e Contains a text header that provides the following information e The file format type the station name the datalogger type the serial number the OS version the datalogger program name the program signature and the table name e The field name for each of the data values e The units for each field as determined by the datalogger
371. scrolling can be disabled by pressing the Lock Scrolling icon on the toolbar The icon will change to oe Pressing the icon again will re enable scrolling When locked the graph will not scroll However moving the scroll bar on either the graph or the data file will still scroll the data file 6 5 1 4 Graph Cursor Pressing the Graph Cursor icon 2 on the toolbar will show the graph cursor As shown in Figure 6 5 2 the graph cursor is a vertical line extending from the top to the bottom of the graph display When visible you can click and drag the cursor across the graph Data values at the current cursor position will be shown in the table to the right of the graph Section 6 View Pro 4 Graph1 ach tk aseaae a irTemp_Avg 16 pns a N amp baj i 5 6 ae p S c G a 3 I o 2005 09 10 2005 09 17 2005 09 24 2005 10 01 2005 10 08 2005 10 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2005 10 04 18 00 00 FIGURE 6 5 2 Graph Cursor 6 5 1 5 Line Graph Toolbar The Line Graph toolbar includes the following icons gt Statistics Displays statistics for each trace including Average Standard Deviation Minimum and Maximum Note that these statistics are for the data displayed in the graph They are not statistics for the entire column s of data Copy to Clipboard Places the graphic on the Windows clipboard It can then be pasted into other applications Print Prints the gra
372. se is limited to the purchase price paid by the licensee COPYRIGHT This software is protected by United States copyright law and international copyright treaty provisions This software may not be sold included or redistributed in any other software or altered in any way without prior written permission from Campbell Scientific All copyright notices and labeling must be left intact RTDAQ Table of Contents PDF viewers note These page numbers refer to the printed version of this document Use the Adobe Acrobat bookmarks tab for links to specific sections 1 INTROGUCTON fe ceseeiccdnosezzecccnnpavacnteaasecsedaseranssidceopeiedee 1 1 1 1 RTDAQ OVEerVi0W on ceeccecssccssssessceceeeesseecaeeesseeceseeesaeecseeeeasecsseeenaaes 1 2 LII Mam Sr en ice sccacses sc coscen cdvecsesdeeteces sevsdissdeanten OARE EEEE TENERE 1 2 1 1 2 Clock Program and the EZSetup Wizard eee ceeeeseeeeeeees 1 3 LFS Monitor Data ds re a coh och bowance E E Ea 1 3 1 1 3 1 Real time MOnitors ccccccccccssececeessececsssceceenseeecesaeees 1 3 L314 Collect Datar sic S teestatnciastsh EE 1 6 1 1 5 Field Calibration and the Calibration Wizard 000 00000000000000 1 7 1 1 6 RTMC Development Runtime and Pro Development 1 7 ELT View PIO 8 eessteeise cc boca veheced Retest heed dob ke E S N AES 1 8 1 1 3 Splite rera E R devas ecudte btevbeoeneeccees 1 9 119 eoo LOT a KI E A EE E E Rede ese ita ates 1 9 TT SLO Short Cut
373. seceeeseenees 6 3 6 3 3 Opening a File in Hexadecimal Format 6 4 64 Data VIEW mo eoero reape aden aa sh a EaR E Meee AEE ed te ret tects eae 6 4 64T Column SIZE yp ee e ree ene E EEEE OEE ESEA peos 6 4 6 4 2 Header Information esesseesesseeeesesestsesrteresesrserterrsresssrsrsrereeeseeses 6 5 6 4 3 File Information n esee e a A a a 6 5 6 4 4 Background Colot is c ssssccceiseereesascsaeyceciseiessseheoecseeseessesgeeeecs 6 5 OAS FONE ernea certs wie ahal bce A a AR E 6 5 6 4 6 Window Arrangement cc eeeeeseesecseeeeceseeeecereecaeeeceaeceeeseenees 6 5 6 5 Graphs tule tosh canta ah ies aioe oat ie 6 6 65 1 Line Graph 2 sige iid nien aen dina Heino Ahad tied 6 7 6 5 1 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed 0 0 cee eeeeeeteeeeeeeereeeeenees 6 7 6 31 27 Graph Widths dose es evees vee pe e stevie eptember reps 6 8 6 5 1 3 Scrolling siinne ne sensasie nue ea n eurea eooni 6 8 65 14 Graph Cursors a a ett ee he i aa 6 8 6 5 1 5 Line Graph Toolbat 0 ee eseecessecseeeecneeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeenees 6 9 6 9 2 Histo grays wos eshaiiy sovniehsiisck erat au etait eae Re 6 11 6 5 2 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed 0 0 cee eeeeeeesseeeeteeneeeeeee 6 12 6 5 2 2 OPU ONS oneens Sta Aiea REEE SE 6 12 6 5 2 3 Histogram Toolbat cece eccesecseeseceeeeecneeeeceeeesneseeeeaees 6 13 65 3 XY Plote naria eas eee eet abet 6 13 6 5 3 1 Selecting Data to be Plotted eee eee ecsseereeeecreeeeeee 6 14 6 5 3 2 XY Plot Toolbar se35 ss ecse coste
374. sed datalogger that is set up as a table based datalogger in the network map 10 77 Section 10 Utilities 10 4 1 2 4 Object State Log Format The object state log includes two fields in addition to the timestamp and device name Object Name The name of the object from which the message is being generated Typically this will be the name of an object method Description Any extra information associated with the event Object State Log Example 6 9 2004 04 59 40 PM Request Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 40 PM PakBusTran release focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 28976 6 9 2004 04 59 40 PM Release Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 40 PM Transaction focus start table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 40 PM arm transaction watchdog table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 7250 28980 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM Request Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM PakBusTran release focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 28980 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM Release Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM Transaction focus start table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM arm transaction watchdog table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 7250 28986 6 9 2004 04 59 41 PM Request Transaction Focus table poll CR23XPB Count2Min 6 9 2004 0
375. seeseceeeeeceseeeeeseeneeeeens 5 46 SOAT FIET NEW rade ite ole a heii beeen NE aioe 5 46 5 6 4 2 File Open cnn wikde ce cob aie eel he 5 47 5 6 4 3 gt File Save A Seios e aae a Ea a ES 5 47 5 6 4 4 File Edit Generator Program esceeereseeesrrreerereeses 5 47 5 6 4 5 File Open Wire Diagram seeeseeeeeeeeseeeereersrsrrreerereerses 5 48 5 6 4 6 File lt Previously opened programs gt eeeeeeeeeees 5 48 RTDAQ Table of Contents SOAT File Ekt krian aeien eea aces ea E NE 5 49 5 6 4 8 Edit Color Options 0 cee ecesecseeseceeeeeceeeeecsaeeeeeseeeeeeeens 5 49 5 6 4 9 Edit CR9000X Generator Options Edit CR5000 Generator OpHONS ontrei eea aar raneta EAE EEE S ORRE 5 49 5 6 4 10 Help Program Generator ssesesseeseeseesseeeeeeeeeeesesreees 5 50 5 64 11 Help About mgro inion git nos 5 50 5 6 5 Using Save and Send seeseseeeeesssssereereereresrserrerreressssrsreresrse 5 50 265 1 Download a e E E ER SRS 5 51 5 6 5 2 RUT OPOS ee n e tae sepa a a a EEA 5 51 5 6 5 3 Datalogger Response sesesseeeeseeeseeesesreerrseeereserrenresreeres 5 52 6 VIEW PrO sinsin a i a 6 1 6T OVERVIEW anann erent edo al ean 6 1 6 2 The Toolbar a aiccasccisaidesd sishcte vee a sctelges cautue db eea a a eeii 6 1 6 3 Opening a File svisca scien oie Arisa aeae a aries 6 3 6 3 1 Opening a Data File oe ee ceeecseeeeeseceeeecneeeecaeeeesaeceeeeeenees 6 3 6 3 2 Opening Other Types of Files ei eeeeeseeecseseeesseeece
376. sh B 1 Appendix B Importing Files into Excel B 2 Step 2 of 3 From the Delimiters group box select Comma and Space The Comma option directs Excel to place each data value which is separated by a comma into a separate column The Space option will separate the Date and the Time into two columns From the Text Qualifiers list box select None Select the Next button Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 CR1OT FiveSecond RECNBR 16 31 45 16731750 Lesa eSS 16 37 Appendix B Importing Files into Excel Step 3 of 3 A quick look at the columns of data is provided in the Data Preview group box Highlight the column with the year month day and from the Column Data Format group box select the Date option From the drop down list box to the right of this option select the YMD format To complete the import select the Finish button Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 E 2 xi This screen lets you select each column and set Column data Format the Data Format C General General converts numeric values to numbers date Text values to dates and all remaining values to text pate acre Do not import column Skip Data preview WMD Genera 1 CRIOT FiveSecond RECNBR counter i IntTemp_C h A oe Gl er Jo 0 342 16 31 50 0 325 Cancel lt Back Next gt As imported the Date and Time fields have a quotation mark in the field FiveSecond e
377. sing TCP IP that charge by the byte Leaving the datalogger connected also uses battery power so if the datalogger power supply is not recharged from a reliable source it may discharge its battery below safe levels Be sure therefore that you do not leave the datalogger connected beyond the time necessary to do the tasks you need to do 4 2 4 Summary Communications Test and Clock Set The Setup Summary step provides a list of the settings entered You can use the Previous button to go back and change settings as necessary The Communications Test step allows you to test the communications link before going any further If the datalogger is not installed you can skip this and the next two steps If communication succeeds you can move to the Datalogger Clock step where you can check or set the datalogger s clock to match the PC s system time If the datalogger is in a different time zone you can enter an offset in hour and minutes 4 2 5 Send Program The Send Program step allows you to send a program to the datalogger This may be a program you created with Short Cut ProgGen the CRBasic Editor or a program supplied by someone else Dataloggers will display the program name if one is running and will provide table definitions that contain data labels If you don t have a program for the datalogger you can skip this step and send a program later from the Clock Program tab If you connected to the datalogger during the EZSetup Wi
378. splay Trace Save Display Marks I Show Marks Draw Every me C Round Frame ne CI Transparent Do la Style Y Value v 7 9 8 5 Using Saved Configurations Select the Save tab to load a previously saved configuration of the FFT Histogram screen options or to save the current option settings as a configuration to be retrieved at a later time Graphing Options Scaling Data Display Visual Display Save Save Graph Configuration Load Graph Configuration 7 64 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time After you have used the available options in the FFT Histogram options screen for some time you may find certain groups of settings that are useful to you again and again To facilitate the easy recall of such configurations you may save all of the current option screen selections in a configuration file When you run RTDAQ at a later time and open the FFT Histogram screen you can load those settings into the window by simply loading the configuration file that you previously saved This allows you to set the options for the screen more easily and reliably This method also allows you to select from among multiple saved scenarios choosing the scenario that is best for the data you currently wish to display Press Save Graph Configuration to save the current option settings to a file Specify a name for the file and browse to the folder in which you would like the configurati
379. splays the Start button when the window is stopped and displays the Stop button in the same location when the window is running 7 68 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time RainFlow 2 Select T able FFTOut v Select Bin Axis Mode Show Values View Bins Show Range C Orthogonal Press the Clear button to remove the display of the current histogram and begin displaying the next record The display will not stop if it is in the started state but will clear the screen and continue forward Press the Options button to modify various characteristics for displaying the graph More detail about these options are given below in the section entitled Setting the Options for the Rainflow screen 7 69 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 70 Check the Orthogonal check box if you would like to show an orthogonal view of the 3 D histogram The percent value can be set to adjust the display as desired I RainFlow 2 Select Table FFTOut x Select Bin FFTview_RFH_ v lt Axis Mode Show Values O View Bins O Show Range C Orthogonal Use the Zoom scroll bar to adjust the zoom level of the entire display This will help move the rainflow display and grid farther away or closer within the apparent view area enabling labels to show more clearly or to be fully visible RainFlow 2 Select Table FFTOut vi Select Bin FFTVie
380. ssentially returns an estimate that reflects the maximum number of records that can be stored based on card size even if the table is not completely full Because of this you may see the progress reported as something less than 100 when the conversion is complete If a conversion is in progress and you wish to stop it press the Cancel Conversion button After file conversion is complete summary information is provided in the field below the file list The summary provides a listing of the new files that were created and the total number of records converted for each table if filemarks are being processed for a table the number of records returned is the cumulative number of records for all files 10 1 4 Repairing Converting Corrupted Files If you attempt to convert a file and receive a message that the input file contained no data you may want to consider using the Repair File option You may also want to consider using the Repair File option if you think there is additional data on the card that is not being converted and included in the output file With either case it is possible that data on the card has become corrupted The Repair File option will attempt to scan the card for good frames of data and output that data to a new binary file In some instances data on a card can become corrupted Corruption can occur if the card is subjected to electrostatic discharge or if it is removed when data is being written to the card e g
381. stall some applications in the C Program Files Campbellsci Demo directory When the purchased version of RTDAQ is installed these applications will each be installed in their own directory under C Program Files Campbellsci The versions in the Demo directory will no longer be used Therefore to avoid having these unused versions remain on your computer you may wish to uninstall the trial version before installing the purchased version of RTDAQ 3 1 Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 2 RTDAQ Operations and Backup Procedures 3 2 This section describes some of the concepts and procedures recommended for routine operation and security of the RTDAQ software Since the occurrence of operational issues cannot be fully eliminated on most computer systems the following guidelines and procedures are provided to help minimize possible problems that may occur 3 2 1 RTDAQ Directory Structure and File Descriptions 3 2 1 1 Program Directory As described earlier in the installation procedures the files for program execution are stored in the C Program Files Campbellsci directory This includes the executables DLLs and most of the application help files This directory does not need to be included in back up efforts RTDAQ and its applications rely on registry entries to run correctly therefore any restoration of the program should be done by reinstalling the software from the original CD 3 2 1 2 Working Direct
382. started Show All Msgs 2007 10 16 12 13 30 PM CR9000X 13 Clock checked 2007 10 16 12 13 26 00055 _ BS IPPort 2007 10 16 12 13 31 PM CR9000X 11 Clock check started ate 2007 10 16 12 13 31 PM CR9000X 13 Clock checked 2007 10 16 12 13 27 00055 Sq PakBusPort 2007 10 16 12 13 32 PM CR9000X 11 Clock check started ns CR3000 gB IPP 3 2007 10 16 12 13 32 PM CR9000X 13 Clock checked Z007 10 16 12 13 28 00055 E IPPort_i Bcrs000x Communication Log Showing Messages Failure Warning Status 2007 10 16 12 13 27 PM CR9000K S Clock Check Set 2007 10 16 12 13 28 PM CR9000K S Clock Check Set 2007 10 16 12 13 29 PM CR9000K S Clock Check Set 2007 10 16 12 13 30 PM CR9000K S Clock Check Set 2007 10 16 12 13 31 PM CR9000K S Clock Check Set 2007 10 16 12 13 32 PM CR9000K S Clock Check Set IE Object State Log 2007 10 16 12 13 PM CRS000K Dev sesEnd O1E1SFO08 2007 10 16 12 13 PM CRS000K Dev sesBegin 0Z26D7738 2007 10 16 12 13 PM CRS000K Dev cmdAdd Clock Check Set 3 2007 10 16 12 s PH CR9000X Dev onNextConmand Executing command Clock 2007 10 16 12 13 PM CRS000K Dev cmdFinished Clock Check Set 2007 10 16 12 13 PM CRS000K Dev sesEnd 026D7738 We 2007 10 16 12 13 32 PM On the left side of the LogTool window is a display of all devi
383. t name of the logged in client The login name of the client The reason the session was closed The name of the table that was resized The original specified size of the table The new size of the table Message Meaning One of the settings for the specified collect area was changed The identifiers for the setting can be found in CoraScript help A new PakBus route has been added to the routing table A PakBus route has been lost and will be removed from the routing table A new PakBus station was added to the network A client application has closed or lost the connection to the server The size of the table in the data cache was reduced because there was not enough computer disk space Section 10 Utilities User Response to Message Reduce the size of the tables in the datalogger program or get more hard disk storage space for the computer to create it or the file would have exceeded the 2 Gbyte size limit Transaction Log Example 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM CR23XPB 89 Selective manual poll started Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM CR23XPB 92 Collect area poll started Count2Min 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM I CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 4312 4312 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM CR23XPB 20 Hole detected Count2Min 4294940483 4311 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM CR23XPB 41 Records received Count2Min 0 150 polling 6 9 2004 04 59 25 PM CR23XPB
384. t Axes When multiple data values are being graphed determines whether they have a common axis or independent axes When using a common axis the same scale will apply to all traces When using independent axes the scale shown will be determined by which trace is currently selected A trace is selected by clicking on its name in the list above the Edit and Delete buttons Synchronize Axes Only enabled when data is being graphed from multiple data files and all of the data files have an overlapping time period When a graph contains traces from multiple data files a box with a drop down list will appear in the Graph Width options box The data file chosen from the drop down list indicates which data file and graph will be scrolled by the graph scroll bar After using the scroll bar to scroll the indicated graph the Synchronize Axes button may be pressed to synchronize the timestamps of the remaining graph s and data file s so that they are all displaying data from the same time period Section 6 View Pro When the data panels and graphs are currently synchronized the button icon will have a check mark in the bottom right corner j Undo Zoom Returns the graph to its original state after zooming YD 6 5 2 Histogram From the Histogram screen you can view Histogram data The Histogram button on the toolbar will be enabled if there is at least one valid Histogram in the currently selected data file NOTE View Pro doe
385. t of the decimal point is entered in the Decimal field and can be set independently for each column The value output will be rounded to the specified number of digits Leave this field blank if you do not want to round the data to a specific number of digits Column headings can be entered using Split s Data Labels Function Labels Use Data Labels 10 3 4 Help Option 10 56 On line Help is available from any location in Split Simply select the area of Split in question and press lt F1 gt Split also offers a brief on the fly Help Place the cursor on the area of Split in question after a moment a brief description is displayed in the hint line of the Split window bottom left Section 10 Utilities 10 3 5 Editing Commands Split supports the Windows Cut Copy and Paste commands Text from any field in Split or other Windows applications can be Cut Copied or Pasted 10 3 6 Running Split From a Command Line Existing parameter files can be executed using Splitr exe which is a run time version of the Split Report Generator When Splitr exe is run the file is processed as if the user chose Run Go from the Split menu Splitr exe can be executed by a third party task scheduler from a batch file or from a Windows command line prompt or shortcut 10 3 6 1 Splitr Command Line Switches Splitr has four switches that can be used to control how the executable is run 10 3 6 1 1 Closing the Splitr exe Program After Execution
386. t the routing table from a PakBus device Reset Node This option will reset the routing table in a PakBus device Change PakBus Address server only By default the PakBus address of the software server is 4090 RTDAQ This option lets you change this default Search for Neighbors server only When this option is selected the software server will broadcast a Hello Request every 5 seconds to search for PakBus neighbors with which it can communicate During this time the PakBus port is kept on line Broadcast Reset server only This option will reset the routing table in the selected PakBus device as well as any neighbors of the selected device that are acting as routers Unlock Position This option will unlock a device that has been locked into position in PakBus Graph by dragging it to a new position on the screen All devices can be unlocked by selecting View Unlock All Positions from the menu 4 21 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 6 5 4 5 Discovering Probable Routes between Devices You can view the probable route that communication will take between two PakBus devices by sequentially clicking on the two devices in Pakbus Graph The probable communication route will be highlighted in cyan If the Show Hop Metrics check box is selected the graph will include the time in milliseconds that communication takes between the two devices The results are also displayed in the Log Messages portion of the window
387. talogger auto allocate the number of records The example creates a table name Temp outputs any time other conditions are met and retains 2000 records in RAM DatalInterval TintoInt Interval Units Lapses DataInterval 0 10 msec 10 DataInterval is an instruction that modifies the conditions under which data are stored The four parameters are the time into the interval the interval on which data are stored the units for time and the number of lapses or gaps in the interval to track The example outputs at 0 time into on the interval relative to real time the interval is 10 milliseconds and the table will keep track of 10 lapses The DataInterval instruction reduces the memory required for the data table because the time of each record can be calculated from the interval and the time of the most recent record stored Event driven tables should have a fixed size rather than allowing them to be allocated automatically Event driven tables that are automatically allocated are assumed to have one record stored per second in calculating the length Since the datalogger tries to make the tables fill up at the same time these event driven tables will take up most of the memory leaving very little for the other longer interval automatically allocated data tables The output processing instructions included in a data table declaration determine the values output in the table The table must be called by the program using the CallTable Tab
388. te Bad Data Examples Max Temp Max Temp outputs Max Temp Max Temp 24 times Max Temp Smpl 8 hour 8 Smpl Max Temp 8 Max 3 8 8 hour Max Temp 58 56 8 hour Max Temp 63 75 8 hour Max Temp 67 33 This example samples the labels called 8 hour and Max Temp and looks for a Maximum temp for every 8 hour interval 10 43 Section 10 Utilities 10 44 Line smpl PA n WDQ n numbers each line written to the report file or printer This differs from the Count function in that Count looks at how many lines were read Examples Line 4 5 1 17 42 10 3 855 2 17 65 8 27 3 17 76 7 75 4 18 89 7 6 5 19 6 10 41 6 23 32 8 99 7 24 79 9 52 19 24 75 7 08 20 26 03 8 76 21 27 45 11 81 22 310 3 46110 3 62 23 38 8 17 12 24 37 13 11 86 Smpl Line 8 Smpl 4 8 Smpl 5 8 1 23 98 6 588 2 24 31 8 88 3 37 13 11 86 Outputs the data to the printer or RPT file with n lines per page Examples 2 3 Smpl PA 12 100 58 56 200 57 48 1100 61 34 1200 60 61 Page 2 1300 61 01 1400 60 93 2300 510 3 48 0 510 3 22 Outputs the wind direction using an alphabetical abbreviation based on 8 quadrants N S E W NE NW SE SW n is an element containing wind direction For example if n 182 S would be returned in the output file NOTE Section 10 Utilities WDQS n Outputs the wind direction using an alphabetical abbreviation based on 16 quadrants N S E W NE
389. ted Although RTDAQ does not support the older mixed array group of Campbell Scientiffic dataloggers the CR10X CR23X or CR510 the Split application included with RTDAQ is the same one included for use with LoggerNet and other Campbell Scientific support software Because of this the documentation included here contains references to mixed array data file processing within the Split program and also the Edlog program editor For most RTDAQ implementations these references can be ignored 10 11 Section 10 Utilities Split is a tool that works with output data files dat collected from Campbell Scientific dataloggers It is used to post process data from either mixed array or table based dataloggers Split can create reports based on collected data by filtering data based on time or conditions It can generate statistics perform calculations reformat files check for data quality limit testing and generate tables with report and column headings It can also handle the time synchronization necessary to merge up to eight data files 10 3 1 Functional Overview 10 12 Split is a tool to analyze data collected from Campbell Scientific dataloggers Its name comes from its function of splitting out specific data from a larger data file Originally Split could only process mixed array files and it was used to split the different arrays typically different time intervals of a file into separate files e g for
390. tery Battolt AirT emp AirT emp AirT emp_MIN Volts Min Average Max G G 12 12 el FIGURE 10 3 7 Edited Headings For table based data files the timestamp is normally the first column and is a quoted text string 2002 02 26 10 30 00 To display these timestamps in the output you will need to change the column width for the first column to at least 24 If the column width is too small to accommodate the value output the string will be highlighted in red and preceded by an asterisk with the words Bad Data in the lower right corner when the file is processed To run Split select RUN GO The hourly data will be split out and stored in hourly prn The results are displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 10 3 8 When Split is running on large files the line counter will update only every 1000 lines Close the Run window If you wish to save this parameter file for future reports choose FILE SAVE The file will be saved with a PAR extension Section 10 Utilities x 60 Year_RTM Day_RTM Hour _Minute Battery BattYolt AirTemp AirTemp Volts Min Average Max c ewww ewww ww ew we ao ao aa ww wo a ww a ww a ww a ww ww ww ww ww ww ww ww ww a ww a a a ww ww ww ww ww ww wo oe wee he 60 2002 42 1000 13 9 13 79 12 51 7 43 4 60 2002 42 1100 13 78 13 78 10 87 6 153 60 2002 42 1200 13 79 13 59 3 309 1 261 60 2002 42 1300 B bes Bi 13 48 1 099 2 493 60 2002 42 1400 13 82 13 49 1 355 4 375 60 2002 42 15
391. the Hours Minutes as 0000 The Max and Min Timestamp Options is used to determine the type of timestamp that will be used for Maximum and Minimum outputs that include a timestamp along with the value You can choose to output No Timestamp a timestamp that includes Hours Minutes Seconds produces two values hhmm and seconds a timestamp that includes Hours Minutes only or a timestamp that includes Seconds only The file format is reflected in the default filename by the prefix of either TOAS or TOB1 added to the table name 10 1 2 2 File Processing Use Filemarks CRBasic dataloggers have a FileMark instruction that allows you to store a filemark along with the data These filemarks are ignored by the LoggerNet or RTDAQ data collection process However in CardConvert you can convert the file with the Use Filemarks option selected and the file will be stored as multiple files based upon the filemarks Each file created will be given a numeric suffix prior to the dat extension The first file is stored with a_l at the end of the root file name e g TOA5_Mytable_1 dat The number is incremented by one with each new file saved If a file with the same name is found the number will be incremented to the next available number Use Removemarks When a compact flash card is removed from a CR1000 or CR3000 datalogger a special mark is inserted in the last record The Removemark is similar in nature to the Filemark In CardConvert you can s
392. the existing generator project files for both the CR5000 GE5 and for the CR9000X GE9 Select the desired generator project and press Open The generator window will be opened with your selected generator project loaded Do not open a generated CRBasic program C9X CR5 into the program generator Be sure to open a generator project file GE9 GE5 5 6 4 3 File Save As Use File Save As to save your current generator project whether newly created or opened from an existing file with a different name A Save dialog box appears showing the current name of the generator project Browse to a different folder if desired and change the name of the project to its new name and press Save The generator project is saved in that location with the specified new name GE5 or GE9 along with the auxiliary files that are created when a program generator project is saved These files are the actual generated CRBasic program CR5 or C9X the wiring diagram WI5 WI9 and the table definition file DT5 DT9 5 6 4 4 File Edit Generator Program Use File Edit Generator Program to immediately generate the CRBasic program that corresponds to the current generator project being used and open that program into the CRBasic Editor This technique can be used to quickly see the impact which a change to any project s options has on the generated CRBasic program 5 47 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing N
393. the left side of the graph window and then pressing the Delete button by right clicking on this name and choosing Delete Selection or by right clicking on the record in the data panel and choosing Clear Selection From the main Histogram screen you can set the Histogram type to Area Histogram Line or Bar You can use the arrow buttons to the right of Record to scroll through records of the Histogram You can also determine whether the Histogram is viewed in 2D or 3D Selecting the 3D View check box will enable 3D View Clearing the check box will cause the Histogram to be viewed in 2D When in 3D View the Number of Plots field will determine how many records are viewed in the Histogram In 3D View scroll bars appear on the bottom and right of the screen which allow the Histogram to be rotated Section 6 View Pro 6 5 2 3 Histogram Toolbar The Histogram toolbar includes the following icons 6 5 3 XY Plot E El H XC Copy to Clipboard Places the Histogram graphic on the Windows clipboard It can then be pasted into other applications Print Prints the Histogram Print options can be set before printing begins Export Allows the Histogram to be exported in a choice of text or graphical formats Histogram Options Opens a dialog box from which you can set properties for the Histogram including scaling colors margins titles etc This dialog box can also be brought up by pressing the Options button Show Table
394. the number of each measurement that will be made Define Aliases and specific names for any of the measurements Define data tables Describe in detail tables of data that will be saved from the experiment Process store trigger Set when the data should be stored Are they stored when some condition is met Are data stored on a fixed interval Are they stored on a fixed interval only while some condition is met Table size Set the size of the table in RAM Other on line storage Should the data also be sent to the external devices storage Processing of Data What data are to be output current value average maximum minimum etc Define Subroutines If there is a process or series of calculations that needs to be repeated several times in the program it can be packaged in a subroutine and called when needed rather than repeating all the code each time Section 5 Program Creation and Editing Program The program section defines the action of datalogging Set scan interval The scan sets the interval for a series of measurements Measurements Enter the measurements to make Processing Enter any additional processing with the measurements Call Data Table s The Data Table must be called to process output data Initiate controls Check measurements and Initiate controls if necessary NextScan Loop back and wait if necessary for the next scan End Program 5 4 2 Program Declarations Variables must b
395. the toolbar Once the help file is opened pressing the Contents tab will open the Table of Contents Choosing the Index tab will bring up an index Keywords can be typed in to search for a topic An in depth search can be performed by choosing the Search tab and typing in a word Help for any of the graphical windows can be accessed by pressing the button in the upper right corner of the graph screen or by pressing F1 Help for dialog boxes can be accessed by pressing the Help button at the bottom of the dialog box or by pressing F1 with the dialog box opened Section 6 View Pro 6 9 Assigning Data Files to View Windows will let you assign the program with which a particular file type will be opened based on that file s extension When a file with an assigned extension is double clicked it will be opened with the associated program You may want to associate DAT files with the View Pro program for quick opening of data files This association can be made by selecting Tools Folder Options File Types from the Windows Explorer menu 6 25 Section 6 View Pro 6 26 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time RTDAQ provides extensive functionality for monitoring datalogger data in real time Multiple real time windows can be opened to assist in data analysis tasks 7 1 Using the Monitor Data Screen 7 1 1 Connect to Target Datalogger To begin monitoring data in real time ensure that you are connected to the datalogger whose data
396. tings and press Open Those settings will be immediately applied to the graph screen Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 4 10 Accepting or Abandoning Changes to the Graph Options Graphing Options Sealing Data Display Visual Display Save Y Axis Right Y Axis Scaling Option Custom Limits Automatic Max Value Custom Limits doth Min Value C Logarithmic After setting the various options for the graph press the Apply button to immediately put those changes into effect The Options screen will not be closed and the settings will be applied Press the OK button if you would like to apply the settings and also exit the Options screen Press Cancel if you would like to abandon any changes made to the settings since the screen was opened Online help topics can be accessed with the Help button 7 5 Fast Graph The Fast Graph window displays time series data items from a datalogger graphically in real time The data value from the datalogger is used for the y axis value and the timestamp of the data value is used for the x axis value 7 5 1 Using the Fast Graph To use the Fast Graph window of RTDAQ ensure that you are connected to a datalogger then select the Monitor Data tab Click on the button labeled Fast Graph RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR9000X CR9000X File View Datalogger Network Tools Help WK bisorea all A o P Clock Program Monitor Data Collect
397. tion in a CRBasic program Data Table 6 15 Section 6 View Pro amp Rainflow1 Eel 2 SHR ane ptions 7 Record 50 FIGURE 6 5 6 Rainflow Histogram 6 5 4 1 Selecting Data to be Graphed When a Rainflow Histogram screen is opened a dialog box will open which allows you to setup the Rainflow Histogram The first option is a drop down list that shows the fields in the currently selected data file which contain Rainflow Histogram data Select the data that you would like to view The second option allows you to choose which record of the Rainflow Histogram you would like to view Type in a number directly or use the arrow keys to the right of the box to change the value 6 16 Section 6 View Pro 44 Rainflow Setup TE Select the Rainflow and record number Rainflow Select Accell RFH v Rainflow Recordi Timestamp lo 5 1998 06 16 11 19 50 Histogram Accell _RFH 1 Mean bins 5 Amp bins 7 Low Limit 2 00 High Limit 2 00 Min Amp 0 00 FIGURE 6 5 7 Rainflow Histogram Setup Dialog Box This dialog box can also be opened from a toolbar button A Rainflow Histogram can be deleted from a graph by selecting it in the list of values being graphed on the left side of the graph window and then pressing the Delete button by right clicking on this name and choosing Delete Selection or by right clicking on the record in the data panel and choosing Clear Selection 6 5 4 2 Options Fr
398. tion in order to obtain more accurate output data Calibration is periodically necessary when there has been sensor drift or other variation in sensor outputs When a calibration scenario is properly in place within the datalogger program it is quick and easy to use a software Wizard to change the measurement configuration at run time This saves time over previously used methods such as re writing the CRBasic program or interfering with measurements to obtain calibration constants manually With this method changes to multipliers and offsets can be made quickly and automatically without rewriting datalogger programs or interfering with sensor measurements 9 1 2 Basic Calibration Process When calibrating with a Campbell Scientific datalogger known and measured values are given as inputs The outputs of the calibration then become the new values for the multiplier and offset variables in the CRBasic program If needed these calculated multipliers and offsets can be permanently stored and automatically reloaded upon program restart such as when a power cycle occurs on the datalogger The datalogger makes use of a calibration file cal to store these calibration values and load them as desired This can be done at datalogger startup or at other times designated within the datalogger program To evaluate calibration histories a final storage output table can be configured to store the results of calibrations that have been performed and
399. to generate it See Generating Calibration Programs later in this chapter 9 3 4 Two Point Multiplier Only Calibration Two point multiplier only calibration uses a linear fit technique against two different known value conditions of the sensor s measurement but only the slope value multiplier is calculated and changed The offset is unaffected by this calibration The sensor is placed into the first condition and the known value for that condition is provided to the datalogger program One or more measurements in that first condition occur and then the datalogger informs the user that the second known condition should be applied to the sensor When that condition is applied the second known value is provided to the datalogger and the datalogger measures the second condition After completing the measurement of the second point condition a best fit of the two points is calculated resulting in a slope value m value or multiplier with the offset assumed to be zero Thus the simple form y mx is a representation of the fit where m is the new multiplier value To perform a two point multiplier only calibration use an argument of 3 the number three for the calibration type in the Fie dCal instruction of your CRBasic program The Calibration Wizard can be used to calculate and apply the two different known conditions while the program is running in the datalogger 9 4 Performing a Manual Calibration 9 4 1 How to Use the Mode Variable for
400. to use and access these binary formats on the PC Binary files may be output as data files to the PC by RTDAQ to save hard disk space or to accommodate a user who is only interested in using binary files in an application In addition PC cards that are written by the datalogger will contain binary files that can be accessed directly by the PC Binary files cannot be interpreted through mere visual inspection Therefore binary file processing tools are available to read and convert these binary data files to ASCII text These conversion tools are Split and CardConvert Refer to earlier sections of this manual for complete information on Split and CardConvert Split has the capability of reading TOB1 TOB2 and TOB3 files and displaying data from those files in ASCII format The output parameters are user specified and Split generates a file containing the converted ASCII format values A 4 2 CardConvert The CardConvert program can convert TOB1 TOB2 and TOB3 files to TOAS file format or can convert TOAS files to TOB1 file format Appendix B Importing Files into Excel ASCII Data files saved by RTDAQ can be imported into a spreadsheet program for analysis or manipulation Changing the extension of a TOA5 comma separated ASCID file from dat to csv will allow the file to be imported directly into Microsoft Excel with all of the header data included Instructions are given below for importing TOAS files into Microsoft Excel with more cont
401. tputs the data in comma separated format This is the same as choosing the Comma option for the File Format Outputs the data in printable ASCII format This is the same as choosing the Printable option for the File Format Outputs the data using the Regional Settings of your Windows operating system for the decimal indicator and data value separator This is the same as choosing the Custom option for the File Format this is the default option for the File Format field Conditionally outputs the data using the Trigger On Stop Condition This is the same as choosing the Trigger On Stop Condition option that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab A stop condition must also be specified The example below does not specify a start or copy condition These two fields are indicated by the space comma space entries Select line entries are also shown in this example Example Test par r input dat Output prn F 4 1450 smpl 1 6 avg 7 Transposes the rows and columns of a file This is the same as choosing the Transpose File option that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Enables the No Date Advance function which keeps the date for midnight from rolling to the next day This is the same as choosing the No Date Advance check box that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Suppresses the summary information when processing time series data This is the same as choosing the No Su
402. truction dialog box will be displayed to facilitate editing the parameters Complete the information in the parameter fields and press Insert to paste the instruction into the program Some users will disable this instruction dialog box by clearing the option in the View Instruction Panel Preferences Show Instruction Dialog check box You can filter the list of instructions available in the Instruction Panel by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the text box above the list This will allow you to display only instructions of a specific type such as Measurement or Program Structure Control This provides a smaller list to select from and makes it easier to find the instruction you want Switch back to All to see all of the instructions available You can create custom instruction filter lists as described later in this section 5 2 1 Parameter Dialog Box amp VoltDiff Parameter Type Destination Repetitions Voltage Range DiffChan RevDiff SettlingTime Integration Multiplier Offset gm 5 2 m2500 1 The Parameter dialog box will appear when an instruction is added that has one or more parameters or when the cursor is placed on an existing instruction and the right mouse button is pressed This dialog box contains a field for each of the parameters in the instruction Edit these fields as necessary and then press the Insert button to paste the instruction into the program Below is an example of the Parameter dial
403. ts are used to select consecutive elements between starting and ending elements e g 3 6 refers to the elements 3 4 5 and 6 10 49 Section 10 Utilities e A set is a group of two or more elements and or expressions separated by commas and enclosed by parentheses No member of a set can include parentheses Therefore a set cannot include a set or a function as one of its members For example VALID EXPRESSION INVALID EXPRESSION Arctan 2 3 Arctan 2 3 Arctan 2 3 3 4 4 5 Arctan 2 3 3 4 4 5 Arctan COS 2 Arctan COS 2 COS 3 e A single expression can operate on a set of elements For example the expression 3 6 8 2 0 is the same as 3 2 0 4 2 0 5 2 0 6 2 0 8 2 0 3 6 2 5 is the same as 3 2 4 3 5 4 6 10 3 e The element or expression that is the argument of a math or Time Series function must be enclosed in parentheses A range of elements can be specified resulting in as many outputs as elements e g Avg 3 5 7 will output 4 averages e Square brackets are used to enclose an allowable range for a value e g 3 3 6 12 to indicate that the allowable range for element 3 is from 3 6 to 12 Whole numbers within brackets do not require a decimal point Table 10 3 6 explains how values outside the specified range are treated e The interval in a Time Series function is optional and does not require a decimal point e Semicolons are used in Time Series functions to separate the elements or
404. ually indicated when the item is surrounded by a dotted line or is bolded Pressing the tab key can move the focus from item to item Typing text changes a selected text edit box that has the focus Pressing the space bar toggles a selected check box A selected button can also be activated by pressing the Enter key Buttons Buttons are an easy way to access a function They are normally used for the functions that need to be called frequently or are very important Clicking a button executes that function or brings up another window Button functions can also be accessed from the keyboard using the tab key to move among items on a screen and pressing the Enter key to execute the button function Most text based buttons have a hot key Right Click Menus Some areas have pop up menus that bring up frequently used tasks or provide shortcuts Just right click on an area and if a context menu appears left click the menu item you want Hot Keys or Keyboard Shortcuts Many of the menus and buttons can be accessed using Hot Keys An underlined letter identifies the hot key for a button or function To get to a menu or execute a function on a button hold down the Alt key and type the underlined letter in the menu name or the button text On Windows XP or Windows Vista the hot key letters may not appear until after you ve pressed the Alt key Pop Up Hints Hints are available for many of the on screen controls Let the mouse pointer hove
405. up a dialog box that allows you to print the currently selected data file New Line Graph Brings up a Line Graph window from which you can graph data values on the y axis against their timestamps on the x axis New Histogram Brings up a Histogram window from which you can view Histogram data values New XY Plot Brings up an XY Plot window from which you can plot data values on the y axis against another specified data value on the x axis New Rainflow Histogram Brings up a Rainflow Histogram window from which you can view Rainflow Histogram data values New FFT Brings up an FFT window from which you can view FFT data values Keep Selected Graph On Top When data is being graphed and this option is selected the currently selected graph will always be at the forefront of the View Pro program This is a toggle button The button icon will have a green check mark through it when the option is currently selected Section 6 View Pro Selected Graph FFT3 v Graphi f Histogram2 FFT3 Selected Graph Indicates which graph is currently selected The drop down list can be used to switch the currently selected graph to a different graph This control is disabled if no graphs are opened Bring Selected Graph to Front Brings the currently selected graph to the forefront of the View Pro program lah This control is disabled if no graphs are opened 6 3 Opening a File View Pro provides three ways to ope
406. ute interval and 10 27 Section 10 Utilities therefore your time stamps are 50 150 250 350 2350 your Start Condition and Copy Conditions for the first file might look like the following Start Condition 2 1 3 50 Copy Condition 1 106 and3 60 10 Where element 1 is the array ID element 2 is the Julian day element 3 is the hour minute The Start Condition directs Split to begin processing data when the time is one day prior to the current PC time and when the hour minute value is equal to 50 The 1 106 in the Copy Condition specifies the array from which the data should be copied The 3 60 10 indicates that the interval for the time stamp is 60 minutes and designates a 10 minute time window on each side of the top of the hour in which Split should look for the hour minute data 10 minutes before the hour 10 minutes after the hour The second file s Copy Condition should include only the array from which to copy the data No interval is necessary 10 3 3 3 Stop Condition The Stop Condition is expressed with the same syntax as the Start Condition If the Stop Condition parameter is left blank Split will execute until the end of the file Logical and and or statements can be used when specifying the Stop Condition Section 10 3 3 2 The Stop Condition specifies when to stop processing data This feature allows segments of data to be removed from large data files For instance if a data file contains one month
407. utput file with a different name if a file exists This is the same as selecting Create New for the If File Exists option on the Output File tab O Turns the screen display off when Split is processing the PAR file This is the same as clearing the Screen Display check box on the Output File tab 6 9 Sets the default width for all the columns in the report This is the same as entering a value in the Default Column Width field on the Output File tab 10 59 Section 10 Utilities text M IS G 0 1 2 F T D IN 10 60 Sets the text that will be used in the place of bad data This is the same as the text string used in the Replace Bad Data field that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Compares two input files and creates an output file with a complete data set comprised of both files This is the same at the Match Files option that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab The two input file names are separated with a comma but no spaces Example Splitr Test par r Input dat Input2 dat Output prn M Writes the output file without a form feed command after each page This is the same as the No FF form feed option that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Outputs only the data marked as bad to the file This is the same as the Only Display Lines with Bad Data check box that is found under the Other button of the Output File tab Ou
408. ved 10 9 2006 4 58 59 PM ID Number Number Scan Interval 10 mSecs m VOLTS Reps Rng Meas Mult Offset uSec CONFIGURATION Block1 1 50 Diff 1 0e0 0 0e0 150 SCAN INTERVAL Total Voltage Time 160 OUTPUT TABLES Shortest Possible Scan Time THERMOCOUPLES VOLTAGES HIGH VOLT ISOLATED BRIDGES FFT FILTER PULSE AM25T CANBUS CALCULATED FIELDS PORTS FLAGS Print Help Test Summary of program Right column is measurementtime only Processing can take considerably longer When pressed this button will save the current generator project generate and save the associated CRBasic program code and send that code to the datalogger you specify 5 50 Section 5 Program Creation and Editing 5 6 5 1 Download After you have selected Save and Send you will see the Download dialog box similar to the one shown here Download TestProg C9X Select the destination Select the Run Options Run Now CR9000 CR9000 _2 Do not erase the card data files Erase all card data files _ Run On Power up C Compress File The Select the destination list shows all dataloggers configured within RTDAQ that can accept a program matching the extension of the current CRBasic program to be sent Assume for example that you have two CR9000X s and some other dataloggers in your RTDAQ Network Map When you send a CR9000X program this screen will show only the two CR9000X dataloggers Any CR30
409. w AFH Show Values O View Bins Show Range rr sonal Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time The X Rotation and Y Rotation scroll bars are also active along the left and bottom parts of the display By scrolling these bars you can adjust the horizontal or vertical display angle for the 3D display Manel gree ey ere ye eee nen Ope sry er AS 750 250 Mean Bins 300 500 700 900 Amplitude Bin Values 7 10 6 X Axis Mode Select T able FFTOu Select Bin FFTview_ RFH o Zoom lt Axis Mode Show Values View Bins Show Range C Orthogonal 45 A 7 71 Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 72 The X Axis Mode box allows you to set up how the amplitude bins of the histogram will be represented on the display Choose the Show Values option to show the values for the Amplitude Bins Only some of the locations along the x axis may have their values displayed as space permits Choose the View Bins option to have the individual bins labeled with their unique order number If space does not permit only some of the bin numbers will be shown Choose the View Ranges option to show the left and right value boundaries for a particular bin Once again only some of the bins may be labeled depending on how much space is available 7 10 7 Zooming in on the Histogram You can zoom directly in to a particular location of the graph by clicking in the display and drawing a
410. with options for printing or copying the text of the status table You may also view or modify the selected value if it is a writable value as defined by the datalogger operating system Press the Refresh button to prompt RTDAQ to query the datalogger and update the values again This refresh option is also available from the right click menu 4 6 3 4 File Control The dataloggers used in RTDAQ have a built in file system much like a computer hard disk Multiple files can be stored in the datalogger s memory or on a PC card including data files calibration files and datalogger programs The dataloggers retain files in memory unless they are specifically deleted or removed as part of a program change operation The File Control window is used to manage all the files on the dataloggers The Datalogger File Control menu item opens File Control File Control CR1000 F 8 amp b Send Format Refresh Retrieve Run Options Delete Stop Program Help Device Bytes Free File Name Run Options Size Modified Attributes CPU 96768 FirstOne crl 1 085 KB 2007 12 12 13 04 00 RW CRD 255184896 Y 2007 12 12 13 04 06 Hst UpLim ar2 CR1 0 399 KB 2007 12 12 13 04 14 Set Run Options on Send 4 12 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 6 3 4 1 Datalogger Devices NOTE 4 6 3 4 2 Run Options Each datalogger will have a device designated as the CPU drive If an add in card is installed on the datalogger you
411. with the datalogger by communications trying to check the failed with the clock If that fails datalogger follow the steps for message 14 Program file receive start 55 Program file receive status Program file receive complete has been received The datalogger program has been received from the datalogger The datalogger failed Check communications to send the program with the datalogger by or communications trying to check the with the datalogger clock If that fails failed follow the steps for message 14 The server is requesting the datalogger program The actual program segments will appears as BMP1 message type 5 Program file receive failed Device restore from file succeeded On server startup a device previously entered in the network map has been restored 10 68 Message Text Device restore from file failed Device save to file succeeded Device save to file failed Packet delivery failed Unexpected change in datalogger table definitions Message Parameters Fault code 1 Incompatible BMP1 device or malformed packet 2 Routing failure unrecognized station number 3 Temporarily out of resources 4 Link failure Message Meaning On server startup a device in the network map could not be restored The update to the device configuration file was successful The update to the device configuration file failed This is a message from t
412. with the least significant byte written first to identify the record number for the first record in the frame e In the TOB3 format the offset field in the major frame footer no longer represents the number of frames back to the last minor frame This information is used in TOB2 to help accelerate searching for data but is not considered to be necessary in TOB3 because of the presence of the record number in the frame header A 3 Appendix A Campbell Scientific File Formats A 4 The TOB2 or TOB3 binary file format has the following structure with each header line terminated with a carriage return and line feed CRLF ASCII Header Line 1 ASCII Header Line 2 ASCII Header Line 3 Header line one describes the file environment with the following fields e Data file type TOB2 or TOB3 e Station name e Model name of the datalogger e Serial number of the datalogger e Operating system on the datalogger e Name of the program running in the datalogger e Signature of the program running in the datalogger e The time that the file was created Header line two contains e The name of the table as declared in the datalogger program e The non timestamped record interval e The data frame size e The intended table size e The validation stamp e The frame time resolution Header line three describes the names for each field in a table record as determined by the datalogger program Header line four describes the un
413. xed array data file type 2 189 for hrmn type 3 1200 and seconds are expressed as 4 5 A single colon is assumed to be between day and hrmn e g 2 189 means day 3 1200 means hours and 2 189 3 1200 means day and hour minute When the time synchronize function is used a time interval must be specified in the Copy line of the first data file For example 4 60 in the Copy line will create a synchronized file containing the data from the input files that occurred every 60 minutes If no time interval is specified in the Copy line then the time specified in the Start Condition becomes simply a starting time with no time synchronization Typically the starting time specified must actually be found in the input file before the Start Condition is satisfied e g if the input file starts at 1100 hrs and 1000 hrs is entered for the starting time with no day specified Split will skip over arrays until it reaches 1000 hrs the next day However the Start Stop On After Time function can be enabled Output tab Other button to trigger the start of processing when the exact time is found or at the first instance of data after that time has occurred Table based dataloggers Because the time stamp for a table based datalogger is all one string and therefore read by Split as one element the syntax is somewhat different All elements in the time stamp are specified by a 1 if the time stamp is the first item in each row of data
414. xt and choosing Edit Copy from the menu 6 3 Section 6 View Pro 6 3 3 Opening a File in Hexadecimal Format To open a file in hexadecimal format select File Open As Hex from the menu This may be useful when viewing binary files 6 4 Data View The initial display for data files in View Pro is as normal text in a grid format Figure 6 4 1 shows the View Pro main screen with two data files open The data file windows have been tiled horizontally amp View Pro 4 0 DEK Fie Edit View Window Help EEr RECORD myValue myValue FFT 1 myValue FFT 2 myValue FFT 3 myValue FFT 4 myValue FFT S myValue FFA 0 85 555 83 50111 78 467 73 6974 72 25334 74 72841 B 21 29697 107 1447 104 9765 99 91683 38 97975 74 8866 157 0051 38 53694 124 5806 122 8957 127 3017 82 66322 137 9747 230 9842 48 43575 134 5709 133 6312 145 1801 115 4626 179 0616 273 9326 49 10772 135 3181 134 3091 146 6066 117 6853 181 8699 276 8423 40 42482 126 7974 125 0993 131 042 88 8891 145 5018 238 9 24 04114 110 6862 108 0279 104 2844 43 64862 82 98978 168 3929 3 07769 90 02731 87 54101 80 43037 64 81606 64 86813 84 60605 18 47205 68 70662 67 52882 78 88542 134 7403 140 2944 61 34408 36 50292 50 79111 53 41718 96 62225 197 3466 216 3356 123 0633 47 5801 39 78189 46 96407 112 826 236 3513 264 3161 169 0149 49 59344 37 89906 46 05698 115 9777 243 4765 273 1714 177 5329 42 15939 45 57852 49 87576 104 3575 217 2331 241 0468 146 1057 26 69412 61 35089 60 72964 85 05
415. your saved settings and press Open Those settings will be immediately applied to the Rainflow screen 7 10 10 Accepting or Abandoning Changes to the Rainflow Graphing Options Scaling Visual Display Trace Save Chart Colors Titles Back Wall Color fo i CI Show Graph Title E Left Grid Color m m C Show Left Axis Title Right Grid Color E Color Each Bin After setting the various options for the Rainflow display press the Apply button to immediately put those changes into effect The Options screen will not be closed and the settings will be applied Press the OK button if you would like to apply the settings and also exit the Options screen Press Cancel if you would like to abandon any changes made to the settings since the screen was opened Online help may be accessed with the Help button Section 7 Monitoring Data in Real time 7 11 Saving and Loading Configurations RTDAQ provides multiple options for customizing the functionality and operation of the software You can save many of these custom options into a configuration file These configuration files are stored on the computer and can be used as needed to re load specific customizations RTDAQ creates configuration files containing options for each of its real time data monitoring screens as well as a master configuration file containing the current customization states for all configurable screens within the product There is a different set of individual
416. zard when you leave the Wizard it will ask if you wish to stay connected 4 5 Section 4 The RTDAQ Main Screen 4 2 6 Editing and Deleting Dataloggers Once you ve added a datalogger you may disconnect and use the other datalogger configuration buttons on the Toolbar to delete that datalogger edit its settings or add another datalogger to the Network Map RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000 CR1000 File View Datalogger Network Tools Help nitor Data Collect Data Datalogger Information Clocks Datalogger Name CR1000 ae Haager Type CR1000 Datalogger Se 4 3 Clock Program Tab Selection of the Clock Program tab brings up the Clock Program screen RTDAQ displays this tab by default when first executed 4 3 1 Basic Operation In this screen you can see brief details about the currently selected datalogger including its name in the Network Map its station name its connection information and its response time settings When connected you can also view the current time as given by the datalogger as well as the time given by the PC s clock You can set the clock on the datalogger to be synchronized with the PC clock You can also view the name of the current program running on the datalogger You can send a program or operating system to the datalogger You can also retrieve the currently running program to your PC RTDAQ 1 0 Datalogger Support Software CR1000

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User`s Manual - ICP DAS USA`s I  超小型デジタルムービーカメラ「チーズモービー」発売  Catalogo - Edierre  LG BH08LS20 + software  C.A 847  LG Optimus Black P970 Black  エアードレンシステム 取扱説明書  EFOY Comfort Installation Guide  Été 2013 - Canada Post  取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file